JP6799219B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that imparts gaming value to a player when the result of a predetermined game becomes a special result.

Conventionally, in a pachinko gaming machine, a game is executed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening arranged in a game area, and when the result of the game becomes a specific result mode, a game value is given to the player. In general, a special gaming state to be given occurs.

As such a gaming machine, a gaming machine (for example, a so-called two-kind pachinko machine) is provided in which a specific area is provided in the variable winning device and a special gaming state can be generated when a game ball wins in the specific area (for example). , Patent Document 1). The arrangement is capable diverted to a so-called one pachinko machine, in which case the gaming ball is determined whether or not finished in a specific area, performs the determination result to the determination of the based-out special gaming state ..

JP-A-2002-210116

However, in the above-mentioned game machine, if the game ball does not win a prize in a specific area, the interest of the game may be lowered.
Therefore, an object of the present invention is to enhance the interest of the game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is
In a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives a game value to a player when the result of a predetermined game becomes a special result.
A determination means for determining whether or not a game ball has flowed into a specific area and making a determination regarding the special gaming state based on the determination result is provided.
The specific area comprises a first specific area and a second specific area and a third specific area that are more advantageous than the first specific area .
The determining means includes a first movable member capable of guiding the game ball to either the first specific region or the third specific region, and a second movable member capable of guiding the game ball to the second specific region. With members,
The feature is that the game ball in the state of being guided to the first specific region by the first movable member can be guided to the second specific region by the action of the second movable member. To do.

According to the present invention, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

It is a front side perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a figure explaining the batch display device. It is a figure explaining the batch display device. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a front view and the front side perspective view of the variable winning device. It is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device. It is a figure explaining the sphere flow path forming member of a variable winning apparatus. It is an exploded perspective view of the large winning opening unit of a variable winning apparatus. It is an exploded perspective view of the drum accessory unit of the grand prize opening unit. It is a figure explaining the operation of the floor part of a drum accessory unit. It is a figure explaining the operation of the floor part of a drum accessory unit. It is a figure explaining the operation of the floor part of a drum accessory unit. It is a figure explaining the operation of the drum accessory of a drum accessory unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a drum accessory. It is a figure explaining the function of the left bottom part and the right bottom part of a drum accessory. It is an exploded perspective view of the drum accessory base unit of the drum accessory unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the V movable accessory unit of the grand prize opening unit. It is a figure explaining the positional relationship between the drum accessory base unit of a drum accessory unit, and the V movable member of a V movable accessory unit. It is a figure explaining the operation of the V movable member of a V movable accessory unit. It is a figure explaining the operation of the V movable member of a V movable accessory unit. It is a figure explaining the operation of the V movable member of a V movable accessory unit. It is a figure explaining the operation of the V movable member of a V movable accessory unit. It is a figure explaining the arrangement position of the 1V effect switch. It is a figure explaining the structure of the discharge flow path unit of a drum accessory unit. It is a figure explaining the structure of the discharge flow path unit of a drum accessory unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the determination device of a big winning opening unit. It is a front side perspective view of the determination device. It is a figure explaining the structure of the horizontally movable member and the horizontal base member of a determination device. It is a figure explaining the structure of the vertically movable member of a determination device. It is a timing chart explaining the initialization operation of the accessory. It is a timing chart explaining the small hit operation of an accessory. It is a timing chart explaining the jackpot operation of a character. It is a timing chart explaining the ball biting processing operation of an accessory. It is a block diagram of a game control device. It is a block diagram of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a game control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a game control device. It is a flowchart which shows the checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the input process. It is a flowchart which shows the switch reading process. It is a flowchart which shows the output process. It is a flowchart which shows the payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the winning opening switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows fraud & prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the winning number counter update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start port error monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the start port abnormality winning a prize monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the start port ball clogging monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the game machine state check process. It is a flowchart which shows the payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart which shows the residual sphere monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop error processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the hard random number acquisition process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a start port switch process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a start port switch process. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening count update process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific area switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure power-on operation processing. Special figure It is a flowchart which shows the usual processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 variation start process 1 and the special figure 1 variation start process 2. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process and special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during special figure change. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special figure display. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit middle processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit operation setting transition process and the timing chart of a small hit operation. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit residual sphere processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing in a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit operation transition setting process, and the timing chart of a big hit operation. It is a flowchart which shows the processing of the remaining ball of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect command setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol variation control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2-byte distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory solenoid control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the segment LED editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the motor control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the motor operation editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the motor operation editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormal discharge monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop error status update process. It is a flowchart which shows fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the launch control process. It is a flowchart which shows the external information editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the external information editing process. It is the flowchart which shows the pulse signal editing process, and the timing chart of the operation of the main prize ball signal transmission. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening pattern and the distribution setting of a big hit round in each special figure. It is a figure which shows the modification of the opening pattern and the distribution setting of a big hit round in each special figure. It is a figure explaining an example of the return operation at the end of a small hit. It is a figure explaining an example of the return operation at the end of a small hit. It is a figure which shows the modification of the pachinko machine. It is a back view which shows the back surface of the game board which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a back view which shows the back surface of the game board which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the back surface of the game board which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the 3rd relay board and the containment body which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a back view which shows the back surface of the game board which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the back surface of the game board which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a side view which shows the game board which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a side view which shows the game board which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a back view which shows the back surface of the game board which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the back surface of the game board which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view which shows the effect control board which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the back surface of the game board which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a back view which shows the back surface of the game board which concerns on embodiment of this invention.

Hereinafter, as Example 1 of the present invention, a mode example when applied to a pachinko machine will be described with reference to the drawings.
Here, a pachinko machine as an appropriate example of the gaming machine according to the present invention, particularly a pachinko machine of a type belonging to a so-called blade mono, will be sequentially described from FIG.
A. Front configuration of pachinko machine First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine of this example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 1 (game machine) of this example.
The pachinko machine 1 is a machine frame (main body frame) 2 fixed to an island on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and a machine frame 2 rotatably supported by a hinge portion 3. A front frame 4 that can be opened and closed with respect to the frame 2 is provided. A game board 30 (shown in FIG. 2) is attached to the front frame 4.

Further, a glass frame 5 is attached to the front frame 4 so as to cover the upper front surface thereof so as to be openable and closable. The game area 32 described later of the game board 30 can be visually recognized from the front through the glass plate (a transparent plastic board may be used, the reference numerals are omitted) held by the glass frame 5. Further, the glass frame 5 is pivotally supported by the front frame 4 at the hinge portion 3 so as to be openable and closable.
Here, the front frame 4 is referred to by the name of the game frame, and the glass frame 5 is sometimes referred to by the name of the front frame, but in this embodiment, the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 are described.
An operation panel 6 is provided on the lower side of the glass frame 5.
Normally, the pachinko machine 1 may be provided with a CR unit (card-type ball lending control unit) as a game medium lending device, but the illustration is omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 has a game nail planted on the front surface of a plate-shaped base material (so-called veneer), and a substantially circular area on the front surface is surrounded by a guide rail 31 to form a game area. 32 is formed. The game area 32 is an area for determining out or safe (determining whether or not a prize has been won) while dropping the driven game ball from above, and when the game ball enters the winning opening and becomes effectively safe. Is configured such that a predetermined number of game balls are discharged to an upper plate 7 provided at the lower part of the glass frame 5 (that is, discharged as a prize ball).
Further, a key insertion portion 8 of a locking device (not shown) of the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 is formed on the edge of the front frame 4 on the opening / closing side (right side in FIG. 1).

Further, the upper plate 7 provided at the lower part of the glass frame 5 temporarily holds the game ball before launch, which is discharged as a prize ball or a rental ball.
Further, the operation panel 6 is provided with a lower plate 10 on which the game ball of the upper plate 7 can be moved by the operation of the player, and a launch operation handle 11 for launching the game ball. The lower plate 10 is provided with a lower plate ball removing operation unit 10a that is operated when the game balls stored in the lower plate 10 are discharged.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 5, and decorations, effects, and notifications when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamps, LEDs, etc. are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example, red) ), A frame decoration device 12 (arranged on the left and right sides of the frame as shown in FIG. 1) for lighting (blinking), and a speaker (upper speaker) 13a that emits sound (for example, sound effect). 13b is provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 13c is also provided below the front frame 4. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speakers (upper speaker) 13a and 13b and the speaker (lower speaker) 13c. It should be noted that a lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 5.
The frame decoration device 12 on the right side when viewed from the front side of the game machine 1 is one of the auxiliary effect devices capable of executing the auxiliary effect which is the effect performed in response to the effect according to the progress of the game (game effect). A right-side protruding portion 12a is provided. The right-side protruding portion 12a is provided so as to project to the right side surface of the front frame 4, so that the player playing the game with the game machine 1 can see the game, and the game machine 1 plays the game. It is visible to anyone other than the player who is playing.

Further, the upper edge portion of the upper plate 7 is an upper plate decoration portion 7a, and the upper plate decoration portion 7a has an effect button switch 15a (shown in FIG. 36) for receiving a pressing operation input from a player. ) Is provided in the effect button 15. Further, a touch panel 16 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 15.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 16 is provided integrally with the effect button 15, but the touch panel 16 may be separate from the effect button 15. For example, a sub display device may be provided in the vicinity of the effect button 15. A touch panel 16 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Further, to the right of the effect button 15, there is a ball lending button 17 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a discharge that is operated to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A button 18, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided.
In the game machine 1 of the first embodiment, the player rotates the launch operation handle 11 to move the game ball supplied from the upper plate 7 to the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire towards. Further, by operating the effect button 15 and the touch panel 16 by the player, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened.

B. Configuration of Game Board FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the pachinko machine 1 (game machine) of this example. In FIG. 2, reference numeral 31 is a guide rail of the game board 30, and as described above, the game area 32 is formed by surrounding the substantially circular area on the front surface of the game board 30 with the guide rail 31.
A pair of first start winning openings 33a and 33b (first starting openings) are provided at the lower part of the game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 of the game board 30 and separated from each other to the left and right, and these first starting winning openings A second starting winning opening 34 (second starting opening) is provided at the center between the openings 33a and 33b.
The pair of first starting winning openings 33a and 33b (first starting openings) are also referred to as left starting openings and right starting openings, respectively. Further, the second starting winning opening 34 (second starting opening) is also referred to as a middle starting opening.
The first start winning openings 33a and 33b are provided with a left starting opening switch 105 and a right starting opening switch 106 (shown in FIG. 35) for detecting game balls that have won in the first starting winning openings 33a and 33b, respectively. Has been done. Further, the second start winning opening 34 is provided with a middle starting opening switch 107 (shown in FIG. 35) for detecting a game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening 34. Further, a variable winning device 35 is provided in the center of the game area 32.

In addition, the game area 32 is provided with a ball striking direction changing member called a windmill, a large number of obstacle nails, general winning openings 36a and 36b, out holes 37, and the like. Of these, the general winning openings 36a and 36b have winning opening switches 102 for detecting the game balls that have entered the general winning openings 36a and 36b (there are 1 to n depending on the number of general winning openings) ( (Shown in FIG. 35) is arranged.

The variable winning device 35 is attached to the mounting opening 38a (shown in FIG. 5) formed in the game board unit 38 from the front side of the game board unit 38, and forms a winning space 41 in which the front side is open. It has a winning space forming member 42. Further, the front side of the variable winning device 35 is in a state of protruding to the vicinity of the glass plate covering the front surface of the game board 30, and the game ball is inside the variable winning device 35 except when the movable members 43a and 43b are opened. Is not included.
Further, the variable winning device 35 is provided with decorative members 48a and 48b decorated to imitate a human being. The decorative members 48a and 48b may be configured to be operable.

As shown in FIG. 2, a superstructure member (armor member) 44 is provided above the winning space 41 so as to project forward from the surface of the game board 30, and functions as a decorative device above the variable winning device 35. At the same time, the game ball flowing down from above the variable winning device 35 is prevented from entering the winning space 41, and the game ball is guided in the left-right direction. An information display 45 is provided on the superstructure member 44.
The information display 45 displays information according to the game state, and can display a plurality of identification information (for example, numbers, characters, symbols, etc.). The information display 45 displays a demo screen, displays when the game ball has won the starting winning openings 33a, 33b, and 34, and when the game ball has won a prize in a specific area provided in the determination device 80 (when a special game occurs). ), Display during a special game state, and other displays related to various game states.
The information display 45 is not controlled by the game control device 100 (FIG. 35) described later, but is controlled by the effect control device 300 as shown in FIG. 36.

The information display 45 has a configuration in which two 7-segment LEDs are arranged, and displays various gaming states by combining the LEDs.
When the game ball wins the first start winning openings 33a and 33b (first starting opening) by the two 7-segment LEDs, various game states (that is, when the game ball wins the starting winning openings 33a and 33b). Display, display when the game ball wins a prize in a specific area provided in the determination device 80 (when a special game occurs, display during a special game state, etc.), or when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 34 (second) Various game states performed when a prize is won in the starting opening (that is, a display when the game ball wins in the starting winning opening 34, and when the game ball wins in a specific area provided in the determination device 80 (special game occurs). Time) display, display during special game state, etc.).
Regarding the hold, when the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 34 (second start opening), only one special figure is held (hold of special figure 2), but the game ball is held. When a prize is won in the first starting winning openings 33a and 33b (first starting opening), the special drawing is not held (the special drawing 1 is not held). Therefore, only one special figure is displayed on hold for the special figure 2.
In the first embodiment, the information display 45 is provided with an LED, but the information display 45 is not limited to this, and may be provided with a display such as a liquid crystal display, an EL, or a CRT.
Further, the installation location of the information display 45 is not limited to the location shown in FIG. 2, and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, on the lower right side of the game board 30, a batch display device 50 is provided on the outside of the guide rail 31, and the batch display device 50 arranges two 7-segment LEDs and a plurality of small dot LEDs. It is configured. The batch display device 50 displays a so-called special figure (this special figure), a hold display of the start memory of the special figure (this special figure) (in some cases, a special figure hold display), and a display of the game state. It is composed of, for example, a plurality of indicators having an LED as a light emitting source (for example, an indicator consisting of one small lamp, or an indicator of, for example, 7 segments capable of displaying numbers and the like as the special figure). .. For example, among the LED segments in the batch display device 50, the one displaying the special figure 1 is arranged as the special figure 1 display, and the one displaying the special figure 2 is arranged as the special figure 2 display.

As shown in FIG. 3A, the batch display device 50 is a special figure 1 display (first special figure) for a special figure 1 variable display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. Variable display unit) D1 and special figure 2 special figure 2 display for variable display game (second special figure variable display unit) D2 and special figure 2 variable display game start memory number notification consisting of LED lamps, etc. The storage display units D11 and D12 of the above are provided.
Further, the batch display device 50 includes round display units D3 to D6 composed of LED lamps and the like.
Further, the batch display device 50 has, as the state display unit, the first game state display units D7 and D8 indicating that the game is in the big hit (during the special game state), and the specified number of times since the end of the previous special game state (here, the special game state). It is provided with second game state display units D9, D10 and D13 to D18 indicating that it is a continuous big hit when a special game state occurs again in the execution of the special figure variation display game within 10 times).

As shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, the special figure fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display D1 and the special figure 2 display D2 fluctuates by blinking the central segment during the fluctuation display. Display that it is inside. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 msec.
In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display D1, as shown in FIG. 3A, the game is provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment display in addition to the central segment. The eighth segment is also blinked to indicate that it is changing, and is configured so that special figure 1 and special figure 2 can be distinguished.
Then, with the end of the fluctuation time, the stop symbol set at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game is displayed as a result.

The storage display units D11 and D12 are lit as shown in FIG. 3C when there is a hold in FIG.
All of the round display units D3 to D6 are turned off when not in the special game state, and a part corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds determined by using the determination device 80 is turned on during the special game state. Become. The round display unit may be composed of a display on the 7-segment side. In the present embodiment, when the number of rounds is 16, the round display units D3 and D5 are lit as shown in FIG. 3D, and when the number of rounds is 8, as shown in FIG. 4A. When the round display units D3 and D6 are lit and the number of rounds is 5, the round display units D4 and D6 are lit as shown in FIG. 4B.

The first game state display units D7 and D8 are composed of LED lamps and the like, and indicate whether or not the special game state is in progress (during a big hit), and as shown in FIG. 4C, the special game state is in progress. Turns on when is, and turns off when not in the special game state.
The second game state display units D9, D10 and D13 to D18 are composed of LED lamps and the like, and indicate that they are in a special game state which is a continuous big hit, and as shown in FIG. 4D, the continuous big hit. It lights up during the special game state, which is, and turns off when it is not in the special game state, which is a continuous jackpot.
By providing the second game status display units D9, D10 and D13 to D18, more LEDs are lit in the case of continuous big hits than in the case of non-continuous big hits, and at first glance it is a continuous big hit. You will understand.
As a result, it is possible to show the player that it is a continuous big hit, so that it is possible to give the player a great sense of accomplishment, and it is possible to show that it is a continuous big hit to the surroundings. It is possible to give a person a sense of superiority and improve the interest of the game.
In addition, since it is possible to show the clerk of the game store that the jackpot is continuous, it is possible to warn the clerk of the game store whether or not the jackpot is generated due to fraudulent activity when the continuous jackpot occurs frequently.

FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 30.
As shown in FIG. 5, the game board 30 includes a game board unit 38, a variable winning device 35 mounted on the mounting opening 38a of the game board unit 38 from the front side of the game board unit 38, and the game board unit 38. A control base unit 39 mounted from the rear surface side of the game board unit 38 is provided.

FIG. 6A is a front view of the variable winning device 35, and FIG. 6B is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 35. Further, FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 35.
As shown in FIG. 7, the variable winning device 35 includes a center case unit (front component) 35a and a large winning opening unit (back surface component) mounted on the center case unit 35a from the rear surface side of the center case unit 35a. It is configured to include a 35b, a large winning opening solenoid 201, 202 mounted on the center case unit 35a from the rear surface side of the large winning opening unit 35b, and a heat radiating plate 35c.

As shown in FIG. 6, an accessory device 51 (guidance device) is provided below the winning space 41.
Then, when the left and right movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened, the game ball flows into the winning space 41 and passes through the ball flow path formed by the ball flow path forming member 47. There is. The spheres that have flowed into the winning space 41 and passed through the sphere flow path formed by the sphere flow path forming member 47 are distributed by the central accessory device 51 and flow into the discharge flow path or the determination device 80 in the variable winning device 35. It is designed to do. It should be noted that there is a possibility of a big hit only when the process proceeds to the determination device 80.

The movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 have a rotation center at the lower end portion (base end portion) thereof, and are controlled by the game control device 100 described later. It can rotate left and right by driving the large winning opening solenoid 202 (shown in FIG. 35). When the movable members 43a and 43b are standing substantially vertically, the movable members 43a and 43b are in a state of blocking the winning space 41, and the game ball cannot be won in the variable winning device 35. That is, this state is the first state that is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, in a state where the left and right movable members 43a and 43b are rotated in a direction away from each other around the lower end portion, the movable members 43a and 43b open in an inverted "C" shape to open the winning space 41. The open state is set, and the variable winning device 35 can be won. That is, this state is a second state that is advantageous for the player. In the case of neither the starting game state nor the special game state (in the case of the normal game state and the special game standby state), the movable members 43a and 43b are kept in the closed state (first state).

The movable members 43a and 43b are the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 in the starting game based on the establishment of the starting condition (here, the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 33a, 33b or the second starting winning opening 34). Is changed for a predetermined time, and then is converted into the second state in a predetermined mode by driving the first special winning opening solenoid 201 and the second winning opening solenoid 202 (shown in FIG. 35) (so-called small hit operation, Details will be described later), and the opportunity to win a prize in the variable winning device 35 has been obtained. Note that the special figures 1 and 2 here are the special drawings displayed by the LEDs of the batch display device 50.
That is, based on the game balls winning in the first start winning openings 33a and 33b being detected by the left starting opening switch 105 and the right starting opening switch 106, the special figure 1 changes for a predetermined time and all the stop symbols. As a result of the above, the opening is performed once. Similarly, based on the game ball winning in the second start winning opening 34 being detected by the middle starting opening switch 107, the special figure 2 fluctuates for a predetermined time and is opened twice in the result mode of all the stop symbols. I do.
In the case of opening once, the opening operation of a predetermined mode such that the movable members 43a and 43b perform an opening operation (converted to the second state) and close again after a predetermined time elapses (for example, after 400 msec elapses) is performed. It is supposed to be done once. When the movable members 43a and 43b are opened twice, the movable members 43a and 43b perform a predetermined opening operation (for example, an opening operation with an opening time of 400 msec) twice with a predetermined time (for example, 1000 msec) closing operation. It has become like.

Here, the number of times of opening is not limited to the above contents, and when the first starting winning openings 33a and 33b are won, the opening may be performed once or twice, or the opening operation may be performed three or more times. You may do so. The same applies when the second start winning opening 34 is won, and when the second starting winning opening 34 is won, the opening operation is not limited to two times, and the opening operation is performed three or more times with a predetermined probability. Good.
The game ball that has flowed into the winning space 41 of the variable winning device 35 passes through either the left large winning opening switch 103 or the right large winning opening switch 104 (see FIG. 35), and is formed by the ball flow path forming member 47. It flows into the formed spherical flow path.
Specifically, the left large winning opening switch 103 is arranged in a space near the base end of the movable member 43a in the variable winning device 35, and is formed by a game ball (that is, a ball flow path forming member 47) flowing into the accessory device 51. The game ball flowing into the ball flow path) is detected. Since the left grand prize opening switch 103 is installed in the internal space of the variable winning device 35, it cannot be shown directly in FIG. 2, but the left grand winning opening switch 103 is installed in the variable winning device 35. It is installed in the internal space. This is the same for FIGS. 6 and 7.

Further, the right large winning opening switch 104 is arranged in a space near the base end portion of the movable member 43b in the variable winning device 35, and is formed by a game ball (that is, a ball flow path forming member 47) flowing into the accessory device 51. The game ball that flows into the ball flow path) is detected. Similarly, since the right grand prize opening switch 104 is also installed in the internal space of the variable winning device 35, it cannot be shown directly in FIG. 2, but the right grand prize opening switch 104 is installed as a variable winning place. It is installed in the internal space of the device 35. This is the same for FIGS. 6 and 7.
The left grand prize opening switch 103 and the right grand prize opening switch 104 are provided because the variable winning device 35 needs a detection function for determining that the game ball has won a prize. Therefore, the left grand prize opening switch 103 and the right grand prize opening switch 103 The right big winning opening switch 104 is arranged.
In addition, as will be described later, specific area switches 80a to 80d (see FIG. 35) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a specific area provided in the determination device 80 are arranged inside the variable winning device 35. However, the specific area is an area for detecting a V prize, and is not a prize opening for receiving a prize ball. If the game ball flows into a specific area provided in the determination device 80 (V prize), it becomes a big hit and becomes a special game state.

Further, inside the variable winning device 35, a first residual ball discharge port switch 112 and a second residual ball discharge port switch 113 (see FIG. 35) are arranged. The first remaining ball discharge port switch 112 detects the game ball that has flowed into the discharge flow path of the variable winning device 35, and whether or not the game ball that has flowed into the discharge flow path remains in the variable winning device 35. It has a function to detect. Further, the second remaining ball discharge port switch 113 detects a game ball that has passed through a specific area provided in the determination device 80, and the game ball that has passed through the specific area remains in the variable winning device 35. It has a function to detect whether or not it is present.

8A and 8B are views for explaining the ball flow path forming member 47 of the variable winning device 35, FIG. 8A is a front perspective view of the ball flow path forming member 47, and FIG. 8B is a front view. 8 (c) is an exploded perspective view of the upstream member 47a of the sphere flow path forming member 47, and FIG. 8 (d) is an exploded perspective view of the sphere flow path forming member 47. It is an exploded perspective view of the downstream member 47b of 47.
As shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the ball flow path forming member 47 is composed of an upstream member 47a and a downstream member 47b, and the game ball that has flowed into the winning space 41 of the variable winning device 35 is first described. Passing through the flow path formed by the upstream member 47a, and then passing through the flow path formed by the downstream member 47b, the accessory device 51 (specifically, the drum accessory unit 60 of the accessory device 51). Inflow to.

The ball flow path forming member 47 is provided with measures against a thread fishing ball (a game ball with a thread attached).
Specifically, the upstream member 47a includes a front surface portion 47a1 and a rear surface portion 47a2 as shown in FIG. 8 (c), and as shown in FIG. 8 (a), the front surface portion 47a1 and the rear surface portion 47a2 are formed. By coalescing, specifically, the front surface portion 47a1 and the rear surface portion 47a2 come into contact with each other's end faces (hereinafter, simply referred to as "end faces") to guide the game ball to the left side. It forms a flow path composed of a lower flow path that guides the lower side. The upstream member 47a has a first gap portion 47a3 at a switching portion from the left flow path to the lower flow path. As shown in FIG. 8C, the end surface of the rear surface portion 47a2 is provided with a non-contact portion 47a21 that does not abut on the end surface of the front surface portion 47a1. The non-contact portion 47a21 is formed by denting a part of the end surface of the rear surface portion 47a2, and the first gap portion 47a3 is formed by the non-contact portion 47a21.
Further, the downstream member 47b includes a left surface portion 47b1 and a right surface portion 47b2 as shown in FIG. 8 (d), and as shown in FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (b), the left surface portion 47b1 and the right surface portion 47b2. The front flow path that guides the game ball to the front side by bringing the left face portion 47b1 and the right face portion 47b2 into contact with each other (hereinafter, simply referred to as "end face"). A flow path is formed consisting of a lower flow path leading to the lower side and a right flow path leading to the right side. Then, as shown in FIG. 8B, the downstream member 47b has a second gap portion 47b3 at the switching portion from the lower flow path to the right flow path. As shown in FIG. 8D, a non-contact portion 47b11 that does not abut on the end surface of the right surface portion 47b2 is provided on the end surface of the left surface portion 47b1. The non-contact portion 47b11 bends the tip portion of a part of the left surface portion 47b1 (the portion having the non-contact portion 47b11 at the tip) so that the non-contact portion 47b11 does not face the end surface of the right surface portion 47b2. The second gap 47b3 is formed by the non-contact surface 47b11.

As described above, the ball flow path forming member 47 has a structure in which the thread attached to the thread fishing ball is easily caught by having two gaps. Therefore, even if the thread fishing ball is attempted to flow into the accessory device 51 through the ball flow path formed by the ball flow path forming member 47, the thread is caught and it becomes difficult for the thread to flow into the accessory device 51, and the thread Even if you try to move the game ball up and down by operating, the thread is caught and it becomes difficult to perform the operation, so that fraudulent acts by the thread fishing ball can be effectively suppressed.
The number and position of the gaps provided in the sphere flow path forming member 47 can be changed as appropriate.

FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the large winning opening unit 35b of the variable winning device 35.
As shown in FIG. 9, the large winning opening unit 35b includes a unit base 52, a drum accessory unit 60 mounted on the unit base 52 from the front side of the unit base 52, and a determination device (round determination device unit) 80. The unit base 52 is provided with a V movable accessory unit 70 mounted from the rear surface side of the unit base 52.
The accessory device 51 arranged below the winning space 41 includes a drum accessory unit 60 and a V movable accessory unit 70.

FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the drum accessory unit 60 of the grand prize opening unit 35b.
As shown in FIG. 10, the drum accessory unit 60 includes a floor portion 61, a drum accessory 62 arranged behind the floor portion 61, and a drum accessory base arranged behind the drum accessory 62. The unit 63, the left support member 64a and the right support member 64b that rotatably support the floor portion 61 and the drum accessory 62 rotatably, and are arranged below the floor portion 61 and the drum accessory 62. The discharge flow path unit 65 forming the discharge flow path in the variable winning device 35 is provided.

11 to 13 are views for explaining the operation of the floor portion 61 of the drum accessory unit 60. 11A and 11B are right side views of the main part of the drum accessory unit 60, FIG. 11A shows a normal state of the floor part 61, and FIG. 11B shows an operating state of the floor part 61. 12A and 12B are views showing a normal state of the floor portion 61, FIG. 12A is a perspective view on the upper surface side, and FIG. 12B is a top view. 13A and 13B are views showing the operating state of the floor portion 61, FIG. 13A is a perspective view on the upper surface side, and FIG. 13B is a top view.
The floor portion 61 is rotatably attached to the left support member 64a and the right support member 64b about the rotation shaft 61a. As shown in FIG. 10, the rotation shaft 61a is provided on the front end side of the floor portion 61 (the side opposite to the drum accessory 62), and the floor portion 61 is on the rear end side (drum) of the floor portion 61. The accessory 62 side) rotates so as to move up and down.
As shown in FIG. 11, a drive mechanism for rotationally driving the floor portion 61 is attached to the right support member 64b. The drive mechanism includes a floor accessory solenoid 61b1 controlled by the game control device 100, and a link member 61b2 having one end connected to the plunger 61b11 of the floor accessory solenoid 61b1 and the other end connected to the floor portion 61. Will be done.

When the floor accessory solenoid 61b1 is turned off, as shown in FIG. 11A, the plunger 61b11 of the floor accessory solenoid 61b1 is in a protruding state and pushes down the link member 61b2. As a result, the rear end side of the floor portion 61 moves downward, and as shown in FIG. 12, the gap between the floor portion 61 and the drum accessory 62 becomes larger than the diameter of the game ball.
On the other hand, when the floor accessory solenoid 61b1 is turned on, as shown in FIG. 11B, the plunger 61b11 of the floor accessory solenoid 61b1 is pushed in and the link member 61b2 is pulled up. As a result, the rear end side of the floor portion 61 moves upward, and as shown in FIG. 13, the gap between the floor portion 61 and the drum accessory 62 becomes smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

The game ball that has flowed into the winning space 41 is guided to the floor portion 61 of the drum accessory unit 60 by the ball flow path formed by the ball flow path forming member 47, but the floor accessory solenoid 61b1 is normally OFF. In the state, since the gap between the floor portion 61 and the drum accessory 62 is larger than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball guided to the floor portion 61 falls from the gap into the discharge flow path. On the other hand, in the operating state in which the floor accessory solenoid 61b1 is ON, the gap between the floor portion 61 and the drum accessory 62 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball guided to the floor portion 61 falls. It is maintained on the floor 61 (that is, in front of the drum accessory 62) without doing so.

FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating the operation of the drum accessory 62 of the drum accessory unit 60, and is a right side view of a main part of the drum accessory unit 60.
The drum accessory 62 is an accessory that imitates a double-sided drum, and is rotatably attached to a left support member 64a and a right support member 64b around a rotation shaft 62a. As shown in FIG. 10, the rotating shaft 62a penetrates the body portion 62b of the drum accessory 62, and both ends of the rotating shaft 62a are from the left bottom portion 62c and the right bottom portion 62d that close the opening of the body portion 62b. It is protruding. A plurality of magnets 62e (shown in FIG. 15) are built in the body portion 62b. The magnet 62e is for attracting (holding in contact with) the game ball in contact with the magnet arrangement location (the location where the magnet 62e is arranged) on the outer peripheral surface of the body portion 62b. ..

As shown in FIG. 14, a drive mechanism for rotationally driving the drum accessory 62 is attached to the right support member 64b. The drive mechanism is attached to a drum accessory motor 66 controlled by the game control device 100, a drive gear (not shown) attached to the output shaft of the drum accessory motor 66, and a rotating shaft 62a of the drum accessory 62. The driven gear 67c is composed of a first intermediate gear 67a and a second intermediate gear 67b that interlock the drive gear and the driven gear 767c.
When the drum accessory motor 66 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the right side of the game machine 1, the drive gear is counterclockwise, and the first intermediate gear 67a that meshes with the drive gear is clockwise. The second intermediate gear 67b that meshes with the first intermediate gear 67a rotates counterclockwise, and the driven gear 67c that meshes with the second intermediate gear 67b rotates clockwise. That is, when the taiko drum accessory unit 60 is viewed from the right side of the game machine 1 and the drum accessory motor 66 rotates counterclockwise, as shown in FIG. It is configured to rotate clockwise when viewed from the right side. Therefore, when the drum accessory motor 66 rotates counterclockwise, the drum accessory 62 rotates from the bottom to the top, and the game ball can be lifted from the bottom to the top.

FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the drum accessory 62.
As shown in FIG. 15, the body portion 62b of the drum accessory 62 includes an inner body portion 62b1 and an outer body portion 62b2. At a position corresponding to the magnet arrangement portion in the inner body portion 62b1, a concave portion recessed inside (on the side opposite to the outer body portion 62b2) is formed. The recess is for accommodating the magnet 62e, and the magnet 62e is sandwiched between the inner body portion 62b1 and the outer body portion 62b2 in a state of being accommodated in the recess.
A recessed recess is formed inside (on the inner body portion 62b1 side) at a position corresponding to the magnet arrangement portion in the outer body portion 62b2. The recess is for facilitating the attraction of the game ball to the magnet arrangement portion of the body portion 62b and suppressing the wobbling of the game ball attracted to the magnet arrangement portion of the body portion 62b. The game ball attracted to the magnet arrangement portion is lifted from the bottom to the top by the drum accessory 62 that rotates from the bottom to the top while being fitted in the recess.

The game ball guided to the floor 61 by the ball flow path formed by the ball flow path forming member 47 is maintained on the floor 61 without falling when the floor accessory solenoid 61b1 is in the operating state. However, in this case, since the floor portion 61 is inclined downward toward the rear side (that is, the side of the drum accessory 62), the game ball maintained on the floor portion 61 serves as a drum. It comes into contact with the body portion 62b of the object 62. Then, when the game ball comes into contact with the magnet arrangement portion of the body portion 62b, it is attracted to the magnet arrangement portion and is lifted from the bottom to the top by the drum accessory 62 that rotates from the bottom to the top, and is lifted from the rotation shaft 62a. It is guided from the floor portion 61 located on the lower side to the guide surface portion 63d1 (described later) of the guide member 63d located on the upper side of the rotation shaft 62a.
The body 62b (inner body 62b1 and outer body 62b2) of the drum accessory 62 is made of a material capable of transmitting light, and as shown in FIG. 15, an LED substrate 62f is arranged inside the body 62b. It is installed. As a result, the drum accessory 62 can perform not only a rotation effect but also a light emission effect.

16A and 16B are views for explaining the functions of the left bottom portion 62c and the right bottom portion 62d of the drum accessory 62, FIG. 16A is a right side view of the drum accessory 62, and FIG. 16B is a right side view. 16 (c) is a left side view of the drum accessory 62, and FIG. 16 (d) is an inner perspective view of the left bottom 62c.
As shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, the right bottom portion 62d has a plurality of inlets 62d1, and each inlet 62d1 is provided with an inlet fin 62d2. The intake fin 62d2 is configured to be able to increase the efficiency of air inflow to the intake port 62d1 when the drum accessory 62 rotates from the bottom to the top.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 16C and 16D, the left bottom portion 62c has a plurality of outlets 62c1, and each outlet 62c1 is provided with an outlet fin 62c2. The outlet fin 62c2 is configured to be able to increase the efficiency of air outflow from the outlet 62c1 when the drum accessory 62 rotates from bottom to top.
As a result, when the drum accessory 62 rotates from the bottom to the top, air escapes from right to left inside the drum accessory 62, so that the LED substrate 62f built in the drum accessory 62 is used. Can be cooled.

FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view of the drum accessory base unit 63 of the drum accessory unit 60.
As shown in FIG. 17, the drum accessory base unit 63 includes a base member 63a, a back member 63b and a back discharge flow path forming member 63c mounted on the base member 63a from the front side of the base member 63a, and a back member. The 63b is provided with a guide member 63d mounted from the front side of the back member 63b.
The base member 63a is formed by bending an iron plate, and a triangular hole is formed in the fold so that the base member 63a is not cracked along the fold due to impact shaking or the like.
The guiding member 63d includes a guiding surface portion 63d1, a left standing wall portion 63d2 that stands upward from the left end of the guiding surface portion 63d1, and a right standing wall portion 63d3 that stands upward from the right end of the guiding surface portion 63d1. doing. The guide surface portion 63d1 is inclined downward toward the rear side, and a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball is provided between the guide surface portion 63d1 and the back surface member 63b.

FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the V movable accessory unit 70 of the large winning opening unit 35b.
As shown in FIG. 18, the V movable accessory unit 70 includes a V movable accessory base 71, a motor cover 72 mounted on the V movable accessory base 71 from the front side of the V movable accessory base 71, and a motor. A V movable accessory motor 73 mounted on the cover 72 from the front side of the motor cover 72, and a drive gear 74 and a rack 75 mounted on the V movable accessory base 71 from the front side of the V movable accessory base 71. A slide member 76 mounted on the rack 75 from the front side of the rack 75, and a V movable member 77 mounted on the slide member 76 from the front side of the slide member 76 are provided.
The V movable accessory unit 70 is configured to slide the V movable member 77 in the left-right direction.

The V movable accessory base 71 is provided with guide holes 71a along the left-right direction. The guide hole 71a is for guiding the slide movement of the rack 75 and defining the slide range of the rack 75. A protrusion 75a is provided on the rear surface side of the rack 75, and the rack 75 is slidably attached to the V movable accessory base 71 in the left-right direction with the protrusion 75a inserted into the guide hole 71a. Has been done.
The slide member 76 is a fixed portion 76a fixed to the V movable accessory base 71 and a slide portion slidably attached to the fixed portion 76a which is long in the left-right direction along the longitudinal direction of the fixed portion 76a. 76b and the like. A V movable member 77 is fixed to the front surface side of the slide portion 76b, and a rack 75 is fixed to the rear surface side of the slide portion 76b.
The drive mechanism for sliding-driving the V movable member 77 (specifically, the slide portion 76b and the V movable member 77 fixed to the slide portion 76b) is a V movable accessory motor 73 controlled by the game control device 100. It is composed of a drive gear 74 attached to the output shaft of the V movable accessory motor 73, and a rack 75 that meshes with the drive gear 74.

FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the drum accessory base unit 63 of the drum accessory unit 60 and the V movable member 77 of the V movable accessory unit 70, and FIG. 19 (a) shows the drum role. It is a figure explaining the positional relationship between the guide member 63d of the thing base unit 63, and the V movable member 77, and FIG. 19 (b) shows the back member 63b of the drum accessory base unit 63, the V movable member 77, and It is a figure explaining the positional relationship of.
As shown in FIG. 19B, the V movable member 77 is arranged in front of the back member 63b of the drum accessory base unit 63, and the slide portion 76b of the slide member 76 is the base of the drum accessory base unit 63. It is arranged behind the member 63a.
As shown in FIG. 19A, the lower end portion of the V movable member 77 of the V movable accessory unit 70 is a game ball accommodating portion 77a having an open front surface, and the game ball accommodating portion 77a is a guide surface portion. It is arranged between 63d1 and the back surface member 63b.

The guide surface portion 63d1 is inclined downward toward the rear side, and a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball is provided between the guide surface portion 63d1 and the back surface member 63b. Therefore, the game ball lifted by the drum accessory 62 and guided to the guide surface portion 63d1 of the guide member 63d is accommodated in the game ball accommodating portion 77a of the V movable member 77, or the guide surface portion 63d1 and the back surface member. It falls from the gap with 63b. The game ball that has fallen from the gap flows into the discharge flow path of the variable winning device 35 via the back discharge flow path formed by the back discharge flow path forming member 63c.
The V movable member 77 includes a discharge flow path guiding position in which the game ball accommodating portion 77a of the V movable member 77 is located on the left side of the left standing wall portion 63d2 of the guiding member 63d of the drum accessory base unit 63, and the V. The game ball accommodating portion 77a of the movable member 77 is configured to be slidably movable between the deciding device guiding position located on the right side of the right standing wall portion 63d3 of the guiding member 63d of the drum accessory base unit 63. ..

20 to 23 are views for explaining the operation of the V movable member 77 of the V movable accessory unit 70. FIG. 20 is a view showing a state in which the V movable member 77 is in the initial position, and FIG. 20 (a) is a front view of the drum accessory unit 60 and the V movable accessory unit 70, FIG. 20 (b). Is a top perspective view of the drum accessory unit 60 and the V movable accessory unit 70. FIG. 21A is a diagram showing a state in which the V movable member 77 is in the discharge flow path guiding position, and FIG. 21B is a diagram showing a state in which the V movable member 77 is in the left normal operating position. FIG. 22A is a diagram showing a state in which the V movable member 77 is in the right normal operating position, and FIG. 22B is a diagram showing a state in which the V movable member 77 is in the determination device guidance position. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of a main part showing a state in which the V movable member 77 is in the discharge flow path guiding position.
As shown in FIG. 20, when the V movable member 77 is in the initial position, the game ball accommodating portion 77a of the V movable member 77 is formed by the left standing wall portion 63d2 and the right standing wall portion 63d3 of the guiding member 63d. It is located approximately in the middle (specifically, slightly to the right of the middle between the left standing wall portion 63d2 and the right standing wall portion 63d3).

As shown in FIG. 21A, when the V movable member 77 is in the discharge flow path guiding position, the game ball accommodating portion 77a of the V movable member 77 is more than the left standing wall portion 63d2 of the guiding member 63d. Located on the left side.
As shown in FIG. 21B, when the V movable member 77 is in the left normal operating position, the game ball accommodating portion 77a of the V movable member 77 stands upright with the left standing wall portion 63d2 of the guiding member 63d. It is located on the leftmost side between the wall portion 63d3.
As shown in FIG. 22A, when the V movable member 77 is in the right normal operating position, the game ball accommodating portion 77a of the V movable member 77 stands upright with the left standing wall portion 63d2 of the guiding member 63d. It is located on the far right side of the wall with 63d3.
As shown in FIG. 22B, when the V movable member 77 is in the determination device guiding position, the game ball accommodating portion 77a of the V movable member 77 is on the right side of the right standing wall portion 63d3 of the guiding member 63d. Located in.

While the V movable member 77 is moving between the left normal operation position and the right normal operation position, the game ball accommodating portion 77a of the V movable member 77 is formed between the guide surface portion 63d1 and the back member 63b of the guide member 63d. Located in the gap. Therefore, while the V movable member 77 is moving between the left normal operation position and the right normal operation position, the game ball accommodating state (the game ball is accommodated in the game ball accommodating portion 77a) by the guide surface portion 63d1. State) is maintained.
On the other hand, when the V movable member 77 reaches the discharge flow path guidance position, there is no one (guide surface portion 63d1) that maintains the game ball housing state in front of the game ball housing portion 77a of the V movable member 77, so that the game ball is accommodated. The game ball housed in the game ball accommodating portion 77a falls from the game ball accommodating portion 77a.
As shown in FIG. 23, the back discharge flow path forming member 63c is provided with a projecting piece 63c1 projecting toward the front side, and the projecting piece 63c1 is inclined downward toward the rear side. When the V movable member 77 is in the discharge flow path guiding position, the game ball that has fallen from the game ball accommodating portion 77a is discharged from the back by the body portion 62b of the drum accessory 62 and the protruding piece 63c1 of the back discharge flow path forming member 63c. It is guided to the back discharge flow path formed by the flow path forming member 63c. The game ball guided to the back discharge flow path flows into the discharge flow path of the variable winning device 35 via the back discharge flow path.
It is also possible to take measures against a thread fishing ball on the back discharge flow path forming member 63c, such as providing a notch in the protruding piece 63c1 or providing a notch in the discharge port to the discharge flow path in the variable winning device 35.

Further, even when the V movable member 77 reaches the determination device guidance position, there is no device (guide surface portion 63d1) that maintains the game ball housing state in front of the game ball housing portion 77a of the V movable member 77, so that the game ball. The game ball accommodated in the accommodating portion 77a falls from the gaming ball accommodating portion 77a. Then, when the V movable member 77 is in the determination device guidance position, the game ball that has fallen from the game ball accommodating portion 77a flows into the determination device 80.
The back member 63b of the drum accessory base unit 63 has a built-in first V effect switch 63b1 for detecting the inflow of a game ball into the determination device 80.

FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an arrangement position of the first V effect switch 63b1. In FIG. 24, a part of the back surface member 63b (specifically, a member that hides the first V effect switch 63b1) is not shown.
As shown in FIG. 24, the first V effect switch 63b1 is built in the back member 63b at a position behind the game ball accommodating portion 77a of the V movable member 77 at the determination device guidance position. The first V effect switch 63b1 is configured to be able to detect a game ball, and the game ball is located in front of the first V effect switch 63b1 (that is, the game ball of the V movable member 77 that has reached the determination device guidance position). By detecting that the game ball is housed in the storage unit 77a), it is detected that the game ball flows into the determination device 80. When it is detected that the game ball flows into the determination device 80, a predetermined effect (for example, a round lottery effect) is executed.

25 and 26 are views for explaining the configuration of the discharge flow path unit 65 of the drum accessory unit 60, FIG. 25 (a) is a top view, and FIG. 25 (b) is a left side view. 26 (a) is a bottom view, and FIG. 26 (b) is a bottom perspective view.
The game ball that has fallen from the gap between the guide surface portion 63d1 and the back surface member 63b, or the game ball that has fallen from the game ball accommodating portion 77a when the V movable member 77 is in the discharge flow path guiding position, is the back discharge flow path forming member 63c. It flows into the discharge flow path in the variable winning device 35, that is, the discharge flow path formed by the discharge flow path unit 65, through the back discharge flow path formed by
As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, a protective member 65a is attached to the outlet of the discharge flow path formed by the discharge flow path unit 65.

As shown in FIG. 26, the protective member 65a is provided with a thread fishing ball countermeasure. Specifically, the protective member 65a is provided with a plurality of protrusions 65a1 that project from the front end to the rear end side of the outlet of the discharge flow path formed by the discharge flow path unit 65, whereby the said. A comb-shaped unevenness is formed at the front end of the outlet.
As described above, the protective member 65a has a structure in which the thread attached to the thread fishing ball is easily caught by having a plurality of protrusions 65a1. Therefore, even if the thread is operated to pull up the game ball that has passed through the outlet of the discharge flow path, the thread is caught and it becomes difficult to perform the operation, so that fraudulent activity by the thread fishing ball can be effectively suppressed. ..
Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 (b) and 26 (b), the front end portion of the protective member 65a, that is, the lower surface of the portion where the plurality of protrusions 65a1 are provided is inclined upward toward the front side. As a result, when the thread is operated to pull up the game ball, the thread is easily caught between the protrusions 65a1.

FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of the determination device 80 of the large winning opening unit 35b. Further, FIG. 28A is a front perspective view of the determination device 80, and FIG. 28B is a front perspective view of a main part of the determination device 80.
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the determination device 80 includes a horizontal base member 81, a horizontally movable member 82 mounted on the horizontal base member 81, and a vertical base member mounted on the rear end of the horizontal base member 81. 86, an inflow forming member 83, a cover member 84, a vertically movable member 85, and a decorative member 48b mounted on the vertical base member 86 from the front side of the vertical base member 86, and the vertical base member 86 It is configured to include a left switch cover 87a and a right switch cover 87b mounted from the rear surface side of the 86, and a drive mechanism for rotationally driving the horizontally movable member 82 and the vertically movable member 85.

The horizontally movable member 82 is rotatably attached to the horizontal base member 81 about a rotation shaft 82a substantially along the vertical direction.
The vertically movable member 85 is rotatably attached to the vertical base member 86 about a rotation shaft 85a substantially along the front-rear direction.
The drive mechanism for rotationally driving the horizontally movable member 82 and the vertically movable member 85 includes a round lottery accessory motor 88 controlled by the game control device 100 and a drive gear 89a attached to the output shaft of the round lottery accessory motor 88. , Attached to the vertical driven gear 89c attached to the rotating shaft 85a of the vertically movable member 85, the vertical intermediate gear 89b for interlocking the drive gear 89a and the vertical driven gear 89c, and the rotating shaft 82a of the horizontally movable member 82. It is composed of the horizontal driven gear 89j and the horizontal first intermediate gear 89d to the horizontal sixth intermediate gear 89i that interlock the drive gear 89a and the horizontal driven gear 89j.

When the round lottery accessory motor 88 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front side of the game machine 1, the drive gear 89a rotates counterclockwise, and the vertical intermediate gear 89b that meshes with the drive gear 89a rotates clockwise. The vertical driven gear 89c that meshes with the vertical intermediate gear 89b rotates counterclockwise, and the horizontal first intermediate gear 89d and the horizontal first intermediate gear 89d that mesh with the drive gear 89a and the rotating shaft. Rotates clockwise with the second horizontal intermediate gear 89e having the same value. Then, when viewed from the upper surface side of the game machine 1, the horizontal third intermediate gear 89f that meshes with the horizontal second intermediate gear 89e and the horizontal third intermediate gear 89f having the same rotation axis as the horizontal third intermediate gear 89f are used. The intermediate gear 89g meshes counterclockwise with the horizontal fourth intermediate gear 89g, and the horizontal fifth intermediate gear 89h meshes clockwise with the horizontal fifth intermediate gear 89h. Rotates counterclockwise, and the horizontal driven gear 89j that meshes with the horizontal sixth intermediate gear 89i rotates clockwise. Therefore, when the round lottery accessory motor 88 rotates counterclockwise, the determination device 80 rotates the horizontally movable member 82 clockwise and reverses the vertically movable member 85 as shown in FIG. 28 (a). It is configured to rotate clockwise. As described above, the drive mechanism is configured so that two movable members (horizontal movable member 82 and vertically movable member 85) can be simultaneously rotationally driven in different directions by one drive source (round lottery accessory motor 88). ing.

FIG. 29A is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the horizontally movable member 82 of the determination device 80, and FIG. 29B is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the horizontal base member 81 of the determination device 80.
The horizontally movable member 82 has a disk shape. As shown in FIG. 29 (a), the horizontally movable member 82 is formed with a first V winning guide portion 82b1, a second V winning guiding portion 82b2, and a third V winning guiding portion 82b3 into which the game ball can flow.
Further, as shown in FIG. 29B, the horizontal base member 81 has a first specific area switch 80a for detecting that the game ball has passed through the first specific area, and the game ball has passed through the second specific area. A second specific area switch 80b for detecting that the game has passed the third specific area and a third specific area switch 80c for detecting that the game ball has passed through the third specific area are provided. Of the three types of specific regions provided on the horizontal base member 81, the third specific region is closest to the rotating shaft 82a of the horizontally movable member 82, and the farthest from the rotating shaft 82a of the horizontally movable member 82 is. , The first specific area.

When the V movable member 77 is in the determination device guidance position, the game ball that has fallen from the game ball accommodating portion 77a of the V movable member 77 passes through the inflow port formed by the inflow port forming member 83 and is a horizontal base member. It falls into the flow path 81b provided in the flow path 81, flows down from the rear side to the front side along the flow path 81b, and reaches the guide surface 81b1 formed in the flow path 81b. Then, the game ball that has reached the guide surface 81b1 flows into any one of the plurality of V winning guide portions formed on the horizontally movable member 82.
Of the three types of V winning guides formed on the horizontally movable member 82, the game balls that have flowed into the first V winning guide 82b1 are guided to the first specific region, and the game balls that have flowed into the second V winning guidance 82b2. Is guided to the second specific region, and the game ball that has flowed into the third V winning guidance unit 82b3 is guided to the third specific region.

Each of the three types of V winning guide portions provided on the horizontal base member 81 is formed by denting a part of the outer peripheral surface of the horizontally movable member 82 toward the rotation center of the horizontally movable member 82.
The third V winning guidance portion 82b3 has a bottom surface that is inclined downward toward the rotation center side of the horizontally movable member 82, and a hole portion 82b31 through which a game ball can pass is formed on the bottom surface. The hole 82b31 is provided at a position where the horizontally movable member 82 passes over the third specific region but does not pass over the second specific region when the horizontally movable member 82 rotates. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the third V winning guidance unit 82b3 rolls toward the hole portion 82b31 and flows into the third specific region from the hole portion 82b31.
Further, the second V winning guide portion 82b2 has a bottom surface that inclines downward toward the rotation center side of the horizontally movable member 82, and a hole portion 82b21 through which the game ball can pass is formed on the bottom surface. .. The hole 82b21 is provided at a position where it passes over the second specific region but does not pass over the third specific region when the horizontally movable member 82 rotates. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the second V winning guidance portion 82b2 rolls toward the hole portion 82b21 and flows into the second specific region from the hole portion 82b21.

When the round lottery accessory motor 88 rotates counterclockwise, the horizontally movable member 82 rotates clockwise when viewed from the upper surface side. Further, the guide surface 81b1 is at the 6 o'clock position on the horizontally movable member 82, the third specific area is at the 9 o'clock position on the horizontal movable member 82, and the second specific area is at the 11 o'clock position on the horizontally movable member 82. 1 The specific area is provided at a position between 1 o'clock and 2 o'clock on the horizontally movable member 82. Therefore, when the round lottery accessory motor 88 rotates counterclockwise, the game ball that has flowed into the third V winning induction unit 82b3 moves to the third specific region without passing through the 12 o'clock position on the horizontally movable member 82. The game ball that has fallen and has flowed into the second V winning guidance unit 82b2 falls into the second specific region without passing through the 12 o'clock position on the horizontally movable member 82. That is, when the round lottery accessory motor 88 rotates counterclockwise, the game balls that have flowed into the 3V winning guidance unit 82b3 and the 2V winning guidance unit 82b2 are configured so as not to flow into the first specific region. ..
On the other hand, the first V winning guide portion 82b1 does not have a bottom surface and is provided at a position where it does not pass over the third specific region or the second specific region when the horizontally movable member 82 rotates. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the first V winning guidance unit 82b1 is guided to the first specific region without flowing into the second specific region and the third specific region.

In the present embodiment, the second specific area and the third specific area are provided in the portion of the horizontal base member 81 facing the horizontally movable member 82, and the first specific area is the horizontal base member 81. Of these, although it is provided outside the portion facing the horizontally movable member 82, the place where the specific area is provided can be changed as appropriate. For example, the first specific area is also provided inside the portion facing the horizontally movable member 82. You may.
Further, in the present embodiment, the horizontally movable member 82 is formed with four first V winning guides 82b1, three second V winning guides 82b2, and one third V winning guide 82b3, which are of the same type. The V-winning guides are arranged so as not to be adjacent to each other in the circumferential direction of the horizontally movable members 82, but the number and order of the V-winning guides can be changed as appropriate.

30A and 30B are views for explaining the configuration of the vertically movable member 85 of the determination device 80, FIG. 30A is a front view in a state of being mounted on the vertical base member 86, and FIG. 30B is the relevant view. It is a front view in the state which the front cover of the vertically movable member 85 is removed.
The vertically movable member 85 has a disk shape, and as shown in FIG. 30B, the vertically movable member 85 contains a plurality of magnets 85b. The magnet 85b is for attracting (holding in contact with) the game ball in contact with the magnet arrangement location (the location where the magnet 85b is arranged) on the outer peripheral surface of the vertically movable member 85. is there.
When the round lottery accessory motor 88 rotates counterclockwise, the horizontally movable member 82 rotates clockwise when viewed from the upper surface side. Further, since the guide surface 81b1 is provided at the position of 6 o'clock on the horizontally movable member 82 and the first specific area is provided at the position between 1 o'clock and 2 o'clock on the horizontally movable member 82, the round lottery accessory motor 88 When is rotated counterclockwise, the game ball that has flowed into the first V winning guidance unit 82b1 is at the 12 o'clock position on the horizontal movable member 82, that is, the vertically movable member 85 before being guided to the first specific region. Pass below. Therefore, when the game ball that has flowed into the first V winning induction unit 82b1 reaches the 12 o'clock position on the horizontally movable member 82, any of the magnet arrangement positions of the vertically movable member 85 is the 6 o'clock position on the vertically movable member 85. When the game ball reaches, the game ball is attracted to the magnet arrangement position that has reached the 6 o'clock position on the vertically movable member 85. Further, when the round lottery accessory motor 88 rotates counterclockwise, the vertically movable member 85 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front side, so that the vertically movable member 85 is placed at the magnet arrangement location of the vertically movable member 85. It is possible to lift the attracted game ball from the bottom to the top and guide it to the fourth V winning guidance portion 86a provided at the 9 o'clock position on the vertically movable member 85. The game ball guided to the 4V winning guidance unit 86a flows into the fourth specific region provided behind the 4V winning guidance unit 86a.

As shown in FIG. 30B, a recess 85c recessed inward (on the rotation center side of the vertically movable member 85) is formed at least on the magnet arrangement portion of the outer peripheral surface of the vertically movable member 85. The recess 85c is for facilitating the attraction of the game ball to the magnet arrangement portion of the vertically movable member 85 and suppressing the wobbling of the game ball attracted to the magnet arrangement portion of the vertically movable member 85. The game ball attracted to the magnet arrangement portion of the movable member 85 is lifted from the bottom to the top by the vertically movable member 85 that rotates counterclockwise while being fitted in the recess 85c.
Further, since the horizontally movable member 82 and the vertically movable member 85 rotate in different directions, the game ball that has reached the 12 o'clock position on the horizontally movable member 82 and the magnet that has reached the 6 o'clock position on the vertically movable member 85. The placement location moves in the same direction (to the right when the round lottery accessory motor 88 rotates counterclockwise). Therefore, the vertically movable member 85 allows the game ball to be lifted smoothly.

As shown in FIG. 27, a second V effect switch 87b1 for detecting that the game ball has been lifted by the vertically movable member 85 is attached to the right switch cover 87b mounted on the rear surface side of the vertical base member 86. .. The second V effect switch 87b1 is configured to be able to detect a game ball, and the game ball is located in front of the second V effect switch 87b1 (specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, the vertically movable member 85 By detecting that the game ball has reached the position at 3 o'clock), it is detected that the game ball has been lifted by the vertically movable member 85. When it is detected that the game ball is lifted by the vertically movable member 85, a predetermined effect (for example, an effect suggesting V winning in a more advantageous specific area) is executed.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the game ball flows into the first specific area (V winning), "per 5 rounds (per 5R)" or "16 rounds jackpot (16R jackpot)" occurs. When inflowing into the second specific area (V winning), "per 8 rounds (per 8R)" or "16 rounds big hit (16R big hit)" occurs, and when inflowing into the third specific area (V winning) "16 round big hit (16R big hit)" occurs, and when it flows into the fourth specific area (V winning), "16 round big hit (16R big hit)" occurs. That is, the determination device 80 functions as a round lottery accessory for determining the number of jackpot rounds. Further, when the game ball flows into the first specific area, the second specific area, and the third specific area, the large winning opening is opened in the "open / close" mode (see FIG. 78 (b)), and the fourth When flowing into a specific area, the large winning opening opens in a "long opening" mode (see FIG. 78 (b)), which is more advantageous for the player than in the "opening and closing" mode.
In this way, when the game ball flows into the 1V winning guidance unit 82b1, "per 5R" may occur, but after the game ball flows into the 1V winning guidance unit 82b1, the vertically movable member 85 If it is lifted by, "16R jackpot" is confirmed. That is, even when the game ball flows into the first V winning guidance unit 82b1, V winning may be given to the fourth specific region, which is a specific region more advantageous than the first specific region. Therefore, when the game ball flows into the first V winning guidance unit 82b1, the player decides whether or not the game ball is lifted and promoted by the vertically movable member 85, that is, the first specific area (the most disadvantageous jackpot for the player). You can enjoy whether it flows into the fourth specific area (the specific area corresponding to the jackpot state that is most advantageous to the player) or the fourth specific area (the specific area corresponding to the state).

Further, as shown in FIG. 27, a fourth specific area switch 80d for detecting that the game ball has passed the fourth specific area is attached to the left switch cover 87a mounted on the rear surface side of the vertical base member 86. ing. As shown in FIGS. 27 and 30A, the vertical base member 86 has a fourth V winning guide portion 86a at the 9 o'clock position on the vertically movable member 85, and is lifted by the vertically movable member 85. The game ball that has passed through the fourth winning guidance unit 86a flows into the fourth specific region.
For example, when a trouble such as a weakening of the magnetic force of the magnet 85b occurs, the game ball attracted to the magnet arrangement position of the vertically movable member 85 is at the 9 o'clock position on the vertically movable member 85 (that is, the fourth winning guide portion 86a). It may be separated from the magnet placement location before reaching. When the game ball is separated from the vertically movable member 85, the game ball flows into the fourth specific area or flows into the first specific area depending on the position away from the vertically movable member 85.

In the present embodiment, the magnet 85b is invisible from the outside of the vertically movable member 85. Further, as shown in FIG. 30 (b), the recess 85c is also provided on the outer peripheral surface of the vertically movable member 85 other than the magnet arrangement portion. Therefore, since the player does not know where the magnet is arranged, when the game ball flows into the first V winning guide portion 82b1, whether or not the game ball is lifted by the vertically movable member 85 and promoted, that is, the first You can enjoy whether it flows into one specific area or a fourth specific area.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 30B, the plurality of magnets 85b are regularly arranged in the circumferential direction of the vertically movable member 85, but may be arranged randomly.

Next, the flow of the game ball in the variable winning device 35 will be described.
When the left and right movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened and the game ball flows into the winning space 41, the game ball is moved to the floor portion 61 by the ball flow path formed by the ball flow path forming member 47. Be guided. Then, if the game ball comes into contact with the magnet arrangement portion of the drum accessory 62 before the gap between the floor portion 61 and the drum accessory 62 becomes larger than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball will be at a constant speed. It is lifted by the rotating drum accessory 62 and guided to the guide surface portion 63d1 of the guide member 63d. On the other hand, if the gap between the floor portion 61 and the drum accessory 62 becomes larger than the diameter of the game ball before the game ball comes into contact with the magnet arrangement portion of the drum accessory 62, the game ball is released from the gap. It falls and is discharged to the outside through the discharge flow path in the variable winning device 35.
The game ball guided to the guide surface portion 63d1 of the guide member 63d is accommodated in the game ball accommodating portion 77a of the V movable member 77, or falls from the gap between the guide surface portion 63d1 and the back surface member 63b. When the game ball falls from the gap between the guide surface portion 63d1 and the back surface member 63b, the game ball is discharged to the outside through the discharge flow path in the variable winning device 35. On the other hand, when the game ball is housed in the game ball accommodating portion 77a of the V movable member 77, the game ball is released from the V movable member 77 when the V movable member 77 arrives at the determination device guidance position. It falls and flows into the determination device 80.

The game ball that has flowed into the determination device 80 is placed on any one of the first V winning guidance unit 82b1, the second V winning guidance unit 82b2, and the third V winning guidance unit 82b3 formed on the horizontally movable member 82 rotating at a constant speed. Inflow. When the game ball flows into the third V winning guidance unit 82b3, the game ball flows into the third specific region (V winning), so that a "16R jackpot" occurs. Further, when the game ball flows into the second V winning guidance unit 82b2, the game ball flows into the second specific region (V winning), so that "8R hit" or "16R big hit" occurs. Further, when the game ball flows into the first V winning guidance unit 82b1, the game ball flows into the first specific region (V winning), so that "per 5R" or "16R big hit" occurs.
However, even when the game ball flows into the first V winning guide portion 82b1, the timing at which the first V winning guiding portion 82b1 arrives at the 12 o'clock position on the horizontally movable member 82 and the magnet of the vertically movable member 85 When any of the arrangement locations substantially coincides with the timing of arriving at the 6 o'clock position on the vertically movable member 85, the game ball is rotating at a constant speed because it contacts the magnet arrangement location. It is lifted by the vertically movable member 85. Then, when the game ball flows into the fourth specific area 86a as a result of being lifted by the vertically movable member 85, the game ball flows into the fourth specific area (V winning), so that a "16R jackpot" occurs.

<Initialization operation>
FIG. 31 is a timing chart for explaining the initialization operation of the accessory, FIG. 31 (a) shows the initialization operation of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77), and FIG. 31 (b) shows the initialization operation of the accessory. The initialization operation of the drum accessory 62 is shown, and FIG. 31 (c) shows the initialization operation of the round lottery accessory (determining device 80).
In the initialization operation of the floor accessory (floor portion 61), the game control device 100 maintains the OFF state (stop state) of the floor accessory solenoid 61b1, so that the floor portion 61 does not operate.

First, the initialization operation of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77) will be described.
The V movable accessory motor 73 is a step type motor, and as shown in FIG. 31 (a), in clockwise rotation (CW rotation), it rotates at a speed of 4 ms for each step, and counterclockwise rotation (CCW). (Rotation) also rotates at a speed of 4 ms for each step.
Further, as shown in FIG. 18, a V movable accessory motor switch 73a for detecting the position of the V movable accessory 77 is attached to the motor cover 72 of the V movable accessory unit 70. The V movable accessory motor switch 73a includes a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion facing each other, and the slide portion 76b of the slide member 76 is provided with a light shielding portion (not shown). The V movable accessory motor switch 73a detects the position of the V movable member 77 by detecting the light blocking state in which the light from the light emitting portion is blocked by the light emitting portion and the light transmitting state in which the light is not blocked by the light emitting portion. It is possible. The method of detecting the position of the V movable member 77 can be arbitrarily changed.

As shown in FIG. 31A, when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the game control device 100 rotates the V movable accessory motor 73 counterclockwise to move the V movable member 77 to the left. Move the slide. Then, waiting for the V movable accessory motor switch 73a to enter the light-transmitting state, and when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 after the light-transmitting state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), V The rotation of the movable accessory motor 73 is stopped to stand by.
Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 200 msec) has elapsed since the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 was stopped, the V movable accessory motor 73 was rotated clockwise and the V movable member 77 was slid to the right. Let me. Then, it waits for the V movable accessory motor switch 73a to enter the light-shielding state, and when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 400) after the light-shielding state is reached, that is, V-movable. When the member 77 arrives at the guidance position of the round position determining device, the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped and made to stand by.

Next, process A is performed. Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 1000 msec) has elapsed since the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 was stopped, the V movable accessory motor 73 was rotated counterclockwise to move the V movable member 77 to the left. Slide to move. Then, when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, and when a predetermined time (for example, 200 msec) elapses, the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped. The motor 73 is rotated clockwise to slide the V movable member 77 to the right. Then, when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped and made to stand by.
Then, the process A is performed again.
Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 2000 msec) elapses after the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, the V movable accessory motor 73 is rotated counterclockwise and the V movable member 77 is slid to the left. Move. Then, waiting for the V movable accessory motor switch 73a to enter the light transmitting state, and when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 after entering the light transmitting state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 356), that is, When the V movable member 77 arrives at the discharge flow path guidance position, the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped to stand by.

Next, process B is performed. Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 1000 msec) elapses after the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, the V movable accessory motor 73 is rotated clockwise to move the V movable member 77 to the right. And slide it. Then, when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, and when a predetermined time (for example, 200 msec) elapses, the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped. The motor 73 is rotated counterclockwise to slide the V movable member 77 to the left. Then, when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped and made to stand by.
Then, process B is performed again.
Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 2000 msec) elapses after the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, the V movable accessory motor 73 is rotated clockwise and the V movable member 77 is slid to the right. Let me. Then, waiting for the V movable accessory motor switch 73a to enter the light-shielding state, and when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10) after the light-shielding state is reached, that is, V-movable When the member 77 arrives at the initial position, the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, and after a predetermined time (for example, 1000 msec) elapses, the initialization operation of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77) is completed.

Next, the initialization operation of the drum accessory 62 will be described.
The drum accessory motor 66 is a step-type motor, and as shown in FIG. 31 (b), in clockwise rotation (CW rotation), it rotates at a speed of 4 ms for each step, and counterclockwise rotation (CCW rotation). ), It also rotates at a speed of 4 ms for each step.
Further, a drum accessory motor switch 66a (see FIG. 35) for detecting the position of the drum accessory 62 is attached to any one of the members constituting the drum accessory unit 60 (for example, the right support member 64b). ing. The drum accessory motor switch 66a includes a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion that face each other, and any one of the members (for example, the right bottom portion 62d) constituting the drum accessory unit 60 is provided with a light shielding portion (not shown). ing. The drum accessory motor switch 66a can detect the position of the drum accessory 62 by detecting the light blocking state in which the light from the light emitting portion is blocked by the light emitting portion and the light transmitting state in which the light is not blocked by the light receiving portion. It has become. The method of detecting the position of the drum accessory 62 can be arbitrarily changed.
As shown in FIG. 31B, when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the game control device 100 causes the drum accessory 62 to rotate from the bottom to the top (that is, the rotation shown in FIG. 14). The drum accessory motor 66 is rotated counterclockwise. Then, when the number of rotation steps of the drum accessory motor 66 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2326), that is, when the drum accessory 62 makes one rotation, the drum accessory motor switch 66a waits for the light-shielding state.

Waiting for the drum accessory motor switch 66a to enter the light-shielding state, and when the number of rotation steps of the drum accessory motor 66 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 300) after the light-shielding state, that is, the drum accessory motor switch 66a When the drum accessory 62 rotates to the point where the light transmission state is guaranteed, the drum accessory motor switch 66a waits for the light-shielding state.
Then, when the drum accessory motor switch 66a is in a light-shielding state, the rotation of the drum accessory motor 66 is stopped, and after a predetermined time (for example, 1000 msec) elapses, the initialization operation of the drum accessory 62 is terminated.

Next, the initialization operation of the round lottery accessory (determining device 80) will be described.
The round lottery accessory motor 88 is a step-type motor, and as shown in FIG. 31 (c), in clockwise rotation (CW rotation), it rotates at a speed of 4 ms for each step, and counterclockwise rotation (CCW). (Rotation) also rotates at a speed of 4 ms for each step.
Further, as shown in FIG. 27, a round lottery accessory motor switch 88a for detecting the position of the horizontally movable member 82 is attached to the horizontal base member 81 of the determination device 80. The round lottery accessory motor switch 88a includes a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion facing each other, and the horizontally movable member 82 is provided with a light shielding portion (not shown). The round lottery accessory motor switch 88a detects the position of the horizontally movable member 82 by detecting the light blocking state in which the light from the light emitting portion is blocked by the light emitting portion and the light transmitting state in which the light is not blocked by the light receiving portion. It is possible. The method of detecting the position of the horizontally movable member 82 can be arbitrarily changed. It is also possible to detect the position of the vertically movable member 85 in addition to or in place of the horizontally movable member 82.

As shown in FIG. 31 (c), when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the game control device 100 rotates the horizontally movable member 82 clockwise (rotation shown in FIG. 28) and the vertically movable accessory. The round lottery accessory motor 88 is rotated counterclockwise so that the 85 rotates counterclockwise (rotation shown in FIG. 28). Then, when the number of rotation steps of the round lottery accessory motor 88 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4400), that is, a predetermined time (specifically, the time for the V movable member 77 to move to the round position determining device guidance position and V When the movable member 77 is in the determination device guidance position, the sum of the time until the game ball dropped from the game ball accommodating portion 77a gets on the horizontally movable accessory 85 and the time when the horizontally movable accessory 85 makes two rotations). After that, the round lottery accessory motor switch 88a waits for the light-shielding state.

Waiting for the round lottery accessory motor switch 88a to enter the light-shielding state, and when the number of rotation steps of the round lottery accessory motor 88 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 150) after the light-shielding state, that is, the round lottery accessory motor 88 When the horizontally movable member 82 rotates to the point where the light-transmitting state of the motor switch 88a is guaranteed, the round lottery accessory motor switch 88a waits for the light-shielding state.
Then, when the round lottery accessory motor switch 88a is in a light-shielded state, the rotation of the round lottery accessory motor 88 is stopped, and after a predetermined time (for example, 1000 msec) elapses, the initialization operation of the round lottery accessory (determining device 80) is performed. To finish.

<Normal operation>
When the initialization operation of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77), the initialization operation of the drum accessory 62, and the initialization operation of the round lottery accessory (determining device 80) are all completed, the normal operation is started.
In the normal operation of the drum accessory 62, the game control device 100 rotates the drum accessory motor 66 counterclockwise, and when the number of rotation steps reaches a predetermined number (for example, 300), that is, the drum accessory motor switch 66a When the drum accessory 62 rotates to the point where the light transmission state is guaranteed, the process of waiting for the drum accessory motor switch 66a to enter the light-shielding state is repeated. That is, in the normal operation of the drum accessory 62, the drum accessory motor 66 is constantly rotating counterclockwise.
Further, in the normal operation of the round lottery accessory (decision device 80), the game control device 100 rotates the round lottery accessory motor 88 counterclockwise, and when the number of rotation steps reaches a predetermined number (for example, 150), That is, when the horizontally movable member 82 rotates to the point where the light transmission state of the round lottery accessory motor switch 88a is guaranteed, the process of waiting for the round lottery accessory motor switch 88a to be in the light-shielded state is repeated. That is, in the normal operation of the round lottery accessory (determining device 80), the round lottery accessory motor 88 is always rotating counterclockwise.
In the normal operation of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77), the V movable accessory motor 73 is in the OFF state, and the V movable accessory 77 does not operate.
Further, in the normal operation of the floor accessory (floor portion 61), the floor accessory solenoid 61b1 is in the OFF state, and the floor portion 61 does not operate.

<Small hit operation>
FIG. 32 is a timing chart for explaining the small hit operation of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77), FIG. 32 (a) shows the small hit initial operation, and FIG. 32 (b) shows the small hit operation. Shows normal operation.
In the V movable accessory (V movable member 77), a game ball wins a prize in the starting winning openings 33a, 33b, 34, and the large winning opening is opened (opening of the movable members 43a, 43b of the variable winning device 35 of the variable winning device 35). ) When the start timing comes, a small hit operation is performed. In this small hit operation, the small hit initial operation (operation shown in FIG. 32 (a)) is performed once, and then the small hit normal operation (operation shown in FIG. 32 (b)) is performed in the variable winning device 35. Repeat until there are no balls.
As shown in FIG. 32 (a), at the start timing of opening the large winning opening in the small hit, the game control device 100 rotates the V movable accessory motor 73 counterclockwise and stands by at the initial position. The V movable member 77 is slid to the left. Then, when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 366), that is, when the V movable member 77 arrives at the discharge flow path guidance position, the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped. Make it wait. As described above, in the present embodiment, the V movable member 77 is configured to first move to the discharge flow path guidance position at the start timing of opening the large winning opening in the small hit. As a result, when the game ball remains in the game ball accommodating portion 77a of the V movable member 77, the game ball can be dropped from the game ball accommodating portion 77a, so that the opening of the large winning opening in the small hit is started. It is possible to prevent the act of illegally accommodating the game ball in the game ball accommodating portion 77a before.

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 500 msec) has elapsed since the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 was stopped, the V movable accessory motor 73 was rotated clockwise and the V movable member 77 was slid to the right. Let me. Then, waiting for the V movable accessory motor switch 73a to enter the light-shielding state, and when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10) after the light-shielding state is reached, that is, V-movable. When the member 77 arrives at the initial position, the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped to stand by.

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 1900 msec) has elapsed since the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 was stopped, the V movable accessory motor 73 was rotated clockwise and the V movable member 77 was slid to the right. Let me. Then, when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 390), that is, when the V movable member 77 arrives at the determination device guidance position, the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped and waits. Let me.
Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 500 msec) has elapsed since the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 was stopped, the V movable accessory motor 73 was rotated counterclockwise as shown in FIG. 32 (b). , The V movable member 77 is slid to the left. Then, when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 155), that is, when the V movable member 77 arrives at the right normal operation position, the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped and waits. Let me.

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 200 msec) has elapsed since the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 was stopped, the V movable accessory motor 73 was rotated counterclockwise and the V movable member 77 was slid to the left. Move it. Then, when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 235), that is, when the V movable member 77 arrives at the "near the initial position", the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped. Make it wait. Here, "near the initial position" means a position slightly to the left of the initial position, that is, the game ball accommodating portion 77a of the V movable member 77 is the central portion (central portion in the left-right direction) of the body portion 62b of the drum accessory 62. ) And the position facing. As shown in FIG. 20B and the like, the body portion 62b is provided with three magnet arrangement locations arranged along the left-right direction and two magnet arrangement locations arranged along the left-right direction. The magnet arrangement location in the middle of the three magnet arrangement locations arranged along the direction is located at the central portion (central portion in the left-right direction) of the body portion 62b. Therefore, "near the initial position" is a position where the game ball accommodating portion 77a can face the magnet arrangement location in the middle of the three magnet arrangement locations arranged along the left-right direction.
The game ball lifted by the drum accessory 62 and guided to the guide surface portion 63d1 of the guide member 63d is accommodated in the game ball accommodating portion 77a of the V movable member 77, or is accommodated by the guide surface portion 63d1 and the back surface member 63b. By waiting in the "near the initial position" in this way, the probability that the game ball is accommodated in the game ball accommodating portion 77a, that is, the probability that the V prize is won is increased.

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 1000 msec) has elapsed since the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 was stopped, the V movable accessory motor 73 was rotated counterclockwise and the V movable member 77 was slid to the left. Move it. Then, it waits for the V movable accessory motor switch 73a to enter the light transmission state, and when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 after the light transmission state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 214), that is, When the V movable member 77 arrives at the left normal operation position, the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped to stand by.
Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 200 msec) has elapsed since the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 was stopped, the V movable accessory motor 73 was rotated clockwise and the V movable member 77 was slid to the right. Let me. Then, it waits for the V movable accessory motor switch 73a to enter the light-shielding state, and when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10) after the light-shielding state is reached, that is, V-movable. When the member 77 arrives at the initial position, the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped to stand by.

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 1000 msec) has elapsed since the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 was stopped, the V movable accessory motor 73 was rotated clockwise and the V movable member 77 was slid to the right. Let me. Then, when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 235), that is, when the V movable member 77 arrives at the right normal operation position, the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped and waits. Let me.
Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 200 msec) has elapsed since the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 was stopped, the V movable accessory motor 73 was rotated clockwise and the V movable member 77 was slid to the right. Let me. Then, when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 155), that is, when the V movable member 77 arrives at the determination device guidance position, the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped. Wait for a predetermined time (for example, 500 msec).

As described above, the V movable member 77 moves between the discharge flow path guidance position and the determination device guidance position in the small hit initial operation (see FIG. 32 (a)), but during the small hit normal operation (FIG. 32). In (b), it moves between the left normal operation position and the determination device guidance position. As a result, it is possible to prevent the act of illegally accommodating the game ball in the game ball accommodating portion 77a before the start of opening the large winning opening in the small hit.
In the small hit operation of the drum accessory 62, the game control device 100 continues the counterclockwise rotation of the drum accessory motor 66. That is, the drum accessory 62 continues the normal operation.
Further, in the small hit operation of the round lottery accessory (determining device 80), the game control device 100 continues the counterclockwise rotation of the round lottery accessory motor 88. That is, the determination device 80 continues the normal operation.
Further, in the small hit operation of the floor accessory (floor portion 61), the game control device 100 alternately shifts the floor accessory solenoid 61b1 between the OFF state and the ON state. That is, the floor portion 61 performs a rotary reciprocating operation in which the rear end side of the floor portion 61 rotates so as to move up and down.

<Big hit operation>
FIG. 33 is a timing chart for explaining the jackpot operation of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77), FIG. 33 (a) shows a round operation, and FIG. 33 (b) shows an ending operation.
When a big hit occurs, the V movable accessory (V movable member 77) performs a big hit operation. In this big hit operation, when the round effect start timing (that is, the start timing of opening the big winning opening in the big hit) is reached, the round operation (the operation shown in FIG. 33A) is repeated, and then the ending effect start timing is reached ( That is, the discharge of the remaining balls in the final round is completed), and the ending operation (the operation shown in FIG. 33B) is performed once. The operation (slide movement) of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77) is stopped from the occurrence of the big hit to the timing of opening the big winning opening (that is, during the fanfare period).

As shown in FIG. 33A, at the start timing of the round effect, the game control device 100 rotates the V movable accessory motor 73 counterclockwise after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 200 msec) to the initial position. The V movable member 77 waiting at is slid to the left. Then, waiting for the V movable accessory motor switch 73a to enter the light-transmitting state, and when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 after entering the light-transmitting state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 356), that is, When the V movable member 77 reaches the discharge flow path guidance position, the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped to stand by.
Next, the above-mentioned process B is performed twice.
Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 5000 msec) elapses after the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, the V movable accessory motor 73 is rotated clockwise and the V movable member 77 is slid to the right. Let me. Then, it waits for the V movable accessory motor switch 73a to enter the light-shielding state, and when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10) after the light-shielding state is reached, that is, V-movable. When the member 77 arrives at the initial position, the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, the round operation of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77) is completed, and if the ending effect start timing is not reached, it is large. Regardless of whether or not there is a game ball in the winning opening, the round operation is performed again.

As shown in FIG. 33 (b), at the ending effect start timing, the game control device 100 rotates the V movable accessory motor 73 counterclockwise after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 200 msec) to move V. The member 77 is slid to the left. Then, waiting for the V movable accessory motor switch 73a to enter the light-transmitting state, and when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 after the light-transmitting state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), V The rotation of the movable accessory motor 73 is stopped to stand by.
Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 200 msec) has elapsed since the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 was stopped, the V movable accessory motor 73 was rotated clockwise and the V movable member 77 was slid to the right. Let me. Then, waiting for the V movable accessory motor switch 73a to enter the light-shielding state, and when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10) after the light-shielding state is reached, that is, V-movable. When the member 77 arrives at the initial position, the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, the ending operation of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77) is ended, and the normal operation is started.

In the jackpot operation of the drum accessory 62, the game control device 100 continues the counterclockwise rotation of the drum accessory motor 66. That is, the drum accessory 62 continues the normal operation.
Further, in the jackpot operation of the round lottery accessory (determining device 80), the game control device 100 continues the counterclockwise rotation of the round lottery accessory motor 88. That is, the determination device 80 continues the normal operation.
Further, in the jackpot operation of the floor accessory (floor portion 61), the game control device 100 alternately shifts the floor accessory solenoid 61b1 between the OFF state and the ON state. That is, the floor portion 61 performs a rotary reciprocating operation in which the rear end side of the floor portion 61 rotates so as to move up and down. Then, when the jackpot operation is completed, the normal operation is started.

<Ball biting processing operation>
FIG. 34 is a timing chart for explaining the ball biting processing operation of the accessory, and FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b) show the ball biting processing operation of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77), FIG. 34. (C) shows the ball biting processing operation of the drum accessory 62, and FIG. 34 (d) shows the ball biting processing operation of the round lottery accessory (determining device 80). This ball biting processing operation is executed when the state of the accessory motor switches 66a, 73a, 88a is monitored during the initialization operation or the jackpot operation and it is determined to be abnormal.

When ball biting occurs in the V movable accessory unit 70, the V movable accessory motor 73 is rotated in the reverse direction in order to eliminate the ball biting.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34 (a), during the clockwise rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73, the V movable accessory motor switch 73a is in a state of waiting for light transmission or a light-shielding state. When the state of waiting for is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 3024 ms), the game control device 100 determines that the abnormality is abnormal and executes the ball biting processing operation of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77). In this ball biting processing operation, first, the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, and after a predetermined time (for example, 200 msec) elapses, the V movable accessory motor 73 is rotated counterclockwise. Then, when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, and after a predetermined time (for example, 200 msec) elapses, the V movable accessory (for example, 200 msec) The ball biting processing operation of the V movable member 77) is terminated, and the state returns to the state before the ball biting processing operation (that is, the operation is shifted to the operation performed immediately before the ball biting processing operation is performed).

Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), during the counterclockwise rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73, the V movable accessory motor switch 73a is in a state of waiting for light transmission or a light-shielding state. When the waiting state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 3024 ms), the game control device 100 determines that it is abnormal and executes a ball biting processing operation of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77). Specifically, the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, and when a predetermined time (for example, 200 msec) elapses, the V movable accessory motor 73 is rotated clockwise. Then, when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, and after a predetermined time (for example, 200 msec) elapses, the V movable accessory (for example, 200 msec) The ball biting processing operation of the V movable member 77) is terminated, and the state before the ball biting processing operation is restored.

When a ball bite occurs in the drum accessory unit 60, the drum accessory motor 66 is rotated in the reverse direction in order to eliminate the ball bite.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), during the counterclockwise rotation of the drum accessory motor 66, the drum accessory motor switch 66a is in a state of waiting for light transmission or a light-shielding state. When the state of waiting for is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 13956 msec), the game control device 100 determines that it is abnormal and executes the ball biting processing operation of the drum accessory 62. In this ball biting processing operation, first, the rotation of the drum accessory motor 66 is stopped, and after a predetermined time (for example, 200 msec) elapses, the drum accessory motor 66 is rotated clockwise. Then, when the number of rotation steps of the drum accessory motor 66 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), the rotation of the drum accessory motor 66 is stopped, and after a predetermined time (for example, 200 msec) elapses, the drum accessory 62 is bitten. The processing operation is ended, and the state before the ball biting processing operation is restored.

When ball biting occurs in the determination device 80, the round lottery accessory motor 88 is rotated in the reverse direction in order to eliminate the ball biting.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34 (d), during the counterclockwise rotation of the round lottery accessory motor 88, the round lottery accessory motor switch 88a is in a light-transmitting state or in a light-shielding state. When the state of waiting for the game continues for a predetermined time (for example, 7200 msec), the game control device 100 determines that it is abnormal and executes the ball biting processing operation of the round lottery accessory (decision device 80). In this ball biting processing operation, first, the rotation of the round lottery accessory motor 88 is stopped, and after a predetermined time (for example, 200 msec) elapses, the round lottery accessory motor 88 is rotated clockwise. Then, when the number of rotation steps of the round lottery accessory motor 88 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), the rotation of the drum accessory motor 66 is stopped, and after a predetermined time (for example, 200 msec) elapses, the round lottery accessory (determined). The ball biting processing operation of the device 80) is terminated, and the state before the ball biting processing operation is restored.

C. Configuration of Control System Next, the control system of the pachinko machine 1 of this example will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. In the figure and the following description, "SW" means a switch. Further, in the drawing, when the name of the member is long, it becomes difficult to show it, so it may be shortened (shown) as appropriate.
The pachinko machine 1 includes a game control device 100, a payout control device 200, an effect control device 300, and a power supply device 400 as main components of the control system.

(Game control device related)
First, the configuration of the game control device 100 of the pachinko machine 1 and the devices connected to the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 35.
The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls the game, and has a CPU unit 170 having a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 171 and an input having an input port. It includes a unit 120, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 150 that connects the CPU unit 170, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.
Here, the game control device 100 corresponds to a control device, and constitutes an opening control means, a fluctuation time selection means, a special figure fluctuation control means, and a fluctuation time storage means.

The CPU unit 170 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 171 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and uses a CPU operating clock, a timer interrupt, and a clock as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 173 and the like to generate. A predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to enable operation. Will be done.

The power supply device 400 is a normal power supply unit 410 having an ACDC converter that generates the DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from the voltage of DC32V. A backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 171 in the event of a power failure and a power failure monitoring circuit are provided, and a power failure monitoring signal or reset that notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence or recovery of a power failure It includes a control signal generation unit 430 and the like that generate and output a control signal such as a signal.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main unit. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in this embodiment. By providing the above, it is possible to exclude the target of replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 171 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal, and also resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 127. When the RAM initialization switch 127 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 171C in the game microcomputer 171 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 171. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 171 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 171A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 171B, and a RAM (random access memory) 171C that can be read and written at any time.
The ROM 171B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 171C is a work area of the CPU 171A and a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. It is used as. An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used as the ROM 171B or the RAM 171C. The ROM 171B constitutes a variable time storage means.

Further, the ROM 171B stores, for example, a fluctuation pattern distribution table for determining a fluctuation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure fluctuation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. .. The variable pattern distribution table is a time setting of the accessory device 51 (drum accessory unit 60 and V movable accessory unit 70) and the determination device 80, a single-opening symbol of the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35, and This is a table for the CPU 171A to refer to a pattern such as a distribution rate of a symbol that opens twice to determine a fluctuation pattern.
Further, the fluctuation pattern distribution table includes a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern table selected when the special figure 1 fluctuates, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern table selected when the special figure 2 fluctuates, and the like.
In this embodiment, unlike the one-type gaming machine, it is a so-called feather-type gaming machine (pachinko machine 1). Therefore, for example, a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state or a fluctuation pattern before reaching the reach state. There is no table or the like for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, and all the results of the special figure fluctuation are small hits, and there is no deviation. That is, when the starting prize is won, the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35 are always opened. The movable members 43a and 43b are opened at different times depending on the stop symbol of the special drawing.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed (for example, a special figure 1 display and a special figure 2 display of the batch display device 50), and the display devices have different timings. When a plurality of display results are derived and displayed and the plurality of display results are in a predetermined special result mode, the game state becomes a game state (starting game state or special game state) advantageous to the player. In the pachinko machine 1, the state of the special figure variation display game that is executed with a low frequency and is executed for a longer time than the execution time of the average special figure variation display game.
In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display is performed. No display mode. Then, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result mode is different is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Further, the decorative special figure variation display game may be executed on another display device (for example, the information display 45) corresponding to the special figure variation display game.
Therefore, for example, in the decorative special figure variation display game, after a plurality of identification information is variablely displayed in each of the left and right variable display areas on the display device for a predetermined time, the variable display is stopped in the order of left and right, resulting in the result mode. In the case of displaying, the state in which the fluctuation display is stopped in the left fluctuation display area when the condition for the special result mode is satisfied (for example, any of "3", "5", and "7") is reached. It becomes a state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same identification information). (However, the special result mode is excluded) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.
And, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects with different possibility of deriving a special result mode (different expected values), normal reach (N reach), special reach (SP reach), and premiere. Reach is set.

The CPU 171A executes a game control program in the ROM 171B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or a solenoid (for example, a grand prize opening solenoid 201) or a display device (for example, a grand prize opening solenoid 201). For example, the drive signal of the batch display device 50) is generated and output to control the entire pachinko machine 1.
Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 171 has a special symbol symbol random number for determining a small hit symbol of the special symbol, and a variation pattern in the special symbol variation display game (various reach and variation display games in the variation display without reach). Fluctuation pattern for determining execution time, etc. Random number generation circuit for generating random numbers, etc., and a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for CPU 171A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 173. ) Timer interrupt signal and a clock generator that generates a clock that gives the update timing of the random number generation circuit.

Further, the CPU 171A acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern distribution tables from the plurality of fluctuation pattern distribution tables stored in the ROM 171B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 171A selects and acquires one of the fluctuation pattern distribution tables from the plurality of fluctuation pattern distribution tables based on the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game, the number of start memories, and the like. To do. Here, the CPU 171A provides a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the variation pattern distribution tables stored in the ROM 171B when the special figure variation display game is executed. Eggplant.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the lending ball.
Further, when the payout control device 200 receives the launch permission signal from the game control device 100 by serial communication, the payout control device 200 outputs the launch permission signal to the launch control device (not shown). As a result, the launch of the game ball is permitted.
The launch control device receives the necessary power supply from the payout control device 200, and also receives the launch permission signal and the power failure detection signal. The launch control device controls a launch motor (not shown) that launches a game ball according to the operation of the launch operation handle 11, and a touch switch signal or a signal from a launch stop switch (not shown) is input to the launch control device. There is. The touch switch signal detects whether or not the player is touching the firing operation handle 11, and the firing stop switch temporarily stops the firing of the game ball and is operated by the player. is there.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 171 includes a gate switch 101, a winning opening switch 102, a left winning opening switch 103, a right winning opening switch 104, a left starting opening switch 105, a right starting opening switch 106, and a middle starting opening switch. Negative logic such as 107, specific area switches 80a to 80d, residual ball outlet switches 112, 113, panel radio wave sensor 114, magnetic sensor 115, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V. Interface chips (proximity I / F) 121a and 121b are provided, in which the signal of 0V-5V is input and converted into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.
Here, the gate switch 101 is a switch that detects a game ball that has passed through a start gate of a normal symbol, but in this embodiment, since it is a game machine (pachinko machine 1) that does not have a normal pattern, this switch exists. Instead, it is connected to GND on an external relay board (not shown). Therefore, in FIG. 35, it is shown for a gate switch (GND connection).
Further, as shown in FIG. 35, when a relay board 151 having an electric pattern for outputting a test signal for outputting to the test firing test apparatus (for example, the gate passing signal 1 related to the normal symbol 1) is connected, this In the embodiment, this test signal is always output as off. Such a configuration seems to be useless at first glance, but as another model, for example, when developing a blade monotype game machine equipped with a normal symbol and its starting gate, this game control device 100 is commonly used. There is a big merit that it can be done.
Further, as described above, the winning opening switches 102 detect the game balls that have won in the general winning openings 36a and 36b of the game board 30, and are provided with 1 to n depending on the number of general winning openings. The left large winning opening switch 103 is arranged in a space near the base end portion of the movable member 43a in the variable winning device 35, and detects a game ball flowing into the accessory device 51. Similarly, the right large winning opening switch 104 is arranged in a space near the base end portion of the movable member 43b in the variable winning device 35, and detects a game ball flowing into the accessory device 51.
That is, the left large winning opening switch 103 and the right large winning opening switch 104 function as winning opening switches for detecting the game ball that has won the variable winning opening device 35, which is the large winning opening.

The left start opening switch 105 detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first start winning opening 33a of the game board 30. The right start opening switch 106 detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first start winning opening 33b. The middle start opening switch 107 detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second start winning opening 34.
The specific area switches 80a to 80d detect that the game ball that has flowed into the determination device 80 has passed through the specific area. When it is detected that the game ball has passed through a specific area, a big hit will occur.
The first remaining ball discharge port switch 112 detects a game ball that has flowed into the discharge flow path of the variable winning device 35 (a game ball that has flowed into the large winning port but has not flowed into the specific area of the determination device 80). It has a function of detecting whether or not the ball flowing into the discharge flow path remains in the variable winning device 35. Similarly, the second remaining ball discharge port switch 113 detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area of the determination device 80, and whether or not the game ball that has passed through the specific area remains in the variable winning device 25. It has a function to detect.
The panel radio wave sensor 114 detects the emission of radio waves (for example, illegal radio waves) to the pachinko machine 1, and a plurality of panel radio wave sensors may be arranged. In that case, 1 to m of the panel radio wave sensors are provided.
The magnetic sensor 115 detects an illegal magnetism, and is arranged near the front frame 4 or the like of the pachinko machine 1 or a proximity sensor so as to cover a place where a magnet is likely to be applied (for example, 1 to k). ) Is provided.

Since the input range of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as floating and output an abnormality detection signal.
The reason why the proximity I / F121a and the proximity I / F121b are provided is that the number of input terminals of the proximity I / F121a is limited. The cost of the proximity I / F121b is reduced by using one smaller than the proximity I / F121a according to the number of insufficient input terminals. It should be noted that a proximity I / F121a having a required number of input terminals may be used, and the proximity I / F121b may not be provided.

The outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b are supplied to the second input port 162, the third input port 163, or the fourth input port 164, and are read into the gaming microcomputer 171 via the data bus 150. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b, the gate switch 101, the winning opening switch 102, the left winning opening switch 103, the right winning opening switch 104, the left starting opening switch 105, the right starting opening switch 106, and the middle The detection signal of the start port switch 107 is input to the second input port 162.
Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b, the detection signals of the specific area switches 80a to 80d, the remaining ball discharge port switches 112 and 113, and the panel radio wave sensor 114 are input to the fourth input port 164.
Further, signals from motor switches such as the drum accessory motor switch 66a, the V movable accessory motor switch 73a, and the round lottery accessory motor switch 88a are input to the fourth input port 164.

Of the outputs of the proximity I / F121a, the abnormality detection signal 1 output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected is input to the third input port 163, and of the outputs of the proximity I / F121b, the magnetic sensor 115 The detection signal of the above and the abnormality detection signal 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are also input to the third input port 163.
Further, the detection signals from the vibration sensor 116 and the glass frame opening detection switch 117 are input to the third input port 163, and the frame radio wave invalid signal from the payout control device 200 (frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 4). A signal output based on the detection of a radio wave) and a payout busy signal (a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept a command) are input.
The vibration sensor 116 detects an illegal vibration, and one is arranged on a so-called veneer plate on the back side of the variable winning device 35 as a center case. The glass frame opening detection switch 117 detects the opening of the glass frame 5.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b, the output to the second input port 162 and a part of the output to the fourth input port 164 are test shots (not shown) from the game control device 100 via the relay board 151. It is also supplied to the test equipment. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b, the detection signals of the left start port switch 105, the right start port switch 106, and the middle start port switch 107 are input to the gaming microcomputer 171 in addition to the second input port 162. It is configured as follows.
As described above, the proximity I / F 121a and 121b have a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12V is supplied from the power supply device 400 to the proximity I / F 121a and 121b in addition to a voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation. It has become like.
The data held by the second input port 162 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 171 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 162. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 163, the fourth input port 164, and the first input port 161 described later.

A detection signal from the main body frame opening detection switch 118 for detecting the opening of the front frame 4 is input to the first input port 161, and a payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating a payout abnormality) from the payout control device 200, Output when it is detected that a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout) and an overflow switch signal (a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 10 (it is full)). (Signal to be output), touch switch signal (signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the firing operation handle 11), and further, signals from the Schmidt buffer 126 and the RAM initialization switch 127 are input. There is.
The first input port 161 takes in each of the above signals and supplies them to the gaming microcomputer 171 via the data bus 150.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with the above-mentioned Schmidt buffer 126 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 171 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 126 includes these. It has a function to remove noise from the input signal of. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 127 are once input to the first input port 161 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 171 via the data bus 150. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 171 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 126 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 171 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 151 without going through the output unit 130, so that the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 151 is turned off in order to output to the test firing test device. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 151.
The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 161, 162, 163, 164 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 171 just before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 171 from the port is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 171.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 171 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 171 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input from the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 150, and the special figure changes due to the start winning (winning to the first starting winning openings 33a and 23b and the second starting winning opening 34) to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown). A buffer 133 that outputs special figure information of the display game via the relay board 151 can be mounted. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121a, 121b, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 151 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 115 and the panel radio wave sensor 114, is once taken into the game microcomputer 171 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the game machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the state cannot be obtained is supplied from the data bus 150 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 151. The relay board 151 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 171 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 151, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 150 and opens and closes and drives the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35, respectively, the first special winning opening solenoid 201, the second special winning opening solenoid 202, and the accessory device. A second output port 134 for outputting open / close data of the accessory solenoid such as the floor accessory solenoid 61b1 for driving the floor portion 61 of 51 up and down is provided.
Further, the output unit 130 has a fifth output port 137 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A sixth output port 138 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a seventh output port 139 and a sixth output port 138 for outputting information about the pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 152. The external information terminal plate 152 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, amusement park internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and can provide information on the pachinko machine 1. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the 7th output port 139 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 has a first special winning opening solenoid 201, a second special winning opening solenoid 202, and a combination of opening and closing the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 output from the second output port 134, respectively. The first driver (drive circuit) 140, which receives the opening / closing data signal of the accessory solenoid such as the floor accessory solenoid 61b1 for driving the floor portion 61 of the object device 51 up and down, generates and outputs the solenoid drive signal. A motor drive signal is generated by receiving the opening / closing data signal of the drum accessory motor 66 and the V movable accessory motor 73 in the accessory device 51 output from the third output port 135, and the round lottery accessory motor 88 in the determination device 80. A third driver 142 that outputs an on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the connection monitor LED 153 that is output from the output second driver (drive circuit) 141 and the fourth output port 136 is provided.
Here, the connection monitor LED 153 lights up when the game control device 100, which is the main board, is activated, and has a function of monitoring that the main board is in operation. Further, when the number of parts to be operated by the game control device 100 increases in the future, there is an advantage that the fourth output port 136 can be used corresponding to the increased parts.
The connection monitor LED 153 may be connected to a number corresponding to the signal line output from the fourth output port 136 on a one-to-one basis, or one may be connected to a plurality of signal lines. May be good.
Further, the output unit 130 is output from the fourth driver 143 and the sixth output port 138 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the fifth output port 137. External information signal supplied from the 5th driver 144, the 7th output port 139, and the 6th output port 138, which output the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current drawing side of the batch display device 50, to an external device such as a management device. A sixth driver 145 is provided to output the signal to the external information terminal plate 152.

The first driver 140 is powered by a power source so as to be able to drive a solenoid that operates at 32 V (a bonus solenoid such as the first prize-winning port solenoid 201, the second prize-winning port solenoid 202, and the floor accessory solenoid 61b1). DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a voltage. Further, the second driver 141 has a power supply voltage so as to be able to drive a motor operating at 12 V (a drum motor 66, a V movable accessory motor 73, a round lottery accessory motor 88, and other accessory motors). DC12V is supplied from the power supply device 400. Similarly, DC12V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as the power supply voltage to the third driver 142 so that the connection monitor LED 153 operating at 12V can be driven.
Further, DC12V is supplied to the fourth driver 143 that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the fifth driver 144 for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a current is passed through the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire by the fourth driver 143 that outputs 12V, and a current is drawn from the cathode terminal via the segment wire by the fifth driver 144 that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 2 and the LEDs are turned on. The sixth driver 145, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal plate 152, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 140, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 151 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 146 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each game machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 146 is configured to be capable of bilateral communication so that the gaming microcomputer 171 can send and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 171 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 161, 162, 163, and 164 are provided. Absent.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 36.
Here, in the first embodiment of this time, under the control of the effect control device 300, an information display 45 equipped with an LED is arranged above the variable winning device 35 of the game board 30, and the information display 45 displays various game states. In FIG. 36, as a modification of the first embodiment, an example in which an information display 45 using a liquid crystal is used instead of the information display 45 provided with an LED is shown. There is.
In the following description, while explaining the configuration in which the information display 45 using the liquid crystal is adopted, the configuration will be described with reference to the information display 45 including the LED.

The effect control device 300 is connected to the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 made of an amusement chip (IC) and the information display 45 using the liquid crystal according to the commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 171. VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display, and sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output to reproduce various melody and sound effects from speakers 13a, 13b, 13c. I have.
Therefore, in the example of FIG. 36, in the configuration in which the information display 45 using the liquid crystal is adopted, the information display 45 using the liquid crystal under the control of the VDP 312 by the command from the effect control device 300 includes various image displays. It is possible to display various game states, display a round of big hits, etc., and perform a variety of powerful effects.
In FIG. 36, when the information display 45 provided with the LED is adopted instead of the information display 45 using the liquid crystal (case of the first embodiment), it is the same as the panel decoration LED control circuit 332 described later. An information display equipped with LEDs is provided by arranging an output port and a driver for the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 via the address / data bus 340 as in the case of using a circuit or shown in FIG. It may be configured to be connected to the vessel 45.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a program executed by the CPU and a PROM (programmable read-only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A FeRAM 323 that can be held and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timing means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 171 to determine the production content and instruct the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instruct the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, turn on the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, and so on.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.
Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

Transmission of vertical synchronization signal VSYNC and data from VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311 to synchronize the image of the information display 45 using the liquid crystal with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 5 and the game board 30. A synchronization signal STS that gives timing is input. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. Wait signal WAIT etc. for the purpose is also input.
The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to an information display 45 using a liquid crystal in an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 uses a liquid crystal via the signal conversion circuit 313. It is displayed on the information display 45.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speakers 13a and 13b provided on the glass frame 5 and the lower speaker 13c provided on the operation panel 6. The sound generated by the LSI 314 is output from the upper speakers 13a and 13b and the lower speaker 13c via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command (effect command) transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect control command signal (effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331, such as a decoration special figure hold number command, a decoration special figure command, a variation command, and a stop information command. ). Since the game microcomputer 171 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 is a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 351 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including a variable winning device 35 as a center case). , A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device 12 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 5, and a game board 30 (including a variable winning device 35 as a center case). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the board effect device 46 is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 5 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 15a built in the effect button 15 provided on the operation panel 6, a touch panel 16 provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 15, and a panel effect device 46. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 93 for detecting the initial position of the effect motor in the above and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 is provided which detects the state of the above and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect accessory switch 93 includes a first V effect switch 63b1 in the accessory device 51 and a second V effect switch 87b1 in the determination device 80.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, information display 45 consisting of liquid crystal panel (that is, information display 45 using liquid crystal), DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, DC5V for command I / F331 power supply voltage, motors and LEDs , It is configured to generate a voltage of DC15V for driving the speaker. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC-for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDP RESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuit 332-334 (IOReSET) for driving and controlling the lamp, the motor, etc. It is supplied to the signal) and puts them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 49 for cooling various parts of the pachinko machine 1 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 49 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

D. Operation of the control system Next, the control of the pachinko machine 1 (game machine) that performs such a game will be described.
First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 171 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 171 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 40 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing of game control device]
First, the main processing of the game control device 100 (game microcomputer 171) will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38.
This main process is started based on the fact that the gaming microcomputer 171 is forcibly reset. That is, when the power switch (not shown) of the power supply device 400 is turned on, the reset signal from the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is sent to the game control device at a predetermined timing (during a predetermined reset period when the power is turned on). When the reset terminal of the gaming microcomputer 171 is turned on by being input to 100 and then the reset signal is released, the gaming microcomputer 171 is activated. Similarly, when the power is restored from a power failure, the reset signal is turned on and then released to start the gaming microcomputer 171. Further, when the operator intends to initialize the user work RAM or the like of the game control device 100, it is necessary to turn on the power switch while turning on the RAM initialization switch 127.

Then, when the gaming microcomputer 171 is started, first, a process for prohibiting interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then a stack for setting a stack pointer, which is the start address of an area for saving values such as registers when an interrupt occurs. The pointer setting process (step S2) is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4).
In the case of this embodiment, the range of the RAM address is 0000h to 01FFh, 00h or 01h is taken as the upper rank, and the first 00h is set in step S4. Next, the launch stop signal is output and the launch permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 161) is read (step S6), and a process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from a game control device 100 that serves as a main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can be prevented from missing a command. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to the validity judgment) that is not subject to the validity judgment (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the input port 1 (first input port 161), and the state of the input port 1 (first input port 161) is read before the start of the standby time. , The operation of the RAM initialization switch 127 can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the RAM initialization switch 127 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the RAM initialization switch 127 can be operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the RAM initialization switch has been turned on until the standby time has elapsed. It is necessary to continue to operate 127. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such annoying operations, and the initialization operation performed when the power is turned on. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. (Step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; YES), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S10; NO), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9).
Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step S10; YES), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; NO), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and whether the timer value is 0 or not. Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; NO), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of times the power failure monitoring signal is checked (step S8). If the timer value is 0 (step S12; YES), that is, when the standby time has expired, access permission is granted to the read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM (step S13). ), Output off-data to all output ports (set to no output) (step S14).
Here, the RWM refers to the RAM 171C in this embodiment, but the RWM is not limited to the RAM, and a readable / writable storage element such as an EEPROM may be included as the RWM.

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the gaming microcomputer 171 and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15) and read first. However, it is determined from the state of the input port 1 (first input port 161) whether the initialization switch (RAM initialization switch 127; the same applies hereinafter) is turned on (step S16).
When the initialization switch is off (step S16; NO), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S17), and it is normal. If (step S17; YES), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; YES), a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19), and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether the checksums of the above match (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; YES), the process proceeds to step S21 of FIG. 38, and processing is performed when the power is normally restored from the power failure.

Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; YES), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; NO or step S18; NO). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; NO), the process proceeds to step S24 of FIG. 38 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make up.

In step S21 of FIG. 38, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is in an indefinite state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined.
Next, the number of ball biting processes (ball biting processing operations) in the motor control region for all motors is cleared to "0" (step S22). Here, it is determined whether or not ball biting has occurred in the drum accessory unit 60, and when ball biting occurs, the number of times to count the process (FIG. 34 (c)) for avoiding it is counted. A process for clearing to "0" in advance, determining whether or not ball biting has occurred in the V movable accessory unit 70, and avoiding ball biting when it occurs (FIG. 34 (a)). , (B)) is cleared to "0" in advance, the determination device 80 determines whether or not ball biting has occurred, and when ball biting occurs, it is for avoiding it. The number of times the process (FIG. 34 (d)) is counted is cleared to "0" in advance.

After step S22, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (! Step S23) and step S29. In the case of this embodiment, in step S23, a model specification command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a game state specification command, a screen specification command (a customer waiting demo command if waiting for a customer, a command being restored otherwise), etc. Send multiple commands. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, an effect number information command is also transmitted.

On the other hand, when jumping from steps S16, S17, S18, and S20 to step S24, the RAM access prohibited area is set to the access permission (step S24), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal status monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S25), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S26). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S27). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28), and the process proceeds to step S29.
In the case of this embodiment, in step S28, the model designation command, the special figure 2 hold number command, and the RAM initialization command (display the customer waiting demo screen and initialize the RAM with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)). Send multiple commands such as (command to notify). In addition to these commands, depending on the model, an effect number information command is also transmitted.

In step S29, a process of activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 171 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 171. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 173, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 171A based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S29, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S30). Specifically, the CPU 171A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) when they are exchanged in a predetermined order and stored as different bit arrangements (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, the random numbers that determine the hit symbol of the special figure). (Special symbol symbol random number)) is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) (step S31), and then an interrupt is permitted in step S33 as described later.
In this embodiment, it is substantially one of the special symbol random numbers that determines the initial value random number. In that case, the soft random number register 1 may be prepared as a predetermined register (soft random number register). become. On the other hand, when there are many random numbers to be determined as initial value random numbers, n random numbers such as soft random number registers 1 to n are prepared as predetermined registers.
In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 171A used in this embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on, so this value is used as the initial value (start value) of the initial value random number. As a result, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

After passing through step S31, the on-data of the connection monitor LED 153 is output (step S32).
In this embodiment, a large number of output ports are prepared so that the game control device 100 as the main board can be commonly used between different models. Specifically, the connection monitor LED 153 is connected to the fourth output port 136 via the driver 142. Incidentally, three accessory motors (drum accessory motor 66, V movable accessory motor 73, and round lottery accessory motor 88) are connected to the third output port 135 via the driver 141. In this way, drive data can be output to three motors from one output port.
Therefore, in this embodiment, by arranging the fourth output port 136, if the connection monitor LED 153 is removed, three more motors can be added. Therefore, the connection monitor LED 153 is connected to the output port (4th output port 136 in this case) that is left over in the current model, and a motor is added while monitoring that the main board (game control device 100) is operating. Is made easy.

After passing through step S32, interrupts are then enabled in step S33 as described above.
Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S34 to perform a process of updating the special symbol initial value random number by "+1" (hereinafter, referred to as a special symbol initial value random number update process). This is because the regularity of the random numbers is broken by updating the special symbol initial value random numbers by "+1". Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the initial value is set to one random number (special symbol initial value random number).
Although not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the random number for determining the winning symbol of the special symbol (special symbol symbol random number) is configured to be generated by using the random number generated in the random number generation circuit. Has been done. In addition, in the random numbers that determine the hit symbol of the special figure, the so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes around. .. It should be noted that each of the random numbers may be a counter type update by +1 or -1, or a random type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed.

After the special symbol initial value random number update process in step S34, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S35). ), Determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S36). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S36; NO), the process returns to the special symbol initial value random number update process (step S34). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the special symbol initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the special symbol initial value random number update process (step S34) (step S33), if a timer interrupt occurs during the special symbol initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to avoid the interrupt processing being overwhelmed by the timer interrupt being waited by the special symbol initial value random number update processing.

In addition to the main process, the special symbol initial value random number update process in step S34 may include a method of performing the special symbol initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process, and such a method is adopted. In this case, in order to avoid executing the special symbol initial value random number update process in both cases, when performing the special symbol initial value random number update process in the main process, the interrupt is disabled and then updated to interrupt. It is necessary to cancel it, but if the special symbol initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing as in this embodiment and only in the main processing, the special symbol initial value random number update processing is performed. There is no problem in canceling the interrupt before, which has the advantage of simplifying the main processing.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S36; YES), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step S35 (step S37). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S37; NO), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S36). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal has been turned on for the number of checks (step S37; YES), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step S38) is complete. The process of outputting off-data to the output port (step S39) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S40), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S41). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S42) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step S43) for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area, access to the RWM is prohibited. After performing the process (step S44), it waits for the power of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) to be cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, a main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to instructions from the main control means, etc. ), The main control means sets a predetermined standby time for delaying the activation of the main control means and waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device). 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.
Further, in the main control means (game control device 100), the RAM 171C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 127) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit are operated. It is provided with an initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 171C based on the above, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.
Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 171C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation process]
Next, the checksum calculation process (steps S19, S42) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG. 39.
When this routine is started, first, the start address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address in step S51, and the number of repetitions is set in step S52. The number of repetitions is set according to the number of bytes of the RWM used. Next, after setting "0" as the calculated value in step S53, the calculated value + the content of the calculated address is calculated as a new calculated value in step S54. In this way, the contents of each address are added as calculated values. Next, in step S55, the calculated address is updated by "+1", in step S56, the number of repetitions is updated by "-1" to check whether the calculation is completed, and in step S57, it is determined whether or not the calculation is completed. If the determination result in step S57 is NO, the process returns to step S54 and the routine is repeated. Then, when the number of repetitions = the number of bytes of RWM, it is determined that the calculation is completed, the process exits from step S57 to YES, and the routine ends.
In this way, the checksum is calculated when the power of the RWM is cut off.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described.
As shown in FIG. 40, the timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 171A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 171, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 40 is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the register bank 1 is specified (step S61). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing the register save process of transferring the value held in the predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step S62). In step S62, the same processing as in step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different.
Next, input from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S63) are performed. Then, based on the output data set by various processes, solenoids and the like (first prize-winning port solenoid 201, second prize-winning port solenoid 202, floor accessory solenoid 61b1 and other accessory solenoids, drum accessory motor 66, V Output processing (step S64) is performed to control the drive of the actuator of the movable accessory motor 73, the accessory motor such as the round lottery accessory motor 88). When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device (not shown) via the payout control device 200. At that time, the signal is not processed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the launch permission status as seen from the game control device 100, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission status as seen from the payout control device 200 is also It is generated in the payout control device 200 and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, a payout command transmission process (step S65) and a random number update process 1 (step S66) are performed to output the commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200. After that, the winning opening switch 102, the left winning opening switch 103, the right winning opening switch 104, the left starting opening switch 105, the right starting opening switch 106, the middle starting opening switch 107, the specific area switches 80a to 80d, the remaining ball discharge port. Winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S67) that monitors whether there is a normal signal input from switches 112 and 113 and monitors errors (whether the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 are open, etc.). )I do.
In addition, the remaining ball monitoring process is performed (step S68). The remaining ball monitoring process is a process of monitoring whether or not the game ball that has won the variable winning device 35 has escaped to the outside and remains inside the variable winning device 35.
Next, game stop error processing is performed (step S69). The game stop error processing stops the game when there is an error (radio wave fraud, etc.) that stops the game, while monitoring whether there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 127 to clear the error. It is a thing.

Next, it is determined whether or not an error operation is in progress (step S70). This is to determine whether an error such as radio wave fraud has occurred and the operation is in progress. If the error operation is not in progress (step S70; NO), it is determined whether or not the error is being released (step S71). On the other hand, if an error operation is in progress (step S70; YES), the process jumps to step S74.
If the error is waiting to be cleared (step S71; YES), it is determined that the error has not been cleared yet, and the process jumps to step S75. Therefore, in this case, each process of steps S72 to S74 is not performed, and the special figure game, the motor control of the accessory device 51 (drum accessory unit 60 and the V movable accessory unit 70), the motor control of the determination device 80, and the like are performed. It will not be played and there will be no game games.
On the other hand, if it is not waiting for error cancellation (step S71; NO), the special figure game process is performed (step S72) and the segment LED editing process is performed (step S73). The special figure game processing is for processing related to the special figure variation display game, and the segment LED editing process is provided in the pachinko machine 1, and the segment LED for displaying the display of the special figure variation display game and various information related to the game is desired. Is driven to display.

Next, a motor control process for controlling the motor of the accessory device 51 and the determination device 80 is performed (step S74).
When the process proceeds from step S74 to step S75 or the jump is made from step S71 to step S75, the abnormal discharge monitoring process is performed in step S75. This is illegal if the game balls that have flowed into the variable winning device 35 and the game balls that have been discharged from the variable winning device 35 are monitored and the number of game balls that have been discharged is larger than the number of game balls that have flowed in. It determines that there is a possibility of abnormality and performs processing such as stopping the game.
Next, fraud monitoring processing is performed (step S76). This is a panel that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 115 and determines whether there is any abnormality. Monitors magnet fraud and checks the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 114 to determine whether there is any abnormality. It monitors radio wave fraud.

Next, the launch control process is performed (step S77). This saves the output data of launch stop when an error such as stopping the game occurs, and saves the output data of launch permission when such an error does not occur. It is a thing.
Then, an external information editing process (step S78) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.
Here, in this embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupt) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) are interrupt return processes. Automatically at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to be instructed to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the register bank designation.

[Input processing]
Next, the input process (step S63) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 40.
In the input process, first, the address of the input port 1, that is, the first input port 161 is prepared (step S91). In this embodiment, "preparation" means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in RWM or other memory.
Next, the address of the switch control region 1 in the RWM is prepared in step S92, unused bit data is prepared in step S93, and bit data to be inverted is prepared in step S94. For example, since the RAM initialization switch 127 needs to invert the detection signal, bit data such as a sensor / switch is prepared.
Here, unused bit data and inverting bit data are prepared for each input port. The name in the flowchart is the same for the bit data, but the unused bit data and the inverted bit data are different. However, as a result, the data may have the same value.

Next, in step S95, a switch read process is performed on the input port 1 (first input port 161).
Here, the switches monitored by the input port 1 (first input port 161) are as follows.
・ Glass frame open detection switch 117 (bit 0)
・ Main body frame open detection switch 118 (bit 1)
-RAM initialization switch 127 (bit 2) (inverted bit)
・ Power failure monitoring signal (bit 3)
-Payout error status signal (bit 4)
・ Shoot ball out switch signal (bit 5)
-Overflow switch signal (bit 6)
-Touch switch signal (bit 7)
By the above processes from step S91 to step S95, information about the switch monitored by the input port 1 (first input port 161) is read.

Next, similarly, the process of reading the information of the switch monitored by the input port 2 (second input port 162) is performed.
First, the address of the input port 2 (second input port 162) is prepared in step S96, and then the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared in step S97. Next, unused bit data is prepared in step S98, and bit data to be inverted is prepared in step S99.
Next, in step S100, a switch read process is performed on the input port 2 (second input port 162).

Here, the switches monitored by the input port 2 (second input port 162) are as follows. The switch monitored by the input port 2 does not have a bit to be inverted.
-Left start port switch 105 (bit 0): "Start port 1 winning signal"
Here, the left start port switch 105 is also output as a "start port 1 winning signal" of the test signal by pattern branching, and this also applies to each switch described later, and these are indicated on the right side of each bit mode. There is.
-Medium start port switch 107 (bit 1): "Start port 2 winning signal"
-Right start port switch 106 (bit 2): "Start port 3 winning signal"
-Winning opening switch 102 (bit 3): "Normal winning opening 1 winning signal"
4th specific area switch 80d (bit 4): "condition device operating area 2 passing signal 1", "accessory continuous operating area 2 passing signal 1"
-Left large winning opening switch 103 (bit 5): "Special electric accessory 1 winning signal 1"
-Right large winning opening switch 104 (bit 6): "Special electric accessory 1 winning signal 2"
3rd specific area switch 80c (bit 7): "condition device operating area 1 passing signal 3", "accessory continuous operating area 2 passing signal 3"
By the above processes from step S96 to step S100, information about the switch monitored by the input port 2 (second input port 162) is read.

Next, similarly, the process of reading the information of the switch monitored by the input port 3 (third input port 163) is performed.
First, the address of the input port 3 (third input port 163) is prepared in step S101, and then the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared in step S102. Next, unused bit data is prepared in step S103, and bit data to be inverted is prepared in step S104.
Next, in step S105, a switch read process is performed on the input port 3 (third input port 163).

Here, the switches monitored by the input port 3 (third input port 163) are as follows.
・ Panel radio wave sensor 114 (bit 0) (inverted bit)
・ Switch abnormality detection signal 1 (bit 1)
-Magnetic sensor 115 (bit 2)
・ Frame radio wave error signal (bit 3)
・ Payout busy signal (bit 4)
・ Switch abnormality detection signal 2 (bit 5)
・ Vibration sensor 116 (bit 6) (inversion bit)
-Unused (bit 7)
Here, as shown in FIG. 35, the switch abnormality detection signal 1 is an abnormality detection signal 1 output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a. Further, as shown in FIG. 35, the switch abnormality detection signal 2 is an abnormality detection signal 2 output when an abnormality of a sensor or a switch is detected among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121b.
By the above processes from step S101 to step S105, information about the switch monitored by the input port 3 (third input port 163) is read.

Next, similarly, the process of reading the information of the switch monitored by the input port 4 (fourth input port 164) is performed.
First, the address of the input port 4 (fourth input port 164) is prepared in step S106, and then the address of the switch control area 4 in the RWM is prepared in step S107. Next, unused bit data is prepared in step S108, and bit data to be inverted is prepared in step S109.
Next, in step S110, a switch read process is performed on the input port 4 (fourth input port 164).

Here, the switches monitored by the input port 4 (fourth input port 164) are as follows. The switch monitored by the input port 4 does not have a bit to be inverted.
1st specific area switch 80a (bit 0): "condition device operating area 1 passing signal 1", "accessory continuous operating area 1 passing signal 1"
1st remaining ball discharge port switch 112 (bit 1): "Special electric accessory 1 discharge port passage signal 1"
-Second residual ball discharge port switch 113 (bit 2): "Special electric accessory 1 discharge port passage signal 2"
2nd specific area switch 80b (bit 3): "condition device operating area 1 passing signal 2", "accessory continuous operating area 1 passing signal 2"
-Unused (bit 4): Circuit is connected to a relay board (not shown) as a spare motor switch.-Round lottery accessory motor switch 88a (bit 5)
・ Taiko accessory motor switch 66a (bit 6)
・ V movable accessory motor switch 73a (bit 7)

After passing through step S110, the process proceeds to step S111, and the exclusive OR of the previous finalized state and the inverted current finalized state is taken, saved in the RWM as a falling edge, and the input process is completed.
This is because the switch read processing is performed twice in one interrupt processing with a predetermined time difference, so that the processable amount in the interrupt is increased by extending the timer interrupt cycle, and the structural design is easy. It is to balance the above. Details will be described in the switch read processing routine described later.

[Switch reading process]
Next, the subroutine of the switch reading process (steps S95, S100, S105, S110) in the above-mentioned input process will be described with reference to FIG. 42.
In the switch reading process, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read (step S121). This corresponds to the first reading. Next, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S122), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S123), and then the target switch control area in the RWM Save (store) in the port input state (step S124). After that, it waits for the delay time (0.1 ms = 100 μs) until the second reading to elapse (step S125).

When the delay time (0.1 ms) has elapsed, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read a second time (step S126). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S127), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S128), and then the port input state of the target switch control area. (First-time data) is loaded, and the inverted data (second-time data) is saved (stored) (step S129). After that, the bits changed in the first and second readings, that is, the signals are detected, and a definite bit pattern is created (step S130). Specifically, among the states of the input port to be read, a definite bit pattern is created in which bits having the same state as the first and second times are set to "1" and bits having different states are set to "0". Next, the logical product of the fixed bit pattern and the port input state (second data) is taken and used as the fixed bit this time (step S131).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern is created in which the bits having the same state are 0 and the bits having different states are 1 in the first and second reads (step S132), and the logical product of the undetermined bit pattern and the confirmed state at the time of the previous interrupt. Is used as the previous holding bit (step S133). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state in which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the fixed bit this time and the held bit last time are combined and saved in the RWM as the fixed state this time (step S134), the exclusive OR is taken between the fixed state of the previous time and the fixed state this time, and the save is saved in the RWM as the rising edge. (Step S135), the switch reading process is terminated.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch is read once for each interrupt process, and the signal is changed by comparing with the result of the previous read. There is a method of determining whether or not the switch has been executed, but if this is done, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, the correct determination may not be possible. In addition, since the input pulse of the switch must be held for more than twice the timer interrupt cycle by simple calculation, the design of the electric circuit to extend the pulse and the speed of the game ball passing through the switch are slowed down. It is necessary to design the structure of the spherical flow path.
On the other hand, as in this embodiment, the amount that can be processed in the interrupt by extending the timer interrupt cycle by performing the switch read processing twice in one interrupt processing with a predetermined time difference. It is possible to achieve both the increase and the ease of structural design, etc., and avoid the above-mentioned problems.

[Output processing]
Next, the output process (step S64) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 43.
In the output process, first, all the output data of the port 137 (see FIG. 35) that outputs the segment data of the batch display device 50 is turned off (step S141). Next, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device 50 is updated (updated by "+1" in the range of 0 to 3) (step S142).
In this embodiment, the batch display device 50 is composed of LEDs and dynamically lit. Here, "special figure 1 symbol display", "special figure 2 symbol display", "special figure 2 hold display", and "round" Information such as "display" and "game status display (during big hit, other than during big hit)" is displayed.

Subsequently, the output data of the LED digit line corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (loaded) (step S143). Next, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (step S144). The external information synthesized here is information related to "door / frame opening" and "security signal".
Next, the combined data is output to the digit / external information output port (sixth output port 138) (step S145). The sixth output port 138 is an output port for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the batch display device 50 is connected.
Next, various output data of external information to be output to the external information terminal board 152 are loaded and synthesized (step S146).
The external information synthesized here is as follows.
・ Big hit 1 signal ・ Big hit 2 signal ・ Character winning number signal ・ Character number number signal ・ Starting port 1 signal ・ Starting port 2 signal ・ Main prize ball signal

Next, the synthesized data is output to the external information / emission permission signal output port (7th output port 139) (step S148). The seventh output port 136 is an output port for outputting information about the pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 152 as external information. Next, it is determined whether or not the game stop error has occurred (step S149), and if the game stop error has not occurred (step S149; YES), the process proceeds to step S150. On the other hand, if an error to stop the game has occurred (step S149; NO), the game branches to step S153.
When the process proceeds to step S150, the output data of the segment line is loaded (acquired) from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter in this step S150, and the acquired segment output data is used as the segment output port (port for segment output). Output to the 5th output port 137). The fifth output port 137 is an output port for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50.
Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port is synthesized and output to the second output port 134 (step S151). The second output port 134 is a port that outputs data to be output to the solenoid, and the solenoid corresponding to the data output here is as follows.
・ First Grand Prize Opening Solenoid 201
・ Second prize opening solenoid 202
・ Floor accessory solenoid 61b1

After passing through step S151, the process proceeds to step S152.
On the other hand, when it is determined as NO in the previous step S149, it branches to step S153 and outputs off-data to the solenoid output port as described above. As a result, off-data is output to the second output port 134 for outputting the solenoid output data. Therefore, the above-mentioned first prize-winning port solenoid 201, second prize-winning port solenoid 202, and floor accessory solenoid are output. All of the accessory solenoids such as 61b1 are turned off and do not operate.
Then, after passing through step S153, the process proceeds to step S152.
When the process proceeds from step S151 or step S153 to step S152, it is determined in step S152 whether or not the error is waiting to be cleared. If it is not waiting for error cancellation (step S152; NO), it is determined that the game may proceed, and the data to be output to the motor output port (third output port 135) is synthesized and output in step S154.
The third output port 135 is a port for outputting motor output data, and the motor corresponding to the data output here is as follows.
・ Taiko accessory motor 66
・ V movable accessory motor 73
・ Round lottery accessory motor 88
As a result, the operation of the accessory motors such as the drum accessory motor 66, the V movable accessory motor 73, and the round lottery accessory motor 88 is permitted.
On the other hand, if the error is waiting to be cleared (step S152; YES), it is necessary to wait until the error is cleared, so it is determined that the game cannot proceed, and the motor output port (third output port 135) is determined in step S155. ) Outputs off-data. As a result, the operation of the accessory motors such as the drum accessory motor 66, the V movable accessory motor 73, and the round lottery accessory motor 88 is not permitted.

After passing through step S154 or step S155, the process proceeds to step S156, and the test signal output data 1 to 3 to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and synthesized, and the test terminal output port provided on the relay board 151 The combined data to 1 is output (step S156). After that, the output data 4 to 6 of the test signal to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 provided on the relay board 151 (step S157).
Next, the output data 7 to 8 of the test signal to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 provided on the relay board 151 (step S158). Further, the output data 9 to 10 of the test signal to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 provided on the relay board 151 (step S159). Further, the output data 11 of the test signal to be output to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 provided on the relay board 151 (step S160), and FIG. 43 Ends the output processing of.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the payout command transmission process (step S65) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the payout command transmission process, first, among a plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each prize ball number (for example, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls), the number of prizes to be checked It is determined whether there is a count number other than "0" in the counter area 2 (step S171).
The structure of the winning number counter area 2 is as follows, for example.
・ 3 prize ball counter ・ 10 prize ball counter ・ 14 prize ball counter Each prize number counter area can store up to 255 prizes, and in the check of the prize number counter area 2, the above-mentioned counter is raised. Check in order from (from the 3 prize ball counter).
There is also a winning number counter area 1, which will be described in detail later.

Returning to the flow, when there is no count in the prize counter area 2 (step S171: NO), the address of the prize counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S172), and the counts of all the prize counter areas It is determined whether the number check is completed (step S173). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S173; YES), the process jumps to step S182.
On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S173; NO), the process returns to step S171 and the above process is repeated.

If it is determined in step S171 that there is a count number in the winning number counter area 2 (step S171; YES), the process proceeds to step S174. Then, the count number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step S174), and the payout number corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 2 is acquired (step S175). Next, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area and the number of payouts this time are added (step S176), and the addition result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S177). As a result, the number of payouts this time is added to the value of the remaining number of prize balls area up to the previous time, and the total value of this time is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area.
Every time the remaining number of prize balls reaches 10, the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is added by "+1" and updated (details will be described later).
Next, "10" is subtracted from the addition result in step S177 (step S178), and it is determined whether or not the subtraction result is "0" or more (step S179). If the subtraction result is "0" or more (step S179; YES), the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is updated by adding "+1" (step S180), and then the subtraction this time is "0" or more. The result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S181). After passing through step S181, the process returns to step S178 and repeats the loop. Therefore, as long as a prize ball is generated by the game, the number of payouts is added to the value of the remaining number of prize balls area up to the previous time, "10" is subtracted from the addition result, and the subtraction result is "0" or more. The processes of steps S178 to S181 are repeated.
Then, if the subtraction result is less than "0" (step S179; NO), the process branches to step S182.

Here, among the processes shown in FIG. 44, the processes in the left column in the figure (steps S171 to S181) are in charge of updating the number of times the main prize ball signal is output. On the other hand, among the processes shown in FIG. 44, the processes in the right column of the figure (steps S182 to S191), which will be described later, are in charge of the processes of transmitting the payout command.
Now, when returning to the flow and proceeding to step S182, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", the payout command transmission timer is updated by "-1" (that is, only "-1" is subtracted). In this method, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but is sent after a predetermined time has elapsed, so that the elapse of the predetermined time is counted. As a premise for transmitting the payout command, for example, it is also a condition that the payout control device 200 (payout control board) side is in a state where the prize ball can be paid out.
Next, it is determined whether or not the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S183), and if the payout command transmission timer has not become "0" (step S183; NO), the current routine is terminated. Return. Therefore, this routine is repeated until the payout command transmission timer becomes "0".

Then, when the payout command transmission timer becomes “0” (step S183; YES), it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is busy (step S184). In the determination in step S184, the determination is made not by looking at the state of the output port but by looking at the payout busy signal flag. If the payout busy signal is busy (step S184; YES), the routine ends this time and returns. Therefore, this routine will be repeated until the payout busy signal is no longer busy.
Here, the conditions under which the payout busy signal is busy are as follows.
・ During payout operation ・ During ball lending operation ・ During shoot ball out error ・ During overflow error ・ During frame radio wave fraud ・ During payout ball detection switch error: (Switch to monitor the paid out ball)
-Insufficient payout error-Overpayment error-When there is a count of the number of prize balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control board (number of unpaid prize balls = remaining number of acquired game balls) (when not = 0)

If the payout busy signal is not busy (step S184; NO), among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each prize ball number (for example, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). , It is determined whether there is a count number other than "0" in the winning number counter area 1 to be checked (step S185).
The structure of the winning number counter area 1 is as follows, for example.
・ 3 prize ball counter ・ 10 prize ball counter ・ 14 prize ball counter Each prize number counter area can store up to 65535 prizes, and in the prize number counter area 1 check, the above-mentioned counter is displayed from above. Check in order (from the 3 prize ball counter).

Returning to the flow, when there is no count number in the prize number counter area 1 (step S185: NO), the address of the prize number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S186), and the counts of all the prize number counter areas are counted. It is determined whether the number check is completed (step S187). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S187; YES), the payout command transmission process is terminated and a return is made.
On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S187; NO), the process returns to step S185 and the above process is repeated.

If it is determined in step S185 that there is a count number in the winning number counter area 1 (step S185; YES), the process proceeds to step S188. Then, the count number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step S188), and the payout command corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 1 is acquired (step S189). Next, the acquired payout command is written to the payout serial transmission buffer (step S190). As a result, the payout command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the payout control device 200 at a predetermined timing. Next, the initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S191). The payout command transmission timer area is an area for writing the value of the payout command transmission timer described in step S182 described above. When step S191 is passed, the payout command transmission process is completed and the process returns.
By the above processing, a payout command instructing the payout of the game ball is transmitted to the payout control device 200, and the payout control device 200 performs a process of paying out the game ball based on this payout command.

[Random number update process 1]
Next, the random number update process 1 (step S66) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 45.
The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the special symbol random number.
In the random number update process 1, first, it is determined whether the special symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S201).
If the special symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S201; NO), the random number update process 1 ends. On the other hand, when the special symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S201; YES), the special symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S202), and the next initial initial value of the loaded special symbol random number is loaded. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number region) (step S203), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
Next, the winning port switch / state monitoring process (step S67) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The winning port switch / status monitoring process is a process of monitoring whether or not there is a signal input (signal change) from switches provided in various winning ports, and monitoring the status.
In the winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, the left major winning opening switch monitoring table corresponding to the left winning opening switch 103 (for example, the port number to which the detection signal from the left winning opening switch 103 is input or the signal) (Data indicating the bit position and the like in the port of is stored) is prepared (step S211). The left large winning opening switch 103 is arranged in a space near the base end portion of the movable member 43a in the variable winning device 35, and detects a game ball flowing into the accessory device 51.
When the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened, the game ball flows into the accessory device 51 through the winning space 41.
In this embodiment, two switches, a left grand prize opening switch 103 and a right grand prize opening switch 104, are provided as switches for detecting the game ball flowing into the bonus device 51, and the game ball flowing into the bonus device 51 is on the left. Since it is detected by either the large winning opening switch 103 or the right large winning opening switch 104, here, a left special winning opening switch monitoring table corresponding to one of the left large winning opening switches 103 is prepared. Next, even though the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are not open, the variable winning device 35 is monitored for illegal winning, and the fraud & winning monitoring process for detecting a normal winning (step). S212) is executed.

After that, the number of the port into which the detection signal from the right grand prize opening switch 104 is input, the bit position in the port of the signal, and the like, etc. are displayed on the right grand prize opening switch monitoring table corresponding to the right grand prize opening switch 104. The data to be shown is stored) (step S213). The right large winning opening switch 104 is arranged in a space near the base end portion of the movable member 43b in the variable winning device 35, and detects a game ball flowing into the accessory device 51.
In this embodiment, two switches, a left grand prize opening switch 103 and a right grand prize opening switch 104, are provided as switches for detecting the game ball flowing into the bonus device 51, and the game ball flowing into the bonus device 51 is on the left. Since it is detected by either the big winning opening switch 103 or the right winning opening switch 104, here, the right big winning opening switch monitoring table corresponding to the other right winning opening switch 104 is prepared. Next, even though the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are not open, the variable winning device 35 is monitored for illegal winning, and the fraud & winning monitoring process for detecting a normal winning (step). S214) is executed.
Further, a start port error monitoring process for detecting an abnormality based on the detection states of the left start port switch 105, the middle start port switch 107, and the right start port switch 106 is performed (step S215).

Next, a winning monitoring table of the winning opening switch that can always win a prize is prepared (step S216). The following are the winning opening switches that can always win a prize.
-Left start port switch 105
・ Medium start port switch 107
-Right start port switch 106
・ Winning opening switch 102

Next, the winning number counter update process for updating the winning number is performed (step S217). The detailed procedure of this winning number counter update process will be described later.
Next, the status scan counter is updated (“+1” is updated in the range of 0 to 3) (step S218). The status scan counter is for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches and signals whose errors should be monitored as the game machine status is to be monitored this time.
Subsequently, the game machine condition monitoring table 1 is prepared (step S219).
The types of errors to be monitored by the game machine state monitoring table 1 as the game machine state are as follows, and these are for monitoring the abnormality of the shoot ball out switch, the overflow switch, and the payout control device 200 from the payout control device 200. Respond to errors.
・ When 0: Switch error (connector disconnection, switch failure, etc.)
・ When 1: Shoot ball out error ・ When 2: Overflow error ・ When 3: Payout error error

Next, a game machine state check process is performed (step S220). This is to check the error in the prepared game machine state monitoring table 1 (details will be described later).
Subsequently, the game machine condition monitoring table 2 is prepared (step S221).
The types of errors to be monitored by the game machine state monitoring table 2 as the game machine state are as follows, and these are the frame radio wave error from the glass frame opening detection switch 117, the main body frame opening detection switch 118, and the payout control device 200. Corresponds to signals, touch switch signals, etc.
・ When 0: Glass frame 5 open (front frame open)
・ When 1: Front frame 4 is open (game frame is open)
・ When 2: Frame radio wave is incorrect ・ When 3: Touch switch is turned on (When the launch operation handle 11 is touched, the touch switch provided on the launch operation handle 11 is turned on)
Next, a game machine state check process is performed (step S222). This is to check the error in the prepared game machine state monitoring table 2 (details will be described later).
Next, it is determined whether or not the state scan counter is "0" (step S223). Since the state scan counter is updated by "+1" in the range of 0 to 3, here, it is determined whether or not it is "0".
If the status scan counter is not "0" (step S223; NO), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process ends and returns. Therefore, at this time, the routine is repeated.

On the other hand, if the status scan counter is "0" (step S223; YES), then the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S224).
As the type of error monitored by the game machine state monitoring table 3 as the game machine state, there is a switch abnormality 2 error. The switch abnormality 2 error is an error when an abnormality such as a connector disconnection in various sensors or switches connected to the proximity I / F 121b is detected.
Next, a game machine state check process is performed (step S225). This is to check the error prepared in the game machine state monitoring table 3 (details will be described later).
Next, the payout busy signal check process is performed (step S226). This is to check whether the payout busy signal is busy. Since the status scan counter is updated by "+1" in the range of 0 to 3, the payout busy signal check process is executed once every four times. Therefore, the payout busy signal is monitored (checked) at a cycle of 16 ms.
After step S224, the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is terminated.

[Illegal & winning monitoring process]
Next, the fraud & winning monitoring processing (steps S212 and S214) in the winning opening switch / status monitoring processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. 47.
In the winning monitoring process, each of the two left large winning opening switches 103 and the right large winning opening switch 104 that detect the game ball to be won in the variable winning device 35, the left starting opening switch 105 as a winning opening switch that can always win a prize, This is a process performed on the middle start port switch 107, the right start port switch 106, and the winning port switch 102. With respect to the variable prize device 35, fraud is likely to occur in which the movable members 43a and 43b are forcibly opened to insert a game ball and the prize ball is paid out. Therefore, fraud is monitored in addition to detecting the prize.
Here, in explaining the fraud & winning monitoring process in the winning port switch / status monitoring process, the information defined in the fraud monitoring table prepared is as follows.
-Data for determining whether there is an input (monitoring switch bit)
・ Lower address of fraud monitoring information ・ Lower address of fraudulent winning number area ・ Fraudulent winning error notification command
・ Address of winning opening switch table ・ Notification timer update information (permission / update)

In the fraud & prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning port switch to be error-monitored is checked (step S231), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step S232). The fraud monitoring period is a special gaming state in which the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened when the winning opening switches subject to error monitoring are the two left large winning opening switches 103 and the right large winning opening switch 104. It is a period other than.

Then, in the case of the fraud monitoring period (step S232; YES), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the target winning opening switch (step S233). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S233; NO), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S242). Further, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S233; YES), the target fraudulent winning number is updated by +1 (step S234), and the number of fraudulent winnings after addition is the number of fraud occurrence determinations to be monitored (for example). , 5) is determined (step S235). The number of fraud occurrence determinations is not limited to 5, for example, and can be set to a different value for each target winning opening switch. However, in this embodiment, the same is true for all winning opening switches. The value is set.

The number of determined items is 5, for example, when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 (generally also referred to as a large winning opening) in the open state are converted to the closed state, the game ball wins a large prize. It is sandwiched between the door members (movable members 43a and 43b in this case) of the mouth (that is, the variable winning device 35), and the game ball is a count switch (each of the two left winning opening switches 103 and the right winning opening switch 104). This is to prevent it from being judged as illegal when a prize is won after the valid period or when the signal is noisy, and it is not easily judged as an error even though it is not illegal. For a place where the fraud monitoring condition is desired to be severe, the number of judgments may be set to, for example, one.
Then, if it is determined that the number of determined items is not exceeded (step S235; NO), the process jumps to step S240, and the winning monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared. When the number of determined items is exceeded (step S235; YES), the number of illegal winnings is limited to the number of illegal winnings (step S236), and the initial value is saved in the target illegal winning notification timer area (step S237). For example, 60,000 ms is set as the initial value of the illegal winning notification timer.
Next, the target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step S238), the fraudulent winning occurrence flag is prepared as the fraud flag (step S239), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S250). ).

On the other hand, when it is not the fraud monitoring period (step S232; NO), the winning monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S240), and the winning number counter update process (step S241) for setting the winning ball is performed. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S242), and whether or not the notification timer update permission is permitted is determined (step S243). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step S243; NO), the fraudulent & winning monitoring process ends. When the update of the notification timer is permitted (step S243; YES), the notification timer is updated by -1 if the target notification timer is not 0 (step S244). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0.
The update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning opening switch for error monitoring is one of the two left winning opening switches 103 and the right winning opening switch 104, and the error monitoring target. If the winning opening switch of is the other right winning opening switch 104, it is not permitted. As a result, regarding the fraudulent notification of the variable winning device 35, the notification timer is updated twice as frequently, and it is prevented that the time is up in half of the specified time (for example, 60,000 ms).
That is, since error monitoring is performed for the large winning opening (variable winning device 35) by the two left large winning opening switches 103 and the right large winning opening switch 104, if the timer is updated by both switches, the timer is updated twice. As a result, the illegal timer will time up in half of the specified time, so the timer should be updated only at the timing of the left large winning opening switch 103, which will be monitored later. Is what you are doing.
When the winning slot switch to be error-monitored is one winning slot switch, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S245), and if the value is not 0 (step S245; NO), that is, if the time is not up, the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step S245; YES), that is, if the time is up or the time has already been up, the target illegal release command is prepared (step S246), and the illegal prize release flag is set as the illegal flag. Prepare (step S47). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S248).

When the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S248; YES), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, the target number of illegal winnings is cleared (). Step S249), the prepared invalid flag is compared with the value of the target invalid flag area (step S250). If it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S248; NO), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the fraud & winning monitoring process before the previous time, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. Compare with the value of the invalid flag area (step S250).

Then, when the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (step S50; YES), the fraud & winning monitoring process ends. If the prepared invalid flag and the value of the target invalid flag area do not match (step S250; NO), the prepared invalid flag is saved in the target invalid flag area (step S251), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S252), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated.
By the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, an illegal winning error release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is released, and the start and end of the error notification are set. Will be done.

[Winning counter update process]
Next, the winning number counter update process (step S217) in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process and the winning number counter updating process (step S241) in the fraud & winning monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. 48.
In the winning number counter update process, first, it is determined whether an error to stop the game is occurring (step S261), and if an error to stop the game is occurring (step S261; YES), the winning number counter is updated. End the process. Further, when the error of stopping the game is not occurring (step S261; NO), the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening monitoring table acquired in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S262). ).
Here, the information defined in the winning table among the winning opening monitoring tables prepared by the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is as follows.
-Data for determining the number of repetitions and whether there is an input (monitoring switch bit) (defined for each switch)
-Lower address of the winning number counter area 1 (defined for each switch)
-Lower address of the winning number counter area 2 (defined for each switch)
Next, it is checked whether or not there is an input of a detection signal (correctly, a change in the input) from the winning port switch to be monitored (step S263). Here, if it is determined that there is no input (S263; NO), the process jumps to step S272, and if it is determined that there is an input (S263; YES), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded in the next step S264. ..

In the next step S265, the loaded winning number counter is updated (+1), and in the following step S266, it is checked whether or not it overflows. Then, if it is determined that the counter overflow has not occurred (step S266; NO), the process proceeds to step S267, the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1, and then the process proceeds to step S268.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S266 that a counter overflow has occurred (S266; YES), step S267 is skipped and the process jumps to step S268.
Note that the maximum number of stored items (for example, 255 for 1-byte size and 65535 for 2-byte size) is determined by the size of the provided prize counter area, so if it exceeds that, the value will return to "0". , You will lose information on the large number of prize balls to pay. In order to avoid this, in step S265, the content of the area is not updated suddenly, and the update is performed after confirming that the content is "+1" outside the area and becomes "0".
In this way, the processing of the first half (definition will be described later) is performed, and the counter for the prize ball (payout command transmission) is updated.

Here, the processing from step S264 to step S267 (hereinafter, referred to as the first half portion) updates the counter for the prize ball (payout command transmission). The counter size in the first half is 2 bytes, and the range from 0 to 65535 is the maximum number of stored items.
On the other hand, the processing from step S268 to step S271 described later (hereinafter referred to as the latter half) updates the counter for the main prize ball signal. The counter size in the latter half is 1 byte, and the range from 0 to 255 is the maximum number of stored items.

Returning to the flow, the processing from step S268 to step S271 (that is, the processing of the latter half) is performed. First, the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S268).
Next, the process proceeds to the next step S269, the loaded prize number counter is updated (+1), and it is checked whether or not the load overflows in the following step S270. Then, if it is determined that the counter overflow has not occurred (step S270; NO), the process proceeds to step S271, the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2, and then the process proceeds to step S272.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S270 that a counter overflow has occurred (S270; YES), step S271 is skipped and the process jumps to step S272.
In this way, the second half of the process is performed and the counter for the main prize ball signal is updated.

As described above, when it is determined in step S263 that there is no input of the detection signal (correctly, the input change) from the winning port switch to be monitored (S263; NO), or in step S270, a counter overflow occurs (). If it is determined that S270; YES) and the updated value is saved in the input number counter area 2 (step S271), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S272), and the process proceeds to step S273. .. In step S273, it is determined whether the monitoring processing of all the switches is completed, and if it is completed (step S273; YES), the input number counter update processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not completed (step S273; NO), the process returns to step S263 and the above process is repeated. By the above processing, the prize balls according to the prizes are set in the prize number counter area 1, and the data for generating the main prize ball signal is set in the prize number counter area 2.

[Starting port error monitoring process]
Next, the start port error monitoring process (step S215) in the above-mentioned winning port switch / state monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. 49.
In this start port error monitoring process, first, a process for detecting an abnormal prize in which an abnormally large number of prizes (for example, 25) occur within a predetermined time (for example, within 60 seconds) is performed (steps S911 to S921).
In the process for detecting the abnormal winning, first, if the starting opening winning monitoring timer for timing the predetermined time is not 0, the start opening winning monitoring timer is updated by -1 (step S911), and the starting opening winning monitoring timer is 0. (Step S912).
If the start port winning monitoring timer is not 0 (step S912; NO), the process proceeds to step S917.
When the start opening winning monitoring timer is 0 (step S912; YES), the initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the starting opening winning monitoring timer area (step S913), and the left, right, and middle starting ports are saved. The abnormal winning number area for counting the number of winnings within a predetermined time for each is cleared to 0 (steps S914 to S916), and the process proceeds to step S917.
Then, after preparing the abnormal winning monitoring information of the corresponding switch for each of the left, right, and middle starting ports, the starting port abnormal winning monitoring process is performed (steps S917 to S922).

The abnormal winning monitoring information prepared in the process of preparing the abnormal winning monitoring information of the corresponding switch (steps S917, S919, S921) includes the following information.
-Bit data to monitor switch-on-Commands for which abnormal start port has not been awarded (commands are different for each start port)
・ Address of the start port abnormality winning monitoring area (the area is different for each start port)
In addition, the starting port abnormal winning monitoring area has an area for storing the following information.
・ Status indicating whether or not an abnormal prize has occurred (set for each starting port)
・ Number of prizes (counted for each starting point)
-Abnormal prize notification timer that manages the notification time when an abnormal prize occurs (independent timer for each start port)

Next, as a process of detecting an abnormality based on the duration of the detection state of the start port switch, after preparing the ball clogging monitoring information of the corresponding switch for each of the left, right, and middle start ports, the start port ball is clogged. A monitoring process is performed (steps S923 to S928).
The abnormal winning monitoring information prepared in the process of preparing the ball clogging monitoring information of the corresponding switch (steps S923, S925, S927) includes the following information.
-Bit data to monitor switch-on-Commands that have not been jammed at the start port (commands are different for each start port)
・ Address of start port ball clogging monitoring area (area is different for each start port)
In addition, the starting port ball clogging monitoring area has an area for storing the following information.
・ Status indicating whether or not a ball jam abnormality has occurred (set for each starting port)
-Switch-on monitoring timer that monitors the duration of the detection status at the start port switch (independent timer for each start port)
・ Ball jam error notification timer that manages the notification time when a ball jam error occurs (independent timer for each start port)

In the processes of steps S917 to S922 and the processes of steps S923 to S928, monitoring is performed in the order of left, right, and middle start port, and the priority order of error monitoring and notification is set in this order. Become.

[Starting port abnormal winning monitoring process]
Next, the start port abnormality winning monitoring process (steps S918, S920, S922) in the above-mentioned start port error monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this start port abnormality winning monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input in the target switch (step S931). Here, it is determined that there is an input when the rising edge of the target switch is detected.
If there is no input to the target switch (step S931; NO), the process proceeds to step S940.
When there is an input to the target switch (step S931; YES), the number of abnormal winnings at the target starting port is updated by +1 (step S932), and whether the number of abnormal winnings is less than the specified number (for example, 25). Determine (step S933).
The preset number is a number that cannot occur in a normal game, and if it exceeds this number, it is considered that some abnormality such as cheating has occurred.

If the number of abnormal winnings is less than the specified number (step S933; YES), that is, if the abnormal winnings are not yet recognized, the process proceeds to step S940.
If the number of abnormal winnings is not less than the specified number (step S933; NO), that is, if the number of winnings within the predetermined time exceeds the specified value and it is recognized that an abnormally large number of winnings have occurred, the target starting port A specified value is saved in the abnormal winning number area (step S934), and an initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the notification timer area (abnormal winning notification timer area) of the target start port (step S935).

Next, an abnormality winning command for the target start port is prepared (step S936), and it is determined whether or not the target abnormality is already occurring (step S937).
In the process of preparing the abnormal winning occurrence command of the target starting port, the target starting port prepared in the process of preparing the abnormal winning monitoring information of the corresponding switch in the starting port error monitoring process (steps S917, S919, S921). By generating an abnormal prize generation command using a command for which an abnormal prize has not occurred at the start port, an abnormal prize generation command for the target start port is prepared.
Further, in the determination of whether or not the target abnormality has already occurred (step S937), the status of the abnormality winning monitoring information of the corresponding switch is referred to, and if there is an abnormality flag (error flag), an abnormality has already occurred (starting port). (Abnormal winning is occurring) Judged as having.

If the target abnormality is already occurring (step S937; YES), the process proceeds to step S940.
If the target abnormality has not already occurred (step S937; NO), the abnormal status flag is saved in the target status area (step S938), the effect command setting process is performed (step S939), and the process proceeds to step S940. To do. In this case, an abnormal winning generation command for the target starting port is transmitted to the effect control device 300.
Based on the reception of this command, the effect control device 300 performs notification by display, voice, or the like.

After that, if the notification timer (abnormal winning notification timer) of the target start port is not 0, -1 is updated (step S940), and it is determined whether the notification timer is 0 (step S941).
If the notification timer is not 0 (step S941; NO), the start port abnormality winning monitoring process ends. In this case, the notification of abnormal winning will be continued.
When the notification timer is 0 (step S941; YES), it is determined whether or not the target abnormality is occurring (step S942).
When the target abnormality is not occurring (step S942; NO), the start port abnormality winning monitoring process ends. In this case, the notification of abnormal winning is not performed from the beginning.
If the target abnormality is occurring (step S942; YES), the normal status flag is saved in the target status area (step S943), the effect command setting process is performed (step S944), and the start port abnormality is won. End the monitoring process. In this case, the notification of the abnormal winning is finished, and the starting of the target starting port prepared in the process of preparing the abnormal winning monitoring information of the corresponding switch in the starting port error monitoring process (steps S917, S919, S921) is started. A command for which no abnormal mouth winning has occurred will be transmitted to the effect control device 300.
Based on the reception of this command, the effect control device 300 ends the notification by display, voice, or the like.

[Starting port ball clogging monitoring process]
Next, the start port ball clogging monitoring process (steps S924, S926, S928) in the above-mentioned start port error monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. 51.
In this start port ball clogging monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the target switch is on (step S951). Here, the port input status (level data) of the target switch is monitored to determine whether it is on. It should be noted that "on" means that it is in the detection state, and that a metallic object including the game ball exists in the detection region of the target switch.
When the target switch is not on (step S951; NO), the switch-on monitoring timer area of the target start port is cleared to 0 (step S960), and the process proceeds to step S961.
Since the switch-on monitoring timer is for measuring the duration of the state in which the target switch is on (detection state), it is cleared to 0 when the target switch is not on.
When the target switch is on (step S951; YES), the switch-on monitoring timer at the target start port is updated by +1 (step S952), and the value of the switch-on monitoring timer is less than the specified time (for example, 252 ms). (Step S953).
The preset predetermined time is a time that cannot occur in a normal game, and if it exceeds this, it is considered that some abnormality such as cheating has occurred.

If the value of the switch-on monitoring timer is less than the specified time (step S953; YES), the process proceeds to step S961. In this case, no abnormality has occurred.
If the value of the switch-on monitoring timer is not less than the specified time (step S953; NO), the specified time value is saved in the switch-on monitoring timer area of the target start port (step S954), and the target start port is notified. The initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the timer area (ball clogging abnormality notification timer area) (step S955).
After that, a command for generating a ball clogging at the target starting port is prepared (step S956), and it is determined whether or not the target ball clogging is already occurring (step S957).

In the process of preparing the ball clogging occurrence command of the target start port (step S956), the target prepared in the process of preparing the ball clogging monitoring information of the corresponding switch in the start port error monitoring process (steps S923, S925, S927). By generating a ball clogging occurrence command using a command in which the ball clogging of the starting port has not occurred, the ball clogging occurrence command of the target starting port is prepared.
Further, in the determination of whether or not the target ball jam is already occurring (step S957), the status of the ball jam monitoring information of the corresponding switch is referred to, and if there is an abnormal flag (error flag), the ball jam is already occurring (step S957). (Starting port ball clogging is occurring).

If the target ball is already clogged (step S957; YES), the process proceeds to step S961.
If the target ball is not clogged (step S957; NO), the abnormal flag is saved in the target status area (step S958), the effect command setting process is performed (step S959), and the process proceeds to step S961. Transition. In this case, the ball clogging occurrence command of the target start port is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

After that, if the notification timer (ball clogging abnormality notification timer) of the target start port is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step S961), and it is determined whether the notification timer is 0 (step S962).
If the notification timer is not 0 (step S962; NO), the start port ball clogging monitoring process ends. In this case, the notification of ball clogging will be continued.
When the notification timer is 0 (step S962; YES), it is determined whether or not the target ball is clogged (step S963).
When the target ball clogging is not occurring (step S963; NO), the start port ball clogging monitoring process is terminated. In this case, the ball jam is not notified from the beginning.
If the target ball is clogged (step S963; YES), the normal status flag is saved in the target status area (step S964), the effect command setting process is performed (step S965), and the starting ball is started. The clogging monitoring process is terminated. In this case, the notification of ball clogging ends, and the ball of the target start port prepared in the process of preparing the ball clogging monitoring information of the corresponding switch in the start port error monitoring process (steps S923, S925, S927). A command that has not been clogged will be transmitted to the effect control device 300.
From the above, the game control device 100 serves as an abnormality detecting means for detecting the occurrence of an abnormality based on the time during which the detection state continues by the detection sensor (starting port switch).

By this start port ball clogging monitoring process, if the detection state of the start port switch continues for a specified time or longer, it is determined that the ball is clogged.
When the detection state continues for a specified time or longer in this way, the game ball may stay at the position of the start port switch due to the actual clogging of the game ball, or it may be due to fraudulent activity.
Examples of such cheating include cheating by a thread fishing ball.

When a game ball wins a starting port (for example, the first starting winning opening 33a) in a normal game that is not a fraudulent act, the game ball falling from above the starting opening flows into the starting opening.
At the time of this winning, the start port switch is in the on state (detection state) for the period during which the game ball passes through the start port switch (for example, the left start port switch 105).
The duration of the start port switch on state varies depending on the inflow mode of the game ball, such as whether or not the game ball touches the nail, but the above-mentioned specified time regarded as ball clogging is not a cheating in a normal game. It is considered to be longer than the on-time expected when the game ball wins a prize at the starting port, which is a time that cannot occur in a normal game that is not a cheating.

In the fraudulent act by the thread fishing ball, a person who commits the fraudulent act by invading the game area 32 with a game ball with a thread (a metallic object that can detect the start port switch is not required) By operating the thread to move the game ball up and down and repeating the state where the game ball is above the start port and the state where the game ball is inside the start port, the start port switch is illegally turned on. Is.
The start port switch is turned on when the game ball is lowered from above the start port into the start port, and is also turned on when the game ball is pulled up from the start port to above the start port.

In such an operation of the thread fishing ball, the thread is carefully pulled to prevent the game ball from coming off from the vicinity of the starting port when the game ball is raised, and the distance at which the game ball is dropped when the game ball is lowered. Due to a short period of time, the game ball stays at the position detected by the start port switch for a long time, and the on state of the start port switch continues for a long time that cannot occur in a normal game. May become.
In the start port ball clogging monitoring process, it is possible to detect a fraudulent act such as a thread fishing ball by detecting that the detection state has continued for a specified time or longer with the start port switch in this way.
In addition, the start port abnormality winning monitoring process determines that an abnormality occurs when a large number of winnings, which cannot occur in a normal game, are detected. For example, in a fraudulent act such as a thread fishing ball in which the start port switch is turned on illegally, it is possible to detect a large number of prizes that cannot occur in normal games, and even by the start port abnormal prize monitoring process. It is possible to detect cheating such as a thread fishing ball.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned specified time, which is regarded as a ball jam in the start port ball clogging monitoring process, is a time that cannot occur in a normal game that is not a fraudulent act, but it rarely occurs in a normal game. The time may be set, and in this case, when the specified time is exceeded a plurality of times in a certain period, it is determined that the ball is jammed.
In addition, the time that cannot occur in a normal game is set as the first specified time, the time that rarely occurs in a normal game is set as the second specified time, and the first specified time is immediately illegal if it exceeds this. If the second specified time is exceeded a plurality of times in a certain period, it may be determined that the time is illegal.
In addition, the specified time is a long time that cannot occur in a normal game that is not cheating, but it may be a short time that cannot occur in a normal game that is not cheating, and the time during which the on state continues. May be determined as abnormal based on the fact that is not within a predetermined range.

In addition, the above-mentioned specified number, which is regarded as abnormal in the start port abnormality winning monitoring process, is the number of times that cannot occur in normal games that are not cheating, but the number of times that rarely occurs in normal games. In this case, when the specified value is exceeded multiple times in a certain period, it is determined as abnormal.
In addition, the number of times that cannot occur in a normal game is set as the first specified value, the number of times that rarely occurs in a normal game is set as the second specified value, and the first specified value is immediately illegal if it exceeds this value. If the second specified value is exceeded a plurality of times in a certain period, it may be determined that the value is invalid.

Further, by attaching the start port switch to the upper end of the start port or the vicinity of the upper end (for example, a region within the radius of the game ball downward from the upper end of the start port), the game ball 57 starts when the thread fishing ball is pulled up. If the ball can be easily removed from the mouth, it will be easier to pull it up more carefully, which will make it easier to exceed the specified time, and it will be easier to detect fraudulent activity by the thread fishing ball.

From the above, the detection sensor (left start port switch 105, right start port switch 106, middle start port switch 107) that is in the detection state due to the presence of a metallic object including the game ball launches the game ball. In a gaming machine that is prepared for the game area 32 and can give a predetermined game value to a player based on the detection sensor being in the detection state, an abnormality that detects the occurrence of an abnormality based on the duration of the detection state by the detection sensor A detection means (game control device 100) will be provided. Therefore, the detection sensor used for the game can detect the abnormality of the game machine.
Further, the abnormality detecting means determines that the abnormality has occurred when the time during which the detection state continues by the detection sensor is not within the predetermined time range. Therefore, the detection sensor used for the game can detect the abnormality of the game machine.

[Game machine status check process]
Next, the game machine state check process (step S220, step S222, S225) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. 52.
In the game machine status check process, first, it corresponds to a status scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among a plurality of switches and signals to be monitored for the game machine status to be monitored this time. Acquire the status monitoring table to be performed (step S281).
Here, the information defined in the game machine status monitoring table prepared by the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is as follows.
-Lower address of the start address of the status monitoring area-Port input of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored Lower address of the status area-Mask data that extracts only the bits of the target signal-Signal on judgment data-Status Off command (in the case of an error system, the meaning of the command to end error notification)
-Status on command (in the case of an error system, the meaning of the command to start error notification)
-Status off monitoring timer comparison value-Status on monitoring timer comparison value

Next, the state of the target signal acquired this time is checked, and it is determined whether the signal to be monitored is on, that is, whether there is a change in the game machine state (step S282).
Then, when the signal is not on (step S282: NO), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step S283).
Here, the state off flag prepared in step S283 will be described. As the state indicated by the state off flag, the error system is a non-error (normal) state. On the other hand, as for the state indicated by the state off flag, the touch switch is the state in which it is not touched.
Next, the target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S284). After that, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S285), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S289).

On the other hand, when the target signal is on (step S282: YES), there is a possibility that an error has occurred, so a state on flag is prepared as a state flag (step S286). For example, as one of the errors defined in the game machine status monitoring table, in the case of a shot ball out, the shoot ball out switch (not shown) indicates that the chute that supplies the game ball to the storage tank does not have a game ball. When it is detected and turned on, step S282 becomes YES. If YES, the state on flag is prepared in step S286.
Here, the state-on flag prepared in step S286 will be described. As the state indicated by the state-on flag, the error system is an error (abnormal, invalid) state. On the other hand, as for the state indicated by the state on flag, the touch switch is the state of the touching person.
Next, the target state on command is acquired and prepared (step S287). After that, the target state-on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S288), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S289).

When the value of the target signal control area and the state of the current signal match (step S289; YES), that is, when the state of the signal has not changed, in order to determine the timer of whether or not the error treatment is necessary. The target status monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S292), and it is determined whether the value of the target status monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (reference value for determining that an error needs to be taken) (step S293). ).
On the other hand, when the value of the target signal control area and the state of the current signal do not match (step S289; NO), that is, when the state of the signal changes, it is determined that the error treatment is not yet necessary and the target signal The current signal state is saved in the control area (step S290), the target state monitoring timer is cleared (step S291), the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S292), and the target state monitoring timer is updated. It is determined whether or not the value of has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S293).

If the value of the target status monitoring timer does not reach the monitoring timer comparison value (step S293; NO), the game machine status check process ends. When the value of the target status monitoring timer reaches the monitoring timer comparison value (step S293: YES), the status monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of the comparison value -1 (step S294). The state flag is compared with the value of the target state flag area (step S295).
Here, when it is determined in step S293 that the target state monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value, it is considered that the error occurrence or cancellation state has been determined. However, there are also situations where it is determined that the condition for error occurrence is satisfied again when the error has already occurred, or that the condition for canceling the error is satisfied again when the error is not occurring. Therefore, after the process of step S294, in step S295, by comparing the prepared state flag with the value of the target state flag area, it is checked whether the error state confirmed this time is the same as the state of the current error flag. I am doing it.

Then, when the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area match (step S295; YES), it means that the error status has not changed, so it is determined that no action is necessary, and the game is played. The machine status check process ends. If the set state flag and the value of the target state flag area do not match (if the state flags are not the same) (step S29; NO), it means that the state has changed to a new error state. The state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S296), and the process proceeds to step S297. That is, the value of the target state flag area is changed to that of the state state determined this time, and the process proceeds to step S297. In step S297, the effect command setting process is performed, and the effect command corresponding to the game machine state confirmed this time is set.
In this step S297, either the state off command prepared in step S284 or the state on command prepared in step S287 is transmitted. As a result, a measure corresponding to the current game machine state is performed. For example, if the shot ball is out, the game machine state display for notifying the shot ball is notified or the notification is canceled. After step S297, the game machine status check process is completed.
In this way, if a change occurs in the game machine state, a corresponding state flag is set to prepare an action command, and if the change in the game machine state is resolved, the corresponding state flag is cleared and a resolution command is issued. Is set. In particular, in this game machine state check process, not only the change in the game machine state is monitored, but also the release is also monitored, so that the process is common.

It should be noted that such a game machine state check process is the same for changes in the game machine state such as opening the glass frame and opening the front frame.
In addition, the above-mentioned command for notifying various game machine states (especially when it is turned on (occurs)) is effective for the player and the person in charge of the hall if it is made different for each game machine state to be monitored. However, if there is no need to specify the type of state and there is no problem even if the notification modes are common, a common command may be used.
For example, if a dedicated notification start command is prepared for a shot ball running out, it is possible to notify "there is no ball in the tank!" By voice or a message on the screen. Similarly, if the glass frame is open, it is possible to notify that "the glass frame is open!".
If it is acceptable to use the common notification mode of lighting the frame decoration device 12 in red by notifying by voice that "an abnormality has occurred!" When the shoot ball is broken and the glass frame is opened, it is a common command. By preparing an "abnormality notification start command", the processing load on the effect control device 300 can be reduced, and the information display 45 using the liquid crystal as in the first embodiment of the present invention and its modified examples. It can be used in common between game machines that have different message display capabilities depending on the presence or absence, or even if it is necessary to monitor a new type of error or game machine status, the control program of the production control device or voice ROM 327. There is an advantage that there is no need to change the data of.
The game machine state and the type of error to which the common "abnormality notification start command" and "abnormality notification end command" are applied are not limited to those described above. Any command may be used as a common notification mode between different game machines.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
Next, the payout busy signal check process (step S226) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. 53.
In the payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is on (step S301). As described above, since the status scan counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3, the payout busy signal check process is executed once every four times, and for example, the payout busy signal is monitored (checked) at a cycle of 16 ms. Will be done.
If the payout busy signal is not on (step S301; NO), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S302), and then an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S303). For example, 32 ms is set as the off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value. After passing through step S303, the process proceeds to step S304.
On the other hand, if the payout busy signal is on in step S301 (step S301; YES), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S305), and then an on confirmation monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S306). .. For example, 32 ms is set as the on-determination monitoring timer comparison value. After passing through step S306, the process proceeds to step S304.

Proceeding from step S303 or step S306 to step S304, in step S304, the value in the busy signal state region is compared with the state of the current signal, and it is determined whether they are the same. This is to check whether the same game machine state continues for a plurality of interrupts.
The value in the busy signal state region is compared with the state of the current signal, and if they are not the same (step S304; NO), the state of the current signal is saved in the busy signal state region (step S307). In this case, if the value in the busy signal state region and the current signal state are not the same, it means that the busy signal state has changed, for example, a change from an idle state to a busy state, or a change from a busy state to an idle state. There is a change in.
Next, the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0. This is to prepare for the next change in the busy signal. Next, the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S309).
On the other hand, in step S304, the value in the busy signal state region and the current signal state are compared, and if they are the same (step S304; YES), the process jumps to step S309 and the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S309). ).

After step S309, it is subsequently determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (reference value for determining that an error is required) (step S310).
Here, when it is determined in step S310 that the busy signal monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value, it is considered that the busy signal state has been determined. However, there may be a situation where the busy signal state is fixed when the busy signal state has already changed, or the busy signal state is fixed when the busy signal has not changed. In step S311, the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 to keep the value of the comparison value -1, and in step S312, the prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area.
If the value of the busy signal monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S3103; NO), the payout busy signal check process ends.
When the value of the busy signal monitoring timer reaches the comparison value of the monitoring timer (step S310: YES), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 to keep the value of the comparison value -1 (step S311), and preparations are made. The status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S312). After step S312, the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

[Residual ball monitoring process]
Next, the details of the remaining ball monitoring process (step S68) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 54.
The remaining ball monitoring process monitors whether or not the game ball that has won the variable winning device 35 has escaped to the outside and remains inside the variable winning device 35.
In the remaining ball monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the discharge port switch 1 (first remaining ball discharge port switch 112) (step S321). The first remaining ball discharge port switch 112 detects a game ball that has flowed into the discharge flow path of the variable winning device 35, and has a function of detecting whether or not the game ball that has flowed into the discharge flow path remains. Have. Therefore, input to the first residual ball discharge port switch 112 means that the game ball is discharged to the outside from the discharge flow path, and the first residual ball discharge port switch 112 detects the discharge and the signal is turned on. The input of the detection signal is in the game control device 100.
That is, it is a state in which it is detected that the game ball is discharged to the outside from the discharge flow path in the variable winning device 35 by the first remaining ball discharge port switch 112.

When it is determined that there is an input to the first remaining ball discharge port switch 112 (step S321; YES), if the remaining ball counter is not “0”, the remaining ball counter is updated to “-1” (step S322). The remaining ball counter counts the number of game balls that have flowed into the variable winning device 35 when they remain inside the variable winning device 35.
By repeating this routine, the remaining sphere counter is updated by "-1" until the remaining sphere counter becomes "0". Then, when the remaining ball counter becomes "0" including the input monitoring of the detection signal from the first remaining ball discharge port switch 112 and the second remaining ball discharge port switch 113 described later, the inside of the variable winning device 35 is entered. There are no remaining balls.
Here, when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened by the establishment of the starting condition and the game ball flows into the variable winning device 35, the flowing game ball is the left large winning opening switch 103 or the right large winning opening. Since it is always detected by any of the switches 104, the detection signal from the left grand prize opening switch 103 or the right grand prize opening switch 104 is input to the game control device 100, and then the first remaining ball outlet switch. If it is not detected by the 112 or the second remaining ball discharge port switch 113 that the game ball is discharged from the variable winning device 35, it can be determined that the remaining ball remains inside the variable winning device 35. The remaining ball counter counts the number of game balls (remaining balls) remaining inside the variable winning device 35 according to the theory as described above. Therefore, when the remaining ball counter = 0, the remaining ball does not stay inside the variable winning device 35.

After passing through step S322, the process proceeds to step S323. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no input to the first remaining ball discharge port switch 112 (step S321; NO), the process jumps to step S323 without updating the remaining ball counter by -1.
Proceeding to step S323, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the discharge port switch 2 (second residual ball discharge port switch 113) (step S323). The second remaining ball outlet switch 113 is arranged below the determination device 80 in the variable winning device 35, and is a switch for detecting that the game ball has come out from the variable winning device 35, and is a switch for detecting that the game ball has come out from the variable winning device 35. It has a function to detect whether or not the game balls that have flowed into the switch remain. Therefore, input to the second remaining ball discharge port switch 113 means that the game ball is discharged to the outside from the determination device 80, and the second remaining ball discharge port switch 113 detects the discharge and the signal is turned on. The input of the detection signal is in the game control device 100.
That is, it is a state in which it is detected that the game ball is discharged from the determination device 80 to the outside by the second remaining ball discharge port switch 113.

When it is determined that there is an input to the second remaining ball discharge port switch 113 (step S323; YES), if the remaining ball counter is not “0”, the remaining ball counter is updated to “-1” (step S324). As described above, the remaining ball counter is repeatedly updated to "-1", and the remaining ball counter is changed to "-1" by the input monitoring of the detection signals from the first remaining ball discharge port switch 112 and the second remaining ball discharge port switch 113. When it becomes "0", there is no remaining ball inside the variable winning device 35.
After passing through step S324, the process proceeds to step S325. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no input to the second remaining ball discharge port switch 113 (step S323; NO), the process jumps to step S325 without updating the remaining ball counter to "-1".
Next, in step S325, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the left large winning opening switch 103. The left large winning opening switch 103 detects a game ball flowing into the variable winning device 35. Therefore, the left large winning opening switch 103 has a function of detecting the inflow of the game ball into the variable winning device 35. When it is determined that there is an input to the left large winning opening switch 103 (step S325; YES), the remaining ball counter is updated by "+1" (step S326). This is because it was detected by the left large winning opening switch 103 that the game ball flowed into the variable winning device 35, so that the game ball staying inside the variable winning device 35 is regarded as the remaining ball and counted by the remaining ball counter. , The remaining ball counter is counted up by "+1".

After passing through step S326, the process proceeds to step S327. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no input to the left large winning opening switch 103 (step S325; NO), the game jumps to step S327 without updating the remaining ball counter by "+1".
Next, in step S327, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the right large winning opening switch 104. Similarly, the right large winning opening switch 104 also detects the game ball flowing into the variable winning device 35. Therefore, the right large winning opening switch 104 has a function of detecting the inflow of the game ball into the variable winning device 35. When it is determined that there is an input to the right large winning opening switch 104 (step S327; YES), the remaining ball counter is updated by "+1" (step S328). This is because it is detected that the game ball has flowed into the variable winning device 35 by the right large winning opening switch 104, so that the game ball staying inside the variable winning device 35 is regarded as the remaining ball and counted by the remaining ball counter. , The remaining ball counter is counted up by "+1".

After passing through step S328, the process proceeds to step S329. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no input to the right large winning opening switch 104 (step S327; NO), the game jumps to step S329 without updating the remaining ball counter by "+1".
Next, in step S329, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball counter is "0". This is because by repeating this routine, the remaining sphere counter is updated by "-1" until the remaining sphere counter becomes "0" as described later, so that the remaining sphere counter is "0", that is, This is for determining whether or not there is no remaining ball inside the variable winning device 35.
If the remaining ball counter is not "0" (step S329; NO), it is determined whether or not a remaining ball error is occurring (step S330). The remaining ball error is a state in which an error that the remaining ball stays inside the variable winning device 35 has occurred.
The process of step S330 is performed in step S329 when the remaining ball counter is not "0" for the first time, and there is a possibility that a remaining ball error has occurred. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S330 and the previous routine is performed. It is for determining whether or not a remaining ball error has already occurred by.
Then, if a remaining ball error is occurring (step S330; YES), it is determined that a remaining ball error has already occurred by the previous routine, and the routine is terminated and returned. At this time, this routine is repeated until the determination in step S329 becomes YES, and when the determination in step S329 becomes YES, the process branches to step S336.

On the other hand, if the remaining ball error is not occurring (step S330; NO), the remaining ball counter first becomes a routine that is not "0", and there is a possibility that a remaining ball error has occurred, so the process proceeds to step S331. Updates the remaining ball monitoring timer to "-1" (step S331). This is because a game ball that plays a game inside the variable winning device 35 is normally quickly discharged from the variable winning device 35 within a predetermined period, but for example, some member and the inside of the variable winning device 35. Since there is a possibility that one or more game balls may stay in contact with the wall surface in a situation where they are pinched by contact with each other, the elapsed ball monitoring timer measures the passage of a predetermined period. For example, when the remaining sphere counter is not "0", even if this routine is repeated and the lapse of a predetermined period is measured by the remaining sphere monitoring timer, the remaining sphere counter is still not "0". If there is, it will be judged that there is a remaining ball.

Next, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball monitoring timer has become "0" (step S332), and if the remaining ball monitoring timer has not become "0" (step S332; NO), it returns and repeats this routine. .. Then, when the remaining ball monitoring timer becomes "0" (step S332; YES), it is determined that a remaining ball error has occurred, a remaining ball error occurring flag is prepared (step S333), and the remaining ball is left. Prepare an error occurrence command (step S334). After passing through step S334, the process proceeds to step S335.
On the other hand, if the remaining ball counter is "0" (step S329; YES), it is determined that the remaining balls are exhausted, the jump is made to step S336, the remaining ball error canceling flag is prepared (step S336), and the remaining balls are left. Prepare an error release command (step S337). After that, the process proceeds to step S335.

Next, when the process proceeds to step S335, it is determined whether or not the prepared state flag is the same as the value of the remaining sphere error flag area. If the prepared state flag is the same as the value of the remaining ball error flag area (step S335; YES), it is determined that the state flag has not changed from the previous state flag, and the routine is terminated and returned.
On the other hand, if the prepared state flag is not the same as the value of the remaining ball error flag area (step S335; NO), it is determined that the current state flag has changed from the previous time, and the state flag prepared this time is set to the remaining ball error flag area. In addition to saving to (step S338), the effect command setting process is performed (step S339). By the effect command setting process, the residual ball error generation command set in step S334 and the residual ball error release command set in step S337 are sent to the effect control device 300. After step S339, the routine ends and returns.

In this way, when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened by the establishment of the starting condition and the game ball flows into the variable winning device 35, the flowing game ball is the left grand prize opening switch 103 or the right grand prize. After being detected by any of the mouth switches 104 and input of a detection signal from the left grand prize opening switch 103 or the right grand prize opening switch 104 to the game control device 100, after that, the first remaining ball discharge port switch If it is not detected by 112 or the second remaining ball discharge port switch 113 that the game ball is discharged from the variable winning device 35, it is determined that the remaining ball remains inside the variable winning device 35, and a residual ball error occurs. When the command is sent to the effect control device 300, as shown in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 40), the special figure game is not performed during the error operation. Further, when the remaining balls are exhausted and the remaining ball error release command is sent to the effect control device 300, the game (special figure game) is restarted.

[Game stop error processing]
Next, the details of the game stop error processing (step S69) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. 55.
In the game stop error processing, first, it is determined whether or not the error is being released (step S348). If it is not waiting for error cancellation (step S348; NO), it is determined whether or not error operation is in progress (step S349). If no error operation is in progress (step S349; NO), it is determined that there is no error operation, the routine is terminated, and the process returns. Therefore, if the error is not waiting for cancellation and the error operation is not in progress, no error occurs and the game is continued.
On the other hand, if the error operation is in progress (step S349; YES), the game stop error control timer is updated to "-1" (step S350). Next, it is determined whether or not the game stop error control timer has become "0" (step S351). The game stop error control timer is for counting a certain period of time because the game is stopped for a certain period of time when an error occurs in the game machine (pachinko machine 1).

Next, if the game stop error control timer is not "0" (step S351; NO), the game returns and the routine is repeated. Then, when the game stop error control timer becomes “0” (step S351; YES), the error release waiting flag is saved in the game stop error state area (step S352).
After that, it is determined whether the customer waiting demo is in progress (step S353), and if the customer waiting demo is in progress (step S353; YES), the customer waiting demo command is prepared (step S354), and the production command setting process is performed. (Step S355), the process proceeds to step S356. If the customer waiting demonstration is not in progress (step S353; NO), the process proceeds to step S356.

Next, the game stop error release waiting command is prepared (step S356), and the effect command setting process is performed (step S357). By the effect command setting process, the game stop error release wait command prepared in step S356 described above is sent to the effect control device 300. After step S357, the routine ends and returns.
On the other hand, if the error is waiting to be cleared (step S351; YES), the process branches to step S358. Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the RAM initialization switch 127 (step S358). This is to determine whether the RAM initialization switch 127 has been operated to clear the error.
If there is no input to the RAM initialization switch 127 (step S358; NO), the routine ends and returns. If there is an input to the RAM initialization switch 127 (step S358; YES), the game stop error release command is prepared (step S359), and the effect command setting process is performed (step S360). By the effect command setting process, the game stop error release command prepared in step S359 described above is sent to the effect control device 300.

Next, the releasing flag is saved in the abnormal discharge flag area (step S361), and the abnormal discharge counter area is cleared to "0" (step S362). Abnormal discharge is an abnormality in which a larger number of game balls than the number of game balls flowing into the variable winning device 35 is discharged from the variable winning device 35. That is, instead of flowing in through the regular route, for example, with the glass frame 5 open, the illegal discharge is such that the game ball is directly inserted by hand from the front of the accessory device 51 or the determination device 80. In order to monitor this, an abnormal discharge counter area and a flag for releasing abnormal discharge are provided. Therefore, when the RAM initialization switch 127 is operated, the releasing flag related to abnormal discharge is saved and the abnormal discharge counter area is cleared to "0" to prepare for the next game stop error.
Next, the releasing flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step S363), and the magnet fraud monitoring timer area is cleared to "0" (step S364). Magnet fraud is detected, for example, by the magnetic sensor 115. As a result, when the RAM initialization switch 127 is operated, the releasing flag related to magnet fraud is saved and the magnet fraud monitoring timer area is cleared to "0", resulting in a game stop error due to the next magnet fraud. Be prepared.
Next, the releasing flag is saved in the vibration fraud flag area (step S365), and the vibration fraud monitoring invalid timer area is cleared to "0" (step S366). Vibration fraud is detected by, for example, the vibration sensor 116. As a result, when the RAM initialization switch 127 is operated, the releasing flag related to vibration fraud is saved and the vibration fraud monitoring invalid timer area is cleared to "0", resulting in a game stop error due to the next vibration fraud. Be prepared for.

Next, the releasing flag is saved in the board radio wave invalid flag area (step S367), and the normal flag is saved in the game stop error flag area (step S368). The board radio wave fraud is detected by, for example, the board radio wave sensor 114. As a result, when the RAM initialization switch 127 is operated, the releasing flag and the normal flag regarding radio wave fraud are saved, in preparation for a game stop error due to the next radio wave fraud. After step S368, the routine ends and returns.
In this way, in the game stop error processing, when there is an error that stops the game (such as a malicious one such as radio wave fraud, magnet fraud, vibration fraud, abnormal discharge, etc.), the game is stopped while the error is canceled. In order to do so, it is monitored whether there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 127, and the error release flag is saved to prepare for the next error.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (step S72) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 56. In the special figure game processing, the input of the left start port switch 105, the right start port switch 106, the middle start port switch 107, the left special winning opening switch 103, the right winning opening switch 104, and the specific area switches 80a to 80d is monitored. Controls the entire process related to the special figure fluctuation game, etc., and sets the display of the special figure.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the special figure game process, first, the start port switch monitoring process is performed (step S371). In the start port switch monitoring process, the left start port switch 105, the right start port switch 106, and the middle start port switch 107 are monitored for winning, and when there is a start prize for the game ball, a special symbol random number is extracted. Then, the game result pre-determination is performed to determine the game result based on the prize in advance at the stage before the start of the special figure variation game based on the prize.
Next, the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step S372) is performed. In this big winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the left winning opening switch 103 and the right winning opening switch 104 provided in the variable winning device 35 is performed.
Next, the specific area switch monitoring process (step S373) is performed. In this specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switches 80a to 80d provided in the determination device 80 of the variable winning device 35 is monitored, and the effect command is set.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step S374). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step S375). When the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step S375; YES), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, refer to it in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number. The special figure game sequence branch table is set in the register (step S376), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step S377). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step S378).

If the special figure game processing number is "0" in step S378, the power-on operation processing is performed (step S379). In the power-on operation process, the accessory motor (drum accessory motor 66, V movable accessory motor 73) in the accessory device 51 and the accessory motor (round lottery accessory motor 88) in the determination device 80 are initially set as the power is turned on. Perform processing such as returning to the position so that the game can be started.
In step S378, when the special figure game processing number is "1", the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation game is monitored, and the fluctuation start setting and effect setting of the special figure fluctuation game, and the special figure fluctuation processing are performed. A special figure normal process (step S380) for setting information necessary for the operation is performed.
In step S378, when the special figure game processing number is "2", the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, and the like. (Step S381) is performed.

In step S378, when the special figure game processing number is "3", the special figure display processing for setting the information necessary for performing the small hit opening operation corresponding to the game result of the special figure fluctuation game ( Step S382) is performed.
In step S378, when the special figure game processing number is "4", the small hit opening process (step S383) for executing the setting process related to the opening of the large winning opening in the small hit is performed.
In step S378, when the special figure game processing number is "5", the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening (referring to the variable winning device 35; the same applies hereinafter) during the small hit medium processing are discharged. The small hit remaining ball processing (step S384) for setting the processing for setting the time for the game, setting the information necessary for performing the small hit end processing, and the like is performed.
In step S378, when the special figure game processing number is "6", the small hit end processing (step S385) for ending the small hit and setting the information necessary for performing fanfare / interval processing is performed. ..
In step S378, when the special figure game processing number is "7", it is necessary to perform processing related to fanfare / interval such as setting the opening information of the large winning opening and the opening time value of the large winning opening corresponding to the number of rounds. Performs fanfare / interval processing (step S386) for executing information setting and the like.

In step S378, when the special figure game processing number is "8", the interval command is set if the jackpot round is not the final round, while the ending command is set or the jackpot end processing is performed if the jackpot round is the final round. The large winning opening opening processing (step S387), which performs processing for setting necessary information for the purpose, is performed.
In step S378, when the special figure game processing number is "9", a process for forcibly terminating the period for waiting for the remaining balls in the large winning opening (the large winning opening remaining ball processing period) is performed. , Fanfare / Performs the large winning opening residual ball processing (step S388) that performs processing such as setting information necessary for performing processing during the interval.
In step S378, when the special figure game processing number is "10", the jackpot end process (step S389) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing a table (special figure 1 fluctuation control table) for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the batch display device 50 (step S390), the symbol fluctuation control process according to the special figure 1 of the batch display device 50 (step S390). Step S391) is performed. Next, after preparing a table (special figure 2 fluctuation control table) for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the batch display device 50 (step S392), the symbol fluctuation control process according to the special figure 2 of the batch display device 50 (step S392). Step S393) is performed. Next, the accessory solenoid control process is performed (step S393), and the special figure game process is completed. The accessory solenoid control process controls the floor accessory Solenoid 61b1 for driving the rear end side of the floor portion 61 in the accessory device 51 up and down, and provides information advantageous to the player (floor portion) such as lamp notification. Information that teaches the timing when the gap between the 61 and the drum accessory 62 becomes smaller than the diameter of the game ball) is produced.
On the other hand, in step S375, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step S375; NO), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step S390, and subsequent processing is performed. Do.

Here, the small hit is the opening of the large winning opening (variable winning device 35) when a winning entry is made in the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening 33a, 33b, all the starting winning openings of the second starting winning opening 34). This is the operation from the opening of the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35) until the game ball passes through the specific region and wins a V prize. However, if the V prize is not won, all the opening operations are completed and the small hit ending time elapses.
Therefore, all the (lottery) results of the special figure variation display game are small hits. Per 5R and per 8R do not mean small hits, but indicate the types of big hits.
The small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (V winning, that is, the passing of the game ball to a specific area) in the special figure fluctuation game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 35 as an electric accessory is set (the accessory continuous operation device is operated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step S371) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 57.
As shown in FIG. 57, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, a left start port (first start winning port 33a) winning monitoring table is prepared (step S401), and a hard random number acquisition process (step S402) is performed. It is determined whether or not there is a prize in the first start winning opening 33a (step S403).
If it is determined in step S403 that there is no winning in the first starting winning opening 33a (step S403; NO), the process proceeds to step S405, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S403 that there is a prize in the first start winning opening 33a (step S403; YES), the special figure 1 starting opening switch process is performed (step S404). The special figure 1 start port switch process is to perform processing related to the start winning such as extraction of the special symbol symbol random number in association with the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 33a. After passing through step S404, the process proceeds to step S405.
Since the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is not provided with a so-called normal train or a normal train, there is no general train support for the starting prize.

When the process proceeds to step S405, the same process as the above-described process for monitoring the winning of the first starting winning opening 33a is sequentially executed for the first starting winning opening 33b (right starting opening).
That is, whether or not there is a prize in the first start winning opening 33b by preparing the right starting opening (first starting winning opening 33b) winning monitoring table (step S405) and performing the hard random number acquisition process (step S406). Is determined (step S407).
If it is determined in step S407 that there is no winning in the first starting winning opening 33b (step S407; NO), the process proceeds to step S409, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S407 that the first start winning opening 33b has been won (step S407; YES), the special figure 1 starting opening switch process is performed (step S408). FIG. 1 The start port switch process is the same process as in step S404 described above. After passing through step S408, the process proceeds to step S409.

Proceeding to step S409, the same process as the above-described process for monitoring the winning of the first starting winning opening 33a is sequentially executed for the second starting winning opening 34 (middle starting opening).
That is, whether or not there is a prize in the second start winning opening 34 by preparing the middle starting opening (second starting winning opening 34) winning monitoring table (step S409) and performing the hard random number acquisition process (step S410). Is determined (step S411).
If it is determined in step S411 that there is no winning in the second starting winning opening 34 (step S411; NO), the starting opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S411 that there is a prize in the second start winning opening 34 (step S411; YES), the special figure 2 starting opening switch process is performed (step S412). The special figure 2 start opening switch process is to perform processing related to the start winning such as extraction of the special symbol symbol random number in association with the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 34. When step S412 is passed, the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps S402, S406, S410) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. 58.
As shown in FIG. 58, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, among the first starting winning openings (left starting opening, right starting opening) 33a and 33b and the second starting winning opening (middle starting opening) 34, the monitoring target The non-winning information of the starting port is set (step S421), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the monitoring target starting port switch among the first starting winning opening 33a, 33b and the second starting winning opening 34 (step S421). Step S422). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A422; NO), the hard random number acquisition process ends.
On the other hand, when there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step S422; YES), the random number latch register status is read (step S423), and it is determined whether or not the target random number latch register has latch data (step S424). ..

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step S424; NO), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends.
On the other hand, when there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step S424; YES), the variation pattern random number extracted in the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step S425). The variation pattern random number is a random number that determines how the special figure variation is displayed on the batch display device 50. Next, among the first start winning openings 33a and 33b and the second starting winning opening 34, the winning information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step S426), and the hard random number acquisition process is completed.

[Special figure 1 Start port switch processing]
Next, the details of the special start port switch process (steps S404 and S408) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. 59. The special figure 1 start port switch process is a process that is commonly performed for each of the inputs to the first start winning openings (left start port, right start port) 33a and 33b.

As shown in FIG. 59, in the special drawing 1 start port switch passing process, first, among the first start winning openings (left start opening, right start opening) 33a and 33b, the number of times the winning start port switch to be monitored is won. The number of times the start port 1 signal is output, which is the number of times the information related to is output to the external management device of the pachinko machine 1, is loaded (step S431), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step S432), and the number of outputs Determines whether to overflow (step S433).
If the number of outputs does not overflow (step S433; NO), the updated value is saved in the RWM start port 1 signal output count area (step S434), and the process proceeds to step S435. On the other hand, when the number of output times overflows (step S433; YES), the process proceeds to step S435.
In this embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port 1 signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by updating "+1", and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows. Therefore, if the value loaded by looping becomes "0", it is determined that the number of outputs overflows, and the game is not saved.

When the process proceeds to step S435, it is determined whether or not the process is normally in progress, and if the process is not normally in progress (step S435; NO), the special figure 1 start port switch process is terminated. During normal processing, it monitors the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation game, sets the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation game, sets the effect, sets the information necessary for processing during the special figure variation, waits for customers, etc. It is carried out.
On the other hand, if the process is normally in progress (step S435; YES), it is determined whether or not there is a hold in the special figure 2 (step S436).
Here, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the second start winning opening 34 (second starting opening), only one special figure is held (holding of the special figure 2). On the other hand, when the game ball wins in the first starting winning openings 33a and 33b (first starting opening), the special drawing is not held (the special drawing 1 is not held). Then, only for the special figure 2, the hold display of the special figure is performed only for one piece.

If there is a hold in the special figure 2 (step S436; YES), the special figure 1 start port switch process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is no hold in FIG. 2 (step S436; NO), it is determined whether or not the remaining sphere counter is “0” (step S437). The remaining ball counter counts the number of game balls that have flowed into the variable winning device 35 when they remain inside the variable winning device 35.
If the remaining ball counter is not “0” (step S437; NO), the special figure 1 start port switch process is terminated. On the other hand, if the remaining ball counter is "0" (step S437; YES), it is determined whether or not there is a special figure 1 start opening winning flag (step S438). The special figure 1 start opening winning flag is set (set) by winning a prize in any one of the first starting winning openings (left starting opening, right starting opening) 33a and 33b. In step S438, the special figure 1 start opening winning flag is determined by starting one of the first starting winning openings (left starting opening and right starting opening) 33a and 33b. This is to determine whether or not a game ball has already won a prize at the winning opening.

If there is a special figure 1 start opening winning flag (step S438; YES), a game ball has already won a prize in any one of the first starting winning openings (left starting opening, right starting opening) 33a and 33b. Since it is determined that the special figure 1 start opening winning flag is set and it is not necessary to set the special drawing 1 starting opening winning flag again, the special drawing 1 starting opening switch processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if there is no special figure 1 start opening winning flag (step S438; NO), it is necessary to set the special drawing 1 starting opening winning flag in association with this start winning, so the process proceeds to step S439 and the special drawing 1 start. Set the mouth winning flag.
Next, the variation pattern random number prepared in step S425 in the above-mentioned hard random number acquisition process is saved in the special figure 1 variation pattern random number storage area of RWM (step S440). The variation pattern random number is a random number that determines how to display the special figure variation on the batch display device 50. Next, the special symbol random number is extracted (step S441), and the extracted special symbol random number is saved in the special symbol 1 symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step S442). When step S442 is passed, the special figure 1 start port switch process is completed.

[Special figure 2 Start port switch processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 start port switch process (step S412) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. 60. The special figure 2 start port switch process is a process performed when there is an input to the second start winning opening 34 (second start port).

As shown in FIG. 60, in the special drawing 2 start port switch passing process, first, among the second start winning openings 34 (second starting openings), information regarding the number of winnings to the monitored start opening switch is provided by the pachinko machine. The start port 2 signal output count, which is the number of outputs to the external management device of 1, is loaded (step S451), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step S452), and whether the output count overflows or not. Determine (step S453).
When the number of outputs does not overflow (step S453; NO), the updated value is saved in the start port 2 signal output count area of the RWM (step S454), and the process proceeds to step S455. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step S453; YES), the process proceeds to step S455.
In this embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port 2 signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by updating "+1", and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows. Therefore, if the value loaded by looping becomes "0", it is determined that the number of outputs overflows, and the game is not saved.

Proceeding to step S455, it is determined whether or not the number of pending special figures 2 is less than the upper limit. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the holding display of the special drawing is limited to one only for the special drawing 2, the upper limit value of the number of holdings of the special drawing 2 = 1.
When the number of special figure reservations is not less than the upper limit value (step S455; NO), the special figure 2 start port switch common process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number is less than the upper limit value (step S455; YES), the special figure 2 hold number to be updated is updated by "+1" (step S456), and the special figure 2 hold number corresponds to the special figure 2 hold number. The decoration hold number command is prepared (step S457). The decoration hold number is displayed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300, and the information display 45 displays the hold number of the special figure 2 as the decoration hold number. In this case, there can only be a decorative hold number command with hold number = 1. In addition, depending on the light emitting mode of the decorative light emitting member (LED or the like) provided in the decorative member (a decorative member arranged around the second starting winning opening 34) constituting the second starting winning opening 34. Special Figure 2 It may be notified that there is a hold number.
Next, the effect command setting process is performed (step S458). As a result, the decoration hold number command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is displayed as the decoration hold number on the information display 45.

Next, the variation pattern random number prepared in step S425 in the above-mentioned hard random number acquisition process is saved in the special figure 2 variation pattern random number storage area of RWM (step S459). The variation pattern random number is a random number that determines how the special figure variation is displayed on the batch display device 50. Next, the special symbol random number is extracted (step S460), and the extracted special symbol random number is saved in the special symbol 2 symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step S461). When step S461 is passed, the special figure 2 start port switch process is completed.

[Large winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step S372) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 61.
As shown in FIG. 61, in the large winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the left special winning opening switch 103 (step S471). The left large winning opening switch 103 is arranged in a space near the base end portion of the movable member 43a in the variable winning device 35, and detects a game ball flowing into the accessory device 51. If there is an input to the left large winning opening switch 103 (step S471; YES), the process proceeds to step S472 to perform the large winning opening count update process. The large winning opening count counts the game balls that have flowed into the variable winning device 35 (that is, the large winning opening) when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened. Therefore, if there is an input to the left special winning opening switch 103 (step S471; YES), the large winning opening count is updated by "+1". After passing through step S472, the process proceeds to step S473. On the other hand, if there is no input to the left large winning opening switch 103 (step S471; NO), the process jumps to step S473.

Proceeding to step S473, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the right large winning opening switch 104. The right large winning opening switch 104 is arranged in a space near the base end of the movable member 43b in the variable winning device 35, and detects a game ball flowing into the accessory device 51. If there is an input to the right large winning opening switch 104 (step S473; YES), the process proceeds to step S474 to update the large winning opening count. Therefore, if there is an input to the right winning opening switch 104 (step S473; YES), the winning opening count is updated by "+1". When step S474 is passed, the large winning opening switch monitoring process is completed.
On the other hand, if there is no input to the right large winning opening switch 104 (step S473; NO), the large winning opening switch monitoring process ends.

[Large winning opening count update process]
Next, the details of the large winning opening count update processing (steps S472 and S474) in the above-mentioned large winning opening switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. 62.
As shown in FIG. 62, in the large winning opening count update process, first, when the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35 are opened, the gaming ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 35 (that is, the large winning opening) is inserted. Loads the number of bonus prize signal output times, which is the number of times information about the number of winnings to the left large winning opening switch 103 and the right large winning opening switch 104 to be counted is output to the external management device of the pachinko machine 1. Step S481), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step S482). Next, it is determined whether the number of winning prize signals and the number of signal outputs overflows (step S473).
When the number of winning prize signal outputs does not overflow (step S483; NO), the updated value is saved in the number of winning number signal output region of the RWM (step S484), and the process proceeds to step S485. .. On the other hand, when the number of winning prizes signal output times overflows (step S483; YES), the process proceeds to step S485.
In this embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the winning number of winnings signal output count area. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by updating "+1", and it is configured to determine that the number of winning prize signal outputs will overflow. Therefore, if the value loaded by looping becomes "0", it is determined that the number of winning prize signal outputs will overflow, and the game will not be saved.

Proceeding to step S485, it is determined whether or not the process during the opening of the large winning opening, which is the processing in the special figure game processing for opening the variable winning device 35 as the large winning opening, is in progress. This is to determine whether or not the processing is in a state where the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35 as the large winning opening are open and the game ball can be easily accepted.
In this embodiment, the variable winning device 35 corresponds to a so-called large winning opening. Therefore, the variable winning device 35 is referred to as a large winning opening, and the large winning opening is opened while the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35 are open. It is appropriately referred to as medium.
If the process during the opening of the large winning opening is not in progress (step S485; NO), the process proceeds to step S486, and if the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is in progress (step S485; YES), the process jumps to step S489. Proceeding to step S486, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening (variable winning device 35) remaining ball processing is in progress. This is a process in the special figure game processing for monitoring whether or not the game ball that has won the variable winning device 35 as the large winning opening has escaped to the outside and remains inside the variable winning device 35. This is to determine whether or not a certain large winning opening remaining ball is being processed.
If the large winning opening remaining ball processing is not in progress (step S486; NO), the process proceeds to step S487, and if the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step S486; YES), the process jumps to step S489.

Proceeding to step S487, it is determined whether or not the small hit opening process is in progress. This is a big hit (16R big hit, 8R hit or 5R hit) when the game ball falls into a specific area of the determination device 80 in the big winning opening (variable winning device 35), but here, the starting winning opening (first start) The movable members 43a and 43b in the large winning opening (variable winning device 35) are small hits in the starting game by a small hit accompanying the winning of the winning openings 33a and 33b and all the starting winning openings 34 of the second starting winning opening 34). This is to determine whether or not the small hit opening process in the special figure game process in the state where the game ball is easily accepted by opening the game is being processed.
If the small hit opening process is not in progress (step S487; NO), the process proceeds to step S488, and if the small hit opening process is in progress (step S487; YES), the process jumps to step S489.

Proceeding to step S488, it is determined whether or not the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress. This is because when a small hit occurs and the starting game is being performed, the game ball that has won the large winning opening (variable winning device 35) escapes to the outside and remains inside the variable winning device 35. This is to determine whether or not the small hit remaining ball processing, which is the processing in the special figure game processing for monitoring whether or not the game is being performed, is in progress.
If the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step S487; NO), the large winning opening count update processing ends. On the other hand, if the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step S487; YES), the process proceeds to step S489.
Proceeding to step S489, a large winning opening count command is prepared. This is the left large winning opening switch 103 and the left large winning opening switch 103 that counts the game balls that have flowed into the variable winning device 35 (that is, the large winning opening) when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 as the large winning opening are opened. This is for preparing a command for outputting information on the number of times of winning to the right large winning opening switch 104 to the effect control device 300. Next, the effect command setting process is performed (step S490). As a result, the command prepared in step S489 is sent to the effect control device 300, and the information display 45 displays the number of winning game balls to the large winning opening under the control of the effect control device 300. Will be displayed.

After passing through step S490, it is then determined whether or not the large winning opening (variable winning device 35) is being opened (step S491). If the process during the opening of the large winning opening is not in progress (step S491; NO), the process proceeds to step S492, and if the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is in progress (step S491; YES), the process branches to step S493.
Proceeding to step S492, it is determined whether or not the small hit opening process is in progress. If the small hit opening process is not in progress (step S492; NO), the large winning opening count update process ends. On the other hand, if the small hit opening process is in progress (step S492; YES), the process proceeds to step S493.
Proceeding to step S493, the number of winning openings is updated by "+1". Then, it is determined whether or not the number of large winning opening counts is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round, for example, "9") (step S494).
If the number of large winning openings is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step S494; NO), the large winning openings count update process is terminated. If the number of large winning openings exceeds the upper limit (step S494; YES), the number of large winning openings is kept at the upper limit and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to "0" (step). S495), the process proceeds to step S496.

Proceeding to step S496, the upper limit value is loaded from the special figure hitting middle processing control pointer upper limit value area, and the loaded value is saved in the special figure hitting middle processing control pointer area (step S497). After step S497, the large winning opening count update process is completed.
Here, the process of step S497 is performed by opening and closing the large winning opening during the round because the number of large winning opening counts has reached the upper limit (that is, opening and closing the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35). Therefore, in order to forcibly terminate the opening / closing operation (for example, up to 18 times of opening / closing operation) in the middle, the value of the processing control pointer per special figure under control is rewritten to the upper limit value at which the operation ends.
As the upper limit value, "0, 2, 54" is set depending on the opening pattern of the big winning opening. Along with clearing the timer in step S495, the process for closing the large winning opening is immediately performed (after returning to the special figure game process).

[Specific area switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the specific area switch monitoring process (step S373) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 63.
As shown in FIG. 63, in the specific area switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the specific area is valid (step S501). Specific area switches 80a to 80d for detecting a game ball that has passed through a specific area are arranged inside the variable winning device 35, and when the specific area switches 80a to 80d detect that the game ball has passed through the specific area, A big hit is confirmed as a V prize, and the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are activated.
Even if such a specific area switch 80a to 80d is illegally passed through the game ball, it is not recognized as a regular V prize. Therefore, the game ball has passed through the specific area switch 80a to 80d only under certain conditions. The conditions for certifying a case as a regular V prize are as follows.
-The special figure game processing number is processing while the small hit is open.-The special figure game processing number is processing the small hit remaining ball. When any of the above processes is executed, it is determined that the specific area is valid. Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area switches 80a to 80d while the specific area is valid, it is recognized as a regular V prize.

If the specific area is not valid (step S501; NO), the specific area switch monitoring process ends. On the other hand, if the specific area is valid (step S511; YES), it is determined whether or not the game ball has already passed through the specific area (step S502). If the game ball has already passed through the specific area (step S502; YES), the specific area switch monitoring process ends.
On the other hand, if the game ball has not already passed through the specific area (step S502; NO), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the specific area switch 4 (fourth specific area switch 80d) (step S503).
When there is an input to the specific area switch 4 (fourth specific area switch 80d), a fourth specific area switch 80d for detecting a game ball that has passed through the fourth specific area is arranged inside the variable winning device 35. When the fourth specific area switch 80d detects that the game ball has passed through the fourth specific area and the signal is turned on, the input of the detection signal is in the game control device 100.
That is, it is a state in which it is detected that the game ball has passed through the fourth specific area by the fourth specific area switch 80d. In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the fourth specific area (specific area 4), it becomes a "16R jackpot" as shown in FIG. 96.

If there is an input to the specific area switch 4 (fourth specific area switch 80d) (step S503; YES), the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the specific area switch 4 (fourth specific area switch 80d), the upper limit of the number of rounds, The round display LED pointer is set (step S510), and the process proceeds to step S511.
On the other hand, if there is no input to the specific area switch 4 (fourth specific area switch 80d) (step S503; NO), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the specific area switch 3 (third specific area switch 80c).
When there is an input to the specific area switch 3 (third specific area switch 80c), a third specific area switch 80c for detecting a game ball that has passed through the third specific area is arranged inside the variable winning device 35. When the third specific area switch 80c detects that the game ball has passed through the third specific area and the signal is turned on, the input of the detection signal is in the game control device 100.
That is, it is a state in which it is detected that the game ball has passed through the third specific area by the third specific area switch 80c. In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the third specific area (specific area 3), it becomes a "16R jackpot" as shown in FIG. 96.

If there is an input to the specific area switch 3 (third specific area switch 80c) (step S504; YES), the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the specific area switch 3 (third specific area switch 80c), the upper limit of the number of rounds, The round display LED pointer is set (step S510), and the process proceeds to step S511.
On the other hand, if there is no input in the specific area switch 3 (third specific area switch 80c) (step S504; NO), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the specific area switch 2 (second specific area switch 80b).
When there is an input to the specific area switch 2 (second specific area switch 80b), a second specific area switch 80b for detecting a game ball that has passed through the second specific area is arranged inside the variable winning device 35. When the second specific area switch 80b detects that the game ball has passed through the second specific area and the signal is turned on, the input of the detection signal is in the game control device 100.
That is, it is a state that the second specific area switch 80b has detected that the game ball has passed through the second specific area. In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the second specific area (specific area 2), as shown in FIG. 96, the stop symbol pattern set at the start of the special figure variation display game is “Special Figure 1”. If any of "Stop symbol pattern 1", "Special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 2", "Special figure 2 stop symbol pattern 1", and "Special figure 2 stop symbol pattern 2", it is "per 8R". If it is either "Special Figure 1 Stop Symbol Pattern 3" or "Special Figure 2 Stop Symbol Pattern 3", it will be "16R jackpot".

If there is an input to the specific area switch 2 (second specific area switch 80b) (step S505; YES), the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the specific area switch 2 (second specific area switch 80b), the upper limit of the number of rounds, The round display LED pointer is set (step S507), and the process proceeds to step S508.
On the other hand, if there is no input in the specific area switch 2 (second specific area switch 80b) (step S505; NO), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the specific area switch 1 (first specific area switch 80a).
When the specific area switch 1 (first specific area switch 80a) has an input, the first specific area switch 80a for detecting the game ball that has passed through the first specific area is arranged inside the variable winning device 35. When the first specific area switch 80a detects that the game ball has passed through the first specific area and the signal is turned on, the input of the detection signal is in the game control device 100.
That is, it is a state in which it is detected that the game ball has passed through the first specific area by the first specific area switch 80a. In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the first specific area (specific area 1), as shown in FIG. 96, the stop symbol pattern set at the start of the special figure variation display game is “Special Figure 1”. If it is any of "Stop symbol pattern 1", "Special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 2", "Special figure 2 stop symbol pattern 1", and "Special figure 2 stop symbol pattern 2", it is "per 5R". If it is either "Special Figure 1 Stop Symbol Pattern 3" or "Special Figure 2 Stop Symbol Pattern 3", it will be "16R jackpot".

If there is no input to the specific area switch 1 (first specific area switch 80a) (step S506; NO), the specific area switch monitoring process ends.
On the other hand, if there is an input to the specific area switch 1 (first specific area switch 80a) (step S506; YES), the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the specific area switch 1 (first specific area switch 80a) and the upper limit of the number of rounds The value and the round display LED pointer are set (step S507), and the process proceeds to step S508.
In step S508, it is determined whether or not it is a stop symbol pattern for which "16R jackpot" is confirmed. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 96, when the stop symbol pattern is either "special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 3" or "special figure 2 stop symbol pattern 3", "16R jackpot" confirmation stop. It is determined that it is a symbol pattern.
In the case of the stop symbol pattern for confirming the "16R jackpot" (step S508; YES), the 16R round number upper limit value and the round display LED pointer are replaced with the round number upper limit value and the round display LED pointer set in step S507. Is set (step S509), and the process proceeds to step S511.
On the other hand, if it is not the stop symbol pattern for which "16R jackpot" is confirmed (step S508; NO), the process proceeds to step S511 without changing the round number upper limit value and the round display LED pointer set in step S507.

In step S511, the passing information corresponding to the specific area switch is saved in the specific area passing flag area (step S511).
Next, the set large winning opening opening information, the upper limit of the number of rounds, and the round display LED pointer are saved in each area (step S512), a specific area passage command corresponding to the specific area switch is prepared (step S513), and the effect is produced. The command setting process is performed (step S514). As a result, when the game ball passes through the specific area inside the variable winning device 35, the specific area switches 80a to 80d detect it, and the specific area passage command is prepared and sent to the effect control device 300. , The information display 45 is displayed that the V prize has been won under the control of the effect control device 300 (other decorations of the board decoration device 351), and the player is notified.

Next, the signal relating to the start of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step S515). The "signal regarding the start of the jackpot" here is "turn on the signal during operation of the condition device", "turn on the signal during operation of the continuous operation device of the accessory", "turn off the effective signal of the condition device operation area 1", and "off the accessory". The continuous actuating device actuating region 1 active signal is off.
Next, the signal relating to the start of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step S516). The "signal regarding the start of the jackpot" here is "on the jackpot 1 signal".
Next, it is determined whether or not the number of jackpot 2 controls is 0 (step S518).
When the number of jackpot 2 control is not 0 (step S518; NO), that is, when the special figure variation display game is executed within the specified number of times (10 times in this case) from the end of the previous special game state, another special game state occurs. In the case of a continuous jackpot, which is the case, the signal relating to the continuous jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step S519). The "signal regarding continuous jackpot" here is "on jackpot 2 signal" or the like. Next, the number during the continuous big hit is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step S520), and the specific area switch monitoring process is completed.
On the other hand, when the number of jackpot 2 controls is 0 (step S518; YES), that is, when the jackpot is not a continuous jackpot, the specific area switch monitoring process ends.

[Special figure power-on operation processing]
Next, the details of the special figure power-on operation process (step S379) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure power-on operation process is executed only when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.
As shown in FIG. 64, in the special figure power-on operation process, first, all the motors (that is, the drum accessory motor 66, the V movable accessory motor 73, and the round lottery accessory motor 88) end the power-on operation. It is determined whether or not this has been done (step S521). In step S521, the initialization operation of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77) (see FIG. 31 (a)), the initialization operation of the drum accessory 62 (see FIG. 31 (b)), and the round lottery accessory (see FIG. 31 (b)). When the initialization operation (see FIG. 31 (c)) of the determination device 80) is completed, it is determined that all the motors have completed the power-on operation.
If it is determined that all the motors have completed the power-on operation (step S521; YES), the process proceeds to step S522.

Here, if the initialization operation of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77), the drum accessory 62, and the round lottery accessory (determining device 80) is completed, each accessory stops at the initial position. Judge that there is. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the normal processing of the special figure game can be started, and the processing after step S522 is executed.
In this embodiment, three accessory motors are arranged, which are a drum accessory motor 66, a V movable accessory motor 73, and a round lottery accessory motor 88. As described above, since the special figure power-on operation process is executed only when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the V movable accessory (V movable member 77), the drum accessory 62, and the round lottery are performed when the power is turned on. When the confirmation setting for confirming that the accessory (decision device 80) is in the initial position is completed and the game is stopped at the initial position, the normal processing of the special figure game is started. Therefore, when the determination in step S521 is YES, the confirmation setting that the V movable accessory (V movable member 77), the drum accessory 62, and the round lottery accessory (determining device 80) are in the initial positions is completed. I have decided.
Without such processing, the game progresses in a state where the V movable accessory (V movable member 77), the drum accessory 62, and the round lottery accessory (determining device 80) are not in the normal positions (initial positions). This is because there is a possibility that it will start. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the special figure game starts when the initial position setting for the V movable accessory (V movable member 77), the drum accessory 62, and the round lottery accessory (determining device 80) is not completed. Since it does not, there is a merit that you can immediately see if there is a problem.

If the determination in step S521 is YES, the process proceeds to step S522, the value of the M1 normal operation is saved in the M1 control pointer area (step S522), and the M1 control timer area is cleared to "0" (step S523). Here, "M1" refers to the V movable accessory motor 73, and "M1 normal operation" corresponds to the normal operation of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77).
Next, the value of the normal operation of M2 is saved in the M2 control pointer area (step S524), and the M2 control timer area is cleared to "0" (step S525). Here, "M2" refers to the drum accessory motor 66, and "M2 normal operation" corresponds to the normal operation of the drum accessory 62.
Next, the value of the M3 normal operation is saved in the M3 control pointer area (step S526), and the M3 control timer area is cleared to "0" (step S527). Here, "M3" refers to the round lottery accessory motor 88, and "M3 normal operation" corresponds to the normal operation of the round lottery accessory (decision device 80).

Next, "1" is set as the processing number of the special figure game (step S528). As a result, next time, we will shift to special figure normal processing. Next, the number (here, "1") set in step S528 is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step S529). After step S529, the special figure power-on operation process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined that all the motors have not completed the power-on operation (step S521; NO), the V movable accessory (V movable member 77), the drum accessory 62, and the round lottery accessory (decision). Since the device 80) is not in the initial position and the confirmation setting of the initial position is not completed, the special figure power-on operation process is terminated in either case. Therefore, in this case, the process does not shift to the special figure normal processing of the special figure game.

As described above, in this embodiment, the special figure game does not start unless the initial position setting of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77), the drum accessory 62, and the round lottery accessory (determining device 80) is completed. , Special figure Since it does not shift to normal processing, the V movable accessory (V movable member 77), the drum accessory 62, and the round lottery accessory (decision device 80) can always be operated from an accurate initial position, and the game can be played. It is possible to provide a stable game game for both the person and the game store.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (step S380) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 65.
As shown in FIG. 65, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the remaining sphere counter is “0” (step S531). The remaining ball counter counts the number of game balls that have flowed into the variable winning device 35 when they remain inside the variable winning device 35.
If the remaining ball counter is "0" (step S531; YES), it is determined that the normal game game can be started immediately because no game ball remains inside the variable winning device 35, and in step S532. Special figure 1 It is determined whether or not there is a start opening winning flag. If there is a special figure 1 starting opening winning flag (step S532; YES), it is determined that the game ball wins in any of the first starting winning openings 33a and 33b, and the starting condition of special drawing 1 is satisfied, and step S538. Branch to, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing is performed. As a result, the variable display game of Special Figure 1 is started by the batch display device 50. When step S538 is passed, the special figure normal processing is completed.

On the other hand, if there is no special figure 1 start opening winning flag (step S532; NO), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number is not "0" (step S533). This is to determine whether or not there is such a hold because only one game ball is allowed to be held when the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 34. If the special figure 2 hold number is not "0" (step S533; YES), there is a special figure 2 hold, and then the special figure 2 hold number is updated to "-1" (step S534).
Next, a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared (step S535), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S536). As a result, the decoration special figure hold number command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display related to the decoration special figure is performed on the information display 45 as a game state under the control of the effect control device 300.
Next, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is performed (step S537). As a result, the variable display game of special figure 2 is started by the batch display device 50. After step S537, the special figure normal processing is completed.

On the other hand, if the remaining ball counter is not "0" (step S531; NO), it is determined that the normal game game cannot be started immediately because the game ball remains inside the variable winning device 35. Jump to step S539.
Further, even when the number of special figures 2 held is "0" in step S533 (step S533; NO), it is determined that the game game cannot be started due to the start winning because there is no hold of special figure 2, and the step Jump to S539.
Proceeding to step S539, it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has started, and if the customer waiting demo has not started (step S539; NO), the customer waiting demo flag area is set with the customer waiting demo in progress flag (step S539). S540).
Subsequently, the customer waiting demo command is prepared (step S541), and the effect command setting process is performed (step S542). As a result, the customer waiting demo command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display related to the customer waiting demo is displayed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300. After passing through step S542, the process proceeds to step S543.
On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo has already started (step S539; YES), the process jumps to step S543.

Proceeding to step S543, "1" is set as the processing number (step S543), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (here, "1" is saved) (step S544), and then the special figure is usually used. End the process.
In this way, by checking the number of reserved special figures 2 that are allowed to be held, if the number of reserved special figures 2 is not "0", the information display 45 is displayed with an effect related to the special figure. , Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S537) will be executed.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S538) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. 66 (a).
The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game.
In the first special figure variation display game, when the game ball wins the first starting winning openings 33a and 33b (first starting opening), the special figure 1 of the LED segments in the batch display device 50 is displayed. Special figure 1 to be displayed This is a variable display game played by a display.
As shown in FIG. 66A, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step S551), and the special figure 1 variation flag is saved. FIG. 1 The special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step S552) related to the setting of the stop symbol (symbol information) is performed. Next, a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern, which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game, is performed (step S553), and a variation start information setting process for setting information for the variation start of the first special figure variation display game. (Step S554).
Next, "2" is set as the processing number (step S555), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (here, "2" is saved) (step S556).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step S557), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step S558). As a result, the signal during the change of the special symbol 1 is turned on. Next, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step S559), and the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area (step S560). As a result, the batch display device 50 starts the variable display game of the special figure 1, and the blinking control of the special figure 1 is performed.
Next, the special figure 1 start opening winning flag is cleared (step S561), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is completed.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S537) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. 66 (b).
The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game.
In the second special figure variation display game, when the game ball wins the second start winning opening 34 (second starting opening), the special figure 2 is displayed among the LED segments in the batch display device 50. Special figure 2 This is a variable display game played by a display.
As shown in FIG. 66 (b), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step S571), and the special figure 2 variation flag is saved. FIG. 2 The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step S572) related to the setting of the stop symbol (symbol information) is performed. Next, a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern, which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game, is performed (step S573), and a variation start information setting process for setting information for the variation start of the second special figure variation display game. (Step S574).
Next, "2" is set as the processing number (step S575), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (here, "2" is saved) (step S576).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step S577), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step S578). As a result, the special symbol 2 changing signal is turned on. Next, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step S579), and the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area (step S580). As a result, the batch display device 50 starts the variable display game of the special figure 2, and the blinking control of the special figure 2 is performed. When step S580 is passed, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is completed.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step S552) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 67 (a).
The special figure 1 stop symbol setting process performs the process related to the setting of the stop symbol (symbol information) of the special figure 1.
As shown in FIG. 67 (a), first, a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special figure 1 is loaded from the special figure 1 symbol random number storage area (step S591), and the special figure 1 symbol random number storage area is set to "0". Clear (step S592). Next, the small hit symbol table is set (step S593), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded random number is acquired, and the save symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step S594). By this process, any of the 50 symbol numbers from 0 to 49 is selected.

Next, the special figure 1 small hit stop symbol information table is set (step S595), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step S596). The stop symbol pattern is for setting the stop symbol on the special figure 1 display that displays the special figure 1 among the LED segments in the batch display device 50. The stop symbol pattern is once by the batch display device 50. In the special figure variation display game of, only one of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 changes (that is, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 do not change at the same time), so the area for storing the stop symbol pattern is the special figure. Both 1 and 2 are common in the stop symbol pattern area and are the same area (see step S616 described later).
Next, the small hit operation determination information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the small hit operation determination information area (step S597). The small hit operation determination information is information for determining whether to perform a small hit operation of opening once or opening twice.

Next, the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (step S598). The large winning opening opening information is information for determining whether to open and control the movable members 43a and 43b of the large winning opening (variable winning device 35) corresponding to which of the 16R big hit, 8R hit, and 5R hit operation. ..
Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S599), and the prepared decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step S600). In addition, the decorative special figure command prepared in step S599 is distinguished so that it can be determined which of the special figure 1 or special figure 2 is the stop symbol pattern.
Next, the effect command setting process is performed (step S601). As a result, the decorative special figure command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display corresponding to the decorative special figure command related to the special figure 1 is performed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300. become. After step S601, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step S572) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 67 (b).
The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process performs the process related to the setting of the stop symbol (symbol information) of the special figure 2.
As shown in FIG. 67 (b), first, a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2 is loaded from the special figure 2 symbol random number storage area (step S611), and the special figure 2 symbol random number storage area is set to "0". Clear (step S612). Next, the small hit symbol table is set (step S613), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded random number is acquired, and the save symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step S614). By this process, any of the 50 symbol numbers from 0 to 49 is selected.

Next, the special figure 2 small hit stop symbol information table is set (step S615), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step S616). The stop symbol pattern is for setting the stop symbol on the special figure 2 display that displays the special figure 2 among the LED segments in the batch display device 50. The stop symbol pattern is once by the batch display device 50. In the special figure variation display game of, only one of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 changes (that is, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 do not change at the same time), so the area for storing the stop symbol pattern is the special figure. Both 1 and 2 are common in the stop symbol pattern area and are the same area (similar to step S596 described above).
Next, the small hit operation determination information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the small hit operation determination information area (step S617). The small hit operation determination information is information for determining a small hit operation that opens twice.

Next, the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (step S618). The large winning opening opening information is information for determining whether to open and control the movable members 43a and 43b of the large winning opening (variable winning device 35) corresponding to which of the 16R big hit, 8R hit, and 5R hit operation. ..
Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S619), and the prepared decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step S620). In addition, the decorative special figure command prepared in step S619 is distinguished so that it can be determined which of the special figure 1 or special figure 2 is the stop symbol pattern.
Next, the effect command setting process is performed (step S621). As a result, the decorative special figure command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display corresponding to the decorative special figure command related to the special figure 2 is performed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300. become. After step S611, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation pattern setting processing (steps S553 and S573) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 68.
The variation pattern setting process sets the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game.
The fluctuation pattern is not limited to the example of this embodiment, for example, the first half fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the special figure fluctuation display after the reach state is reached. It is composed of a latter half fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode until the end of the game, and may be configured to set the latter half fluctuation pattern first and then set the first half fluctuation pattern.
As shown in FIG. 68, in the variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group address table is set (step S631). Next, the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag and the stop symbol pattern is acquired and prepared (step S632).

Next, a random number is loaded from the target variation pattern random number storage area and prepared (step S633). The loaded random number (variation pattern random number) is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern of special figure 1 and special figure 2 by lottery. Next, the target variation pattern random number storage area is cleared to "0" (step S634).
In the variation pattern setting process, as in the flow of this embodiment, loading of random numbers from the target variation pattern random number storage area and clearing of "0" in the target variation pattern random number storage area may be performed separately. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an exchange command may be used to perform all at once. If you want to do it all at once, for example, set the registers you want to load to "0" in advance, and perform processing such as swapping each other. Such a transformation process is not limited to the application to the processes of steps S633 and S634 in the variation pattern setting process, but can be applied to a process in which loading of information into an area and clearing of information are a set.

Next, a 2-byte distribution process is performed (step S635). The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the variation pattern number of the special figure variation display game from the variation pattern selection table based on the variation pattern random number.
Next, the variation pattern number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the variation pattern number area (step S636). By this process, the fluctuation patterns of the special figures 1 and 2 are set based on the fluctuation pattern numbers. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game.
After step S636, the variation pattern setting process ends.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps S554, S574) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 69.
The fluctuation start information setting process sets the fluctuation start information in the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game.
As shown in FIG. 69, in the fluctuation start information setting process, the fluctuation time value table is set (step S641), the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number is acquired, and saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step). S642). In this embodiment, there are a total of 48 fluctuation patterns.
After that, the variation command corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared (step S643), and the effect command setting process is performed (step S644). As a result, the variation command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display corresponding to the start of variation of the decorative special figure related to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the information display 45 by the control of the effect control device 300. Will be done.
When step S644 is passed, the fluctuation start information setting process is terminated.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorative special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure variation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the start storage number (hold number) for special figure 2, a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a special figure. Fluctuation display A variation command including information on a variation pattern of the game is mentioned, and the command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step S381) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 70, in the special figure changing process, first, "3" is set as the process number (step S651), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (here, "3" is saved). (Step S652). As a result, in the routine in the next special figure game process, "3" is selected as the process number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the process is branched to the special figure display process (step S385).
Next, the display time (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S653). Next, the signal relating to the end of the variation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step S654). As a result, the signal during the change of the special symbol 1 is turned off. Further, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step S655). As a result, the signal during the change of the special symbol 2 is turned off.
Next, the stop flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step S656), and then the stop flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step S657). When step S657 is passed, the processing during the change of the special figure is terminated.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step S382) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 71.
As shown in FIG. 71, in the special figure display processing, first, a command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area and prepared (step S661). Next, the effect command setting process is performed (step S662). As a result, the decoration special drawing command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the information display 45 corresponds to the display of the decoration special figure related to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 under the control of the effect control device 300. The production display will be performed.
Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step S663), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S664). As a result, the small hit fanfare command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display related to the small hit fanfare is performed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300.

Next, it is determined whether or not the small hit operation is opened twice (step S665). This is because there are one-time opening and two-time opening as small hits, and when such a small hit occurs, whether or not the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35 perform an operation of opening twice in a row. Is to be determined.
If the small hit operation is not opened twice (step S665; NO), the start value of the once opened is saved in the special figure hitting middle processing control pointer area (step S666), and the special figure hitting middle processing control pointer upper limit value is saved. The upper limit of the one-time opening is saved in the area (step S667). In this case, "0" is set as the start value for opening once, and "0" is set as the upper limit value. As a result, the operation of opening the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35 once is performed. After passing through step S667, the process proceeds to step S670.
On the other hand, if the small hit operation is opened twice (step S665; YES), the start value of the double opening is saved in the special figure hit middle processing control pointer area (step S668), and the special figure hit middle processing control pointer is saved. The upper limit value opened twice is saved in the upper limit value area (step S669). In this case, "0" is set as the start value for opening twice, and "2" is set as the upper limit value. As a result, the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35 are opened twice in succession. After passing through step S669, the process proceeds to step S670.

Proceeding to step S670, it is determined whether or not a small hit is generated based on the fluctuation of the special figure 1. This is to determine whether a small hit has occurred due to the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening (left starting opening, right starting opening) 33a, 33b, and the special figure 1 is in the variable symbol discrimination flag area. It can be determined by whether either the fluctuation flag or the fluctuation flag of Special Figure 2 is saved. When a small hit occurs due to the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (step S679; YES), the signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step S671), and then the process proceeds to step S673. ..
There are the following signals regarding the start of the special figure 1 small hit, and all of them are in the ON state.
・ Special symbol 1 small hit signal turned on ・ Special electric accessory 1 operating signal turned on ・ Condition device operating area 1 valid signal turned on ・ Character continuous operating device operating area 1 valid signal turned on On the other hand, fluctuation of special figure 1 If no small hit has occurred (step S670; NO), the signal relating to the start of the small hit in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step S672), and then the process proceeds to step S673.
There are the following signals regarding the start of the special figure 2 small hit, and all of them are in the ON state.
・ Special symbol 2 small hit signal turned on ・ Special electric accessory 1 operating signal turned on ・ Condition device operating area 1 valid signal turned on ・ accessory continuous operating device operating area 1 valid signal turned on

Proceeding to step S673, a small hit opening operation start command is prepared, and then the effect command setting process is performed (step S676). As a result, the small hit opening operation start command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display regarding the start of the small hit opening operation is performed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300.
Next, the value of the small hit operation is saved in the accessory solenoid control pointer area (step S676), and the accessory solenoid control timer area is cleared to "0" (step S676). As a result, a small hit operation of the floor accessory (floor portion 61), that is, a rotary reciprocating operation in which the rear end side of the floor portion 61 is driven up and down is executed.
Next, the value of the M1 small hit operation 1 is saved in the M1 control pointer area (step S677), and the M1 control timer area is cleared to "0" (step S678). As a result, the small hit operation (see FIGS. 32 (a) and 32 (b)) of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77) is executed.

Next, "4" is set as the processing number (step S679), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (here, "4" is saved) (step S680). As a result, in the routine in the next special figure game process, "4" is selected as the process number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the process is branched to the small hit opening process (step S385).
Next, the small hit opening time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S681). The small hit opening time is set to, for example, 400 ms. Next, the on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step S682). As a result, the first special winning opening solenoid 201 and the second special winning opening solenoid 202 are turned on, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are open-controlled according to the small hit opening time, respectively. ..

Next, the specific area passage flag area is cleared (step S683), and the large winning opening count area is cleared (step S684). In these, since the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are open-controlled corresponding to the small hit opening time, it is expected that the game ball will win the variable winning device 35 (large winning opening). , The specific area passage flag corresponding to the output of the specific area switches 80a to 80d for detecting that the game ball has passed through the specific area is cleared in advance, and the number of large winning openings is also cleared. ..
Next, the initial value of the output timer (for example, 128 ms) is saved in the accessory number signal control timer area (step S685), and the fraud monitoring period out-of-period flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step S686). These set the period for outputting the accessory number signal as one of the various output data of the external information to be output to the external information terminal plate 152, and since it is not the big winning opening fraud monitoring period during the operation of the small hit, This is a process for removing the fraud monitoring period.
Next, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step S687), the jackpot 2 control count is not 0, the number is updated by -1 (step S688), and the special symbol display processing is terminated. The jackpot 2 control number is for determining whether the special game state has occurred again in the execution of the special figure variation display game within the specified number of times since the end of the previous special game state. The specified number of times here is 10 times, 11 is set as an initial value at the end of the special game state, and -1 is updated every time the small hit ends. Then, since the special game state occurs when the number of jackpot 2 control times is not 0, it is determined that the special game state has occurred again by executing the special figure variation display game within 10 times from the end of the previous special game state. It is designed to do.

[Processing during small hit opening]
Next, the details of the small hit opening processing (step S383) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 72.
As shown in FIG. 72, in the small hit opening process, first, the special figure hit middle control pointer is loaded and prepared (step S691). Next, the value of the loaded special figure hitting middle control pointer is compared with the small hit operation end value, and it is determined whether or not the value of the loaded special figure hitting middle control pointer is equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step S692). ). This is to compare the value of the loaded special figure hitting middle control pointer with the upper limit value for terminating the small hitting operation, and judge whether or not the value is higher than that.
If the value of the loaded special figure hit middle control pointer is not equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step S692; NO), the small hit operation transition setting process is performed (step S693). As a result, at the time of a small hit, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are controlled to be open for a certain period of time, and the game is performed in which the game ball wins the large winning opening (variable winning device 35). The opening control of the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 has one opening and two opening, and the details of the operation will be described later.

Next, the special figure hitting control pointer is updated by "+1" (step S694), a small hit operation command corresponding to the special figure hitting control pointer is prepared (step S695), and then the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S696). As a result, the command during the small hit operation is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display corresponding to the small hit operation being performed is performed on the information display 45 by the control of the effect control device 300. .. After step S696, the process of opening the small hit is completed.
On the other hand, if the value of the loaded special figure hit middle control pointer is equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step S692; YES), the game branches to step S697, and "5" is set as the processing number (step S697). Figure The processing number is saved in the game processing number area (here, "5" is saved) (step S698). As a result, in the routine in the next special figure game processing, "5" is selected as the processing number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the processing number, and the game branches to the small hit remaining ball processing (step S387).
Next, a command for closing the small hit large winning opening is prepared (step S699), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S700). As a result, a command to close the small hit large winning opening is sent to the effect control device 300, and the information display 45 is displayed with an effect corresponding to the closing of the large winning opening in the small hit under the control of the effect control device 300. Will be told. After passing through step S700, the processing during the opening of the small hit is completed.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hit operation transition setting process (step S693) in the above-mentioned small hit opening process will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (a).
As shown in FIG. 73A, in the small hit operation transition setting process, first, the branch determination is performed by the special figure hit medium control pointer (step S711). In this branch determination, the branch destination is different depending on whether the control pointer per special figure is "0" or "1".
That is, if the control pointer per special figure is "0", the process branches to step S712 and the wait time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S712). The weight time is a period of an interval between the first opening and the second opening when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened twice at the time of a small hit, and the weight time is, for example, It is set to 1000 ms. Next, the off-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step S713). As a result, the first special winning opening solenoid 201 and the second special winning opening solenoid 202 are turned off, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are closed and controlled. After step S713, the small hit operation transition setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the control pointer during hitting the special figure is "1", the game branches to step S714 and the small hit opening time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S715). The small hit opening time is a period during which the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened at the time of a small hit, and the small hit opening time is set to, for example, 400 ms. Next, the on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step S715). As a result, the first special winning opening solenoid 201 and the second special winning opening solenoid 202 are turned on, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are open-controlled.
Next, the output timer initial value (for example, 128 ms) is saved in the accessory number signal control timer area (step S716). This is because the period for outputting the accessory number signal is set as one of the various output data of the external information to be output to the external information terminal plate 152, and the large winning opening fraud monitoring period is not performed during the operation of the small hit. This is a process for removing the fraud monitoring period. After step S716, the small hit operation transition setting process ends.

[Timing chart of small hit operation]
Next, a specific example of the small hit operation will be described with reference to the timing chart of the small hit operation shown in FIG. 73 (b).
In FIG. 73 (b), in the small hit operation, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 may open once or open twice. The upper part of FIG. 73B is the case where the movable members 43a and 43b are opened once, and the lower part of FIG. 73B is the case where the movable members 43a and 43b are opened twice.
First, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 73 (b), when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 open once, the movable members 43a and 43b open (convert to the second state). , The opening operation of a predetermined mode such as the closing operation again after the lapse of a predetermined time (here, after 400 ms has elapsed) is performed once. Therefore, in the case of opening once, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened only for 400 ms, and the game ball can be won in the variable winning device 35 within this period. A hit operation is performed. Further, the information display 45 for displaying the effect state is provided with a display time (368 ms in this case) for notifying in advance that there is an operation of opening once.

When the movable members 43a and 43b are opened once and then closed, the control pointer during special drawing = 0. Then, the small hit remaining ball time starts from the timing when the movable members 43a and 43b are opened once and then closed, and the small hit remaining ball time is a period of "1900 ms + α". The period of "α" continues until the game ball is completely removed from the variable winning device 35. For example, if there is a remaining ball inside the variable winning device 35, the remaining ball is removed from the variable winning device 35. It will continue until it is cut. Therefore, the period of "α" is not a fixed period, but a variable period that continues until the game ball is completely removed from the variable winning device 35.
Next, when "1900 ms + α" as the small hit remaining ball time elapses, an operation is performed such that the small hit ending time exists for a predetermined time (here, 100 ms) from the elapsed timing. The small hit ending time is, for example, a period during which an effect display for notifying the information display 45 that the ending is a small hit is performed.
When observed from the player's line of sight, the small hit remaining ball time "1900 ms + α" starts from the timing when the movable members 43a and 43b are opened once and then closed, and then the small hit ending time (100 ms) continues seamlessly, so that it looks like. The ending period of the above is a continuous period in which the small hit remaining ball time "1900 ms + α" and the small hit ending time (100 ms) are added, that is, 2000 ms.

Next, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 73 (b), when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened twice, the movable members 43a and 43b are opened (converted to the second state). Then, the opening operation of a predetermined mode, such as the closing operation again after the lapse of a predetermined time (here, after 400 ms), is repeated twice. In this case, the first opening period of the movable members 43a and 43b is, for example, 400 ms, and then the movable members 43a and 43b are closed after 400 ms has elapsed, and then a predetermined weight time (1000 ms) is provided as an interval period. During this period, the movable members 43a and 43b continue to be closed, and at the same time when the predetermined weight time ends, the movable members 43a and 43b are opened for the second time. The opening period of the second movable members 43a and 43b is also, for example, 400 m. Therefore, in the case of opening twice, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened only for 400 ms, and the operation is performed twice with a predetermined weight time in between. Then, a small hit operation is performed in such a manner that the game ball can be won in the variable winning device 35 within the period in which the opening operation is performed twice. Further, the information display 45 for displaying the effect state is provided with a display time (368 ms in this case) for notifying in advance that the opening operation is performed twice.

In the case of the two-time opening operation as described above, when the movable members 43a and 43b are closed after the first opening, the control pointer during special drawing = 0. Then, the predetermined weight time (1000 ms) is set from the timing when the movable members 43a and 43b are opened once and then closed, and at the same time when the predetermined weight time ends, the second opening operation of the movable members 43a and 43b is started. .. At this time, when the movable members 43a and 43b start opening for the second time, the control pointer during special drawing = 1.
After that, the small hit remaining ball time starts from the timing when the movable members 43a and 43b are closed after the second opening period elapses, and the small hit remaining ball time becomes a period of "1900 ms + α". The period of "α" continues until the game ball is completely removed from the variable winning device 35, which has the same properties as in the case of the one-time opening operation described above.
Next, when "1900 ms + α" as the small hit remaining ball time elapses, an operation is performed such that the small hit ending time exists for a predetermined time (here, 100 ms) from the elapsed timing. The small hit ending time is, for example, a period during which an effect display for notifying the information display 45 that the ending is a small hit is performed.
Similarly, in the case of the operation of opening twice, when observed from the player's line of sight, the small hit remaining ball time "1900 ms + α" starts from the timing when the movable members 43a and 43b are opened once and then closed, and then the small hit is seamlessly small. Since the hit ending time (100 ms) continues, the apparent ending period is a continuous period in which the small hit remaining ball time "1900 ms + α" and the small hit ending time (100 ms) are added, that is, 2000 ms.

[Small hit residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing (step S384) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 74.
As shown in FIG. 74, in the small hit remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball counter is "0" (step S721), and if the remaining ball counter is not "0" (step S721; NO), the small hit remaining ball processing is completed.
On the other hand, if the remaining sphere counter is "0" (step S721; YES), it is determined that there is no remaining sphere inside the variable winning device 35, and the value of the stop operation is saved in the accessory solenoid control pointer area (step S721; YES). Step S722). Next, the accessory solenoid control timer area is cleared to "0" (step S723). As a result, when there is no remaining sphere inside the variable winning device 35, the operation of the accessory solenoid such as the floor accessory solenoid 61b1 is stopped, and the control of the accessory solenoid such as the floor accessory solenoid 61b1 is terminated. It will be.

Next, the value of the control pointer for returning from the current position of the V accessory (V movable member 77) to the center position (initial position) in the shortest time is set (step S724). For example, as shown in FIG. 98, when the current position of the V movable member 77 is on the right side of the initial position, a value for moving the V movable member 77 to the left is set as the value of the control pointer, and FIG. As shown in 99, when the current position of the V movable member 77 is on the left side of the initial position, a value for moving the V movable member 77 to the right is set as the value of the control pointer. When the current position of the V movable member 77 is at the initial position, a value for stopping the movement of the V movable member 77 is set as the value of the control pointer.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value set in step S724 is the same as the value currently being controlled (step S725). That is, if the current traveling direction of the V movable member 77 is to the right and a value for moving the V movable member 77 to the right is set in step S724, it is determined that the same is true in step S725. .. Further, when the current traveling direction of the V movable member 77 is the left direction and a value for moving the V movable member 77 to the left is set in step S724, it is determined that the same is true in step S725. ..

If the value set in step S724 is the same as the value currently being controlled (step S725; YES), the process proceeds to step S728.
On the other hand, when the value set in step S724 is not the same as the value currently being controlled (step S725; NO), the value set in step S724 is saved in the M1 control pointer area (step S726), and M1 The control timer area is cleared to 0 (step S727), and the process proceeds to step S728.

Proceeding to step S728, the small hit ending command is prepared (step S728), and the effect command setting process is performed (step S729). As a result, the small hit ending command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display corresponding to the small hit ending is performed on the information display 45 by the control of the effect control device 300.
Next, "6" is set as the processing number (step S730), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (here, "6" is saved) (step S731). As a result, in the routine in the next special figure game process, "6" is selected as the process number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the game branches to the small hit end process (step S385).
Next, the small hit ending time (for example, 0.1 second) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S732), and the large winning opening count area is cleared (step S733). With the end of the small hit operation, the small hit ending time is set to produce the ending, and the number of winnings of the game ball to the large winning opening (variable winning device 35) is cleared, and the next time. This is to prepare for the hit operation (including both big hit and small hit). Next, the signal relating to the end of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step S734).
The signals related to the end of the small hit operation are as follows, and all of them are in the off state.
・ Special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned off ・ Special symbol 2 small hit signal is turned off ・ Condition device operating area 1 valid signal is turned off ・ Accessory continuous operating device operating area 1 valid signal is turned off After step S734, small hit remains End the ball processing.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the small hit end process (step S385) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 75.
As shown in FIG. 75, in the small hit end process, first, it is determined whether or not the V accessory (V movable member 77) is in the central position (initial position) based on the value in the M1 control pointer area. (Step S741), if the V accessory (V movable member 77) is not in the center position (initial position) (step S741; NO), the small hit end process is terminated. On the other hand, when the V accessory (V movable member 77) is in the center position (initial position) (step S741; YES), the value of the M1 stop operation is saved in the M1 control pointer area (step S742), and the M1 control is performed. Clear the timer area to 0 (step S743).
Next, it is determined whether or not the specific region has passed (step S744). This is because the specific area switches 80a to 80d for detecting the game ball that has passed through the specific area are arranged inside the variable winning device 35, and the specific area switches 80a to 80d detect that the game ball has passed through the specific area. Then, since a big hit (special game state) is generated as a V prize, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area switches 80a to 80d.
If the game ball does not pass through a specific area (step S744; NO), the game branches to step S755, "1" is set as the processing number (step S755), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (here). "1" is saved) (step S756). As a result, in the routine in the next special figure game processing, "1" is selected as the processing number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the processing number, and the routine is branched to the special figure normal processing (step S380).
Next, the signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step S757), and the small hit end process is completed.
The signals related to the end of the small hit are as follows, and all of them are in the off state.
-Special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned off-Special symbol 2 small hit signal is turned off On the other hand, if the game ball passes through a specific area (step S744; YES), a command is loaded from the decorative special symbol command area and prepared (step S744; YES). Along with step S745), the effect command setting process is performed (step S746). As a result, the decoration special figure command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the display special figure command (for example, the decoration special figure command for producing a big hit) is sent to the information display 45 by the control of the effect control device 300. Corresponding production display will be performed.

Next, the jackpot fanfare command is prepared (step S747), and the effect command setting process is performed (step S748). As a result, the jackpot fanfare command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display corresponding to the jackpot fanfare command is sent to the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300 (for example, the effect display for notifying the jackpot with the fanfare). Will be done.
Next, "7" is set as the processing number (step S749), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (here, "7" is saved) (step S750). As a result, in the routine in the next special figure game processing, "7" is selected as the processing number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the processing number, and the process branches to the fanfare / interval processing (step S386).

Next, the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the specific area passage flag and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S751), and the specific area passage flag area is cleared (step S752).
Specifically, the specific area passage flag is a flag indicating that the passage of the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 3 (third specific area switch 80c) or the specific area switch 4 (fourth specific area switch 80d). In this case, "10 seconds" is set as the jackpot fanfare time.
Further, the specific area passage flag is a flag indicating that the passage of the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 1 (first specific area switch 80a) or the specific area switch 2 (second specific area switch 80b), and is stopped. When the symbol pattern is "stop symbol pattern 1", "10 seconds" is set as the jackpot fanfare time. On the other hand, the specific area passage flag is a flag indicating that the passage of the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 1 (first specific area switch 80a) or the specific area switch 2 (second specific area switch 80b), and is stopped. When the symbol pattern is "stop symbol pattern 2" or "stop symbol pattern 3", "20 seconds" is set as the jackpot fanfare time in order to perform a round lottery effect.

Next, a signal relating to the end of the small hit (special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned off, special symbol 2 small hit signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step S753).
Next, in order to count the number of rounds of the big hit, the initial value (for example, "1") is saved in the number of rounds area (step S754), and the small hit end process is ended.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (step S386) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 76.
As shown in FIG. 76, in the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step S761), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step S762). , The effect command setting process is performed (step S763). As a result, the round command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display corresponding to the round command (for example, the effect display for notifying the number of rounds in the special gaming state) is sent to the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300. ) Will be performed.
Next, the large winning opening opening information and the large winning opening opening time value corresponding to the number of rounds are set (step S764). Here, the first on-time during the round is set as the opening time value of the large winning opening, and specifically, for example, 800 ms or 20000 ms is set as described in FIG. 78 (b) described later. Next, the large winning opening opening time value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S765), and the starting value and the upper limit value of the control pointer corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the number of rounds are saved (step S766).
A specific example of opening the large winning opening and the control pointer will be described later in FIG. 78 (b).

Next, the start value is saved in the special figure hitting middle control pointer area (step S767), and the upper limit value is saved in the special figure hitting middle control pointer upper limit value area (step S768).
Next, "8" is set as the processing number (step S769), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (here, "8" is saved) (step S770). As a result, in the routine in the next special figure game processing, "8" is selected as the processing number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the processing number, and the process is branched to the processing during opening of the large winning opening (step S387).

Next, the on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step S771). As a result, the first special winning opening solenoid 201 and the second large winning opening solenoid 202 are turned on, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are open-controlled according to the jackpot opening time, respectively.
Next, the large winning opening count area is cleared, the counting number of the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening (variable winning device 35) is cleared (step S772), and the illegal monitoring period is set in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area. The outside flag is saved (step S773). This is a process for removing the fraud monitoring period because it is not the big prize opening fraud monitoring period during the jackpot operation. Next, the signal relating to the start of opening the large winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step S774).
The following signals regarding the start of opening the large winning opening are in the ON state.
-Turn on the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1. Then, it is determined whether or not the second round (the first round, which is practically a big hit because the first round is excluded) is started (step S775), and the second round. If it is not started (step S775; N), the fanfare / interval processing is terminated.
On the other hand, when the second round is started (step S775; YES), the value of the jackpot operation is saved in the accessory solenoid control pointer area (step S776). As a result, the jackpot operation of the floor accessory (floor portion 61), that is, the rotary reciprocating operation in which the rear end side of the floor accessory (floor portion 61) rotates so as to move up and down is executed.
Next, the accessory solenoid control timer area is cleared to 0 (step S777).
Next, the value of the M1 jackpot operation is saved in the M1 control pointer area (step S778). As a result, the jackpot operation (see FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b)) of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77) is executed.
Next, the M1 control timer area is cleared to 0 (step S779), and the fanfare / interval processing is completed.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
Next, the details of the process during opening of the large winning opening (step S387) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 77.
As shown in FIG. 77, in the process of opening the large winning opening, first, the control pointer for hitting the special figure is loaded and prepared (step S781). Next, the value of the loaded special figure hit middle control pointer is compared with the jackpot operation end value, and it is determined whether or not the value of the loaded special figure hit middle control pointer is equal to or greater than the jackpot operation end value (step S782). This is to compare the value of the loaded special figure hit middle control pointer with the upper limit value for terminating the jackpot operation, and determine whether the value is higher than that.
If the value of the loaded special figure hitting middle control pointer is not equal to or greater than the jackpot operation end value (step S782; NO), the special figure hitting middle control pointer is updated by "+1" (step S783), and the jackpot operation transition setting process is performed. (Step S784). This is because the value of the control pointer during hitting the special figure is not equal to or greater than the upper limit value for ending the jackpot operation, so that various modes of jackpot operation are performed according to the value of the control pointer during hitting the special figure. After step S784, the process of opening the large winning opening is completed.

On the other hand, if the value of the loaded special figure hit middle control pointer is equal to or greater than the jackpot operation end value (step S782; YES), the process branches to step S785 to determine whether or not it is the final round of jackpot. If it is not the final round of the jackpot (step S785; NO), the remaining ball processing time (for example, 900 ms) for other than the final round is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S786). Next, an interval command is prepared (step S787), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S788). As a result, the interval command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display corresponding to the interval command (for example, the effect display for notifying the interval between rounds) is sent to the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300. ) Will be performed.
After passing through step S788, the process proceeds to step S792.

Further, if it is the final round of the big hit in step S785 (step S785; YES), the process branches to step S790. Then, the remaining ball processing time (for example, 1900 ms) for the final round is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S789). Next, the jackpot ending command is prepared (step S790), and the effect command setting process is performed (step S791). As a result, the jackpot ending command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display corresponding to the jackpot ending command is sent to the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300 (for example, an effect that notifies the end of the jackpot). Display) will be performed.
After passing through step S791, the process proceeds to step S792.
When proceeding from step S788 or step S791 to step S792, "9" is set as the processing number (step S792), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (here, "9" is saved) (step S793). ). As a result, in the routine in the next special figure game processing, "9" is selected as the processing number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the processing number, and the game branches to the large winning opening remaining ball processing (step S388).
Next, off-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step S794). As a result, the first special winning opening solenoid 201 and the second special winning opening solenoid 202 are turned off, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are stopped and controlled, respectively. After step S794, the process of opening the large winning opening is completed.

[Big hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit operation transition setting process (step S784) in the above-mentioned large winning opening opening process will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (a).
As shown in FIG. 78 (a), in the jackpot operation transition setting process, first, the branch determination is performed by the special figure hitting middle control pointer (step S801). In this branch determination, the branch destination differs depending on whether the control pointer per special figure is "even" or "odd".
That is, if the control pointer per special figure is "even", the process branches to step S802 and the weight time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S802). The weight time is the period of the interval between the current opening and the next opening when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 perform the opening operation at the time of a big hit, and the weight time is set to, for example, 800 ms. (See the upper part of FIG. 78 (b)).
Next, the off-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step S803). As a result, the first special winning opening solenoid 201 and the second special winning opening solenoid 202 are turned off, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are closed and controlled. When step S803 is passed, the jackpot operation transition setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the control pointer during hitting the special figure is "odd", the game branches to step S804 and the jackpot opening time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S804). In step S804, the opening time (for example, 800 ms) in the “open / close” mode shown in the upper part of FIG. 78 (b) is set as the jackpot opening time.
Next, the on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step S805). As a result, the first special winning opening solenoid 201 and the second special winning opening solenoid 202 are turned on, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are open-controlled based on the jackpot opening time set in step S805. It will be. After step S805, the jackpot operation transition setting process is terminated.

[Timing chart of jackpot operation]
Next, a specific example of the jackpot operation will be described with reference to the timing chart of the jackpot operation shown in FIG. 78 (b).
As shown in FIG. 78 (b), the jackpot operation has the following aspects.
"Open / close" mode This is a game mode performed in all rounds when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first specific area switch 80a, the second specific area switch 80b, and the third specific area 80c.
-"Long open" mode This is a game mode performed in all rounds when the passage of the game ball is detected by the fourth specific area switch 80d.

In the "open / close" mode, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 78 (b), when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened once as the operation of one round of big hits, the movable members 43a, A predetermined opening operation such that 43b performs an opening operation (converted to a second state) and then closes again after a predetermined time has elapsed (here, after 800 ms has elapsed) is performed once.
Therefore, in the case of opening once, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are in the open state for 800 ms, and the jackpot operation is performed in such a manner that the game ball can be won in the variable winning device 35 within this period. Will be A closing period (800 ms) is provided in which the movable members 43a and 43b are closed until the next open game.
Then, the opening / closing control of the movable members 43a and 43b as described above is repeated 18 times in the whole one round, and the opening / closing control 18 times is configured as one round. That is, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are in the form of (800 ms on + 800 ms off) × 18 times = 1 round game.

In the 16R big hit, the first game that generates the big hit does not correspond to the game with the big hit round, so the round with the big hit is substantially 15R.
In the big hit of full opening, the above-mentioned one-round game is executed. Then, when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are closed in the final round of each round, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 78 (b), the jackpot remaining ball time starts from the closing timing, and the jackpot remaining ball The time is a period of "900 ms".
In this case, the remaining ball time (900 ms) is short, and even if the remaining ball exists inside the variable winning device 35, the game proceeds to the next round game. This is because there is a high possibility that the remaining ball will escape from the variable winning device 35 during the execution of the next round game.
Next, the period until the transition to the next round game is an interval period (for example, 100 ms).
In this way, in the jackpot in the "open / close" mode, the above-mentioned 1-round game is 15 rounds (in the case of "16R jackpot"), 7 rounds (in the case of "8R hit"), or 4 rounds (in the case of "5R hit"). When the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are closed in the final round of the final round game, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 78 (b), a big hit is made from the closing timing. The remaining ball time starts, and only in this case, the jackpot remaining ball time becomes a period of "1900 ms" and is set to a longer time. This is because it takes a slightly long time for the remaining balls in the final round of the 15-round game to escape from the variable winning device 35 to the outside. Then, when the remaining ball time (“1900 ms” has elapsed, the operation shifts to the jackpot end operation.

In the "long opening / closing" mode, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 78 (b), when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 open once as one round operation of the big hit, the movable member 43a , 43b performs the opening operation (converted to the second state), and after a predetermined time elapses (here, after 20000 ms elapses), the opening operation of a predetermined mode is performed once.
Therefore, in the case of opening once, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are in the open state for 20000 ms, and the jackpot operation in such a manner that the game ball can be won in the variable winning device 35 within this period is performed. Will be
Then, as described above, after the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 perform the open / close operation once, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 78B, the jackpot remaining ball time from the closing timing. Starts, and the jackpot remaining ball time is a period of "900 ms".
In this case, the remaining ball time (900 ms) is short, and even if the remaining ball exists inside the variable winning device 35, the game proceeds to the next round game. This is because there is a high possibility that the remaining ball will escape from the variable winning device 35 during the execution of the next round game.

Next, the period until the transition to the next round game is an interval period (for example, 100 ms).
In this way, in the jackpot of the "long mode", the above-mentioned one-round game is repeatedly executed, and when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are closed in the final round of the last round game, FIG. 78 As shown in the lower part of (b), the jackpot remaining ball time starts from the closing timing, and only in this case, the jackpot remaining ball time becomes a period of "1900 ms" and is set to a longer time. This is because it takes a slightly long time for the remaining balls in the final round of the last round game to escape from the variable winning device 35 to the outside. Then, when the remaining ball time (“1900 ms” has elapsed, the operation shifts to the jackpot end operation.

[Treatment of remaining balls in the winning opening]
Next, the details of the large winning opening remaining ball processing (step S388) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 79.
As shown in FIG. 79, in the big winning opening remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not it is the final round of the big hit game (for example, 16 rounds if it is a 16R big hit) (step S811), and then the big hit. If it is not the final round of the game (step S811; NO), the large winning opening operation determination table is set (step S812). Next, the big winning opening opening information and the interval time corresponding to the number of rounds are set (step S813). The content of the next round game is determined by the settings of steps S811 and S812.

Next, "7" is set as the processing number (step S815), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (here, "7" is saved) (step S816). As a result, in the routine in the next special figure game processing, "7" is selected as the processing number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the processing number, and the process branches to the fanfare / interval processing (step S386).
Next, the signal relating to the end of opening the large winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step S817).
There are the following signals regarding the start of the opening of the big winning opening, which is in the off state.
When the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned off and step S817 is passed, the processing of the remaining ball of the large winning opening is completed.

On the other hand, if it is the final round of the jackpot game (step S811; YES), it is determined whether or not the remaining ball counter is "0" (step S818). If the remaining ball counter is not "0" (step S818; NO), since there are still remaining balls inside the variable winning device 35, the process does not proceed to the jackpot end process (step S392), and the remaining balls in the big winning opening End the process. Then, when the routine is repeated and the remaining sphere counter becomes "0" (step S818; YES), there are no remaining spheres, so "10" is set as the processing number (step S819), and the special figure game processing is performed. The processing number is saved in the number area (here, "10" is saved) (step S820). As a result, in the routine in the next special figure game process, "10" is selected as the process number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the process branches to the jackpot end process (step S389).

Next, the jackpot ending time (for example, 6100 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S821), and the signal relating to the end of opening the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step S822).
The following signals regarding the end of opening the large winning opening are in the off state.
-The special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned off. Then, the large winning opening count area is cleared (step S823). With the end of the jackpot operation, the jackpot ending time is set to produce the ending, and the number of winnings of the game ball to the jackpot (variable winning device 35) is cleared to win the next hit. It prepares for the operation (including both big hit and small hit). Next, the number of rounds region is cleared (step S824). Next, the large winning opening opening information area is cleared (step S825), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step S826). In this case, since the jackpot operation is completed and the big prize opening fraud monitoring period is entered again, a process for returning to the fraud monitoring period is performed.
Next, the value of the stop operation is saved in the accessory solenoid control pointer area (step S827), and the accessory solenoid control timer area is cleared to 0 (step S828).
Next, the value of the M1 jackpot end operation is saved in the M1 control pointer area (step S829), the M1 control timer area is cleared to 0 (step S830), and the big winning opening remaining ball processing is completed.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (step S389) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 80.
As shown in FIG. 80, in the jackpot end processing, first, "1" is set as the processing number (step S831), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (here, "1" is saved) (save). Step S832). As a result, in the routine in the next special figure game processing, "1" is selected as the processing number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call by the processing number, and the routine is branched to the special figure normal processing (step S380). In order to turn off, the normal number is saved in the game state display number 1 area (step S833), and the normal number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step S835).
Next, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step S835). As a result, information about the pachinko machine 1 such as a signal regarding the end of the jackpot is output to the external information terminal board 55 as an external information signal.
The signals related to the end of the jackpot are as follows, and all of them are in the off state.
-Turn off one jackpot signal-Turn off two jackpot signals Next, save the signal related to the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (step S835).
The signals related to the end of the jackpot are as follows, and all of them are in the off state.
・ Turn off the signal while the condition device is operating. ・ Turn off the signal when the continuous operating device is operating.

Next, the initial value is saved in the jackpot 2 control number region (step S837). In order to subtract the number of jackpot 2 control times before the determination in the special figure display processing, the value obtained by adding 1 to the specified number of times (10 times in this case), that is, "11" is saved as the initial value.
Next, the turn-off number is saved in the round display LED pointer area (step S838), and the jackpot end process is completed.

[Direction command setting process]
Next, the effect command setting process in each process will be described with reference to FIG. 81. Note that this effect command setting process is a process common to the command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.
In this effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step S841), and it is determined whether or not the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step S842). If the production serial transmission buffer is full (step S842; YES), the process returns to step S841 and the loop is repeated. As a result, the production serial transmission buffer is waited until it is not full.
On the other hand, if the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step S842; NO), the process proceeds to step S843 to write the command data (MODE (upper byte)) to the effect serial transmission buffer (step S843).

Next, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step S844), and it is determined whether or not the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step S845). If the production serial transmission buffer is full (step S845; YES), the process returns to step S844 and the loop is repeated. As a result, the production serial transmission buffer is waited until it is not full.
On the other hand, if the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step S845; NO), the process proceeds to step S846 to write the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) to the effect serial transmission buffer. After step S846, the effect command setting process ends.
As described above, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, the burden on the game control device 100 can be reduced and the analysis of the command can be made difficult. In addition, the command transmission timing can be accelerated and the number of data lines can be reduced. Further, the effect control device 300 does not need to capture commands in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced. It is also possible to send a command to the payout control device 200 by serial communication.

[Design fluctuation control process]
Next, the details of the symbol variation control processing (steps S391 and S393) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 82.
As shown in FIG. 82, in the symbol variation control process, first, in step S851, it is checked whether or not the variation control flag of the target symbol (read from (a) below) is changing.
Here, the information defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in advance is as follows.
(B) Address of the fluctuation control flag area (b) Address of the symbol display table (for fluctuation) (c) Address of the symbol display table (for stop) Also, the information defined on the symbol display table (for fluctuation) is , Is as follows.
(D) Address of variable symbol number area (e) Display data (there are as many as the number of variable symbol numbers)
(F) Address of segment area Furthermore, the information defined on the symbol display table (for stopping) is as follows.
(G) Address of stop symbol number area (H) Display data (there are as many as the number of stop symbol numbers)
(I) Address of segment area

The check result of step S851 is determined in step S852, and if it is changing (YES), the process proceeds to step S853 to acquire the symbol display table (for variation) (above (b)) corresponding to the target symbol. .. Next, in step S854, the target blinking fluctuation timer is updated by “-1”, and it is checked whether or not the time is up (blinking fluctuation timer = 0). The check result of step S854 is determined in step S855, and if the time is not up (NO), the process jumps to step S858 and the display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area ((e) above, (e), ( H)) is acquired.
Next, the process proceeds to step S859, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area ((f), (i) above), and the routine ends.
Therefore, at this time, since the fluctuation timer of the target symbol does not time up, the display data of the symbol corresponding to the fluctuation symbol number is saved in the target segment area, and the routine is repeated.

On the other hand, if it is determined (YES) that the target blinking fluctuation timer has timed up in step S855, the process proceeds to step S856 to save the initial value of the blinking control timer (for example, 100 ms) in the target blinking control timer area. Next, after updating the target variable symbol number (above (d)) by "+1" in step S857, the process proceeds to step S858, and the display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area (above (e), (H)) is acquired. Next, the process proceeds to step S859, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area ((f), (i) above), and the routine ends.
Therefore, at this time, since the target blinking fluctuation timer has timed up, the initial value of the blinking control timer is saved, the target fluctuation symbol number is updated, and the display data corresponding to the value in the target fluctuation symbol number area is displayed. It will be saved in the target segment area.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation control flag of the target symbol is not changing and is stopped in step S852 (NO), it branches to step S860 and the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the target symbol (above). (C))) is acquired, then the display data corresponding to the value of the target stop symbol number area is acquired in step S861, and then the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step S859) to perform a routine. To finish.
Therefore, at this time, since the fluctuation control flag of the target symbol is stopped during the fluctuation, the symbol display data for stopping is saved in the target segment area.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte distribution process (step S635) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 83.
The distribution process is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from a selection table such as the special figure 1 variation pattern selection table or the special figure 2 variation pattern selection table based on the variation pattern random number.
FIG. 83 is a flowchart of a 2-byte distribution process when the size of the random number used for distribution is 2 bytes. The 2-byte data is, for example, from "0" to "49999".
When this routine is started, first, in step S881, it is checked whether or not the data at the head of the target selection table is a non-distribution code.
Here, the selection table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one variation pattern group. For example, if there is no need for distribution, a code without distribution is specified at the beginning.
If it is determined that the data at the head of the selection table is a code without distribution (step S882; YES), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step S887), and the 2-byte distribution process is completed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S882 that the data at the head of the selection table is not a code without distribution (step S882; NO), one distribution value first defined in the selection table is acquired (step S883). ..
Subsequently, after subtracting the distribution value acquired in step S883 from the random number value checked in step S881 (for example, the value of the fluctuation pattern random number) to calculate a new random number value (step S884), the calculation is performed. It is determined whether or not the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step S885).

Here, if it is determined that the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step S885; NO), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step S886), the process returns to step S883 and the loop is repeated. ..
That is, in step S883, after acquiring the distribution value specified next in the selection table, a new random number value is obtained by subtracting the distribution value using the new random number value determined in step S884 as the random value. Calculate (step S884). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step S885).
The loop is repeatedly executed in step S885 until it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step S885; YES). As a result, any one fluctuation pattern group is selected from at least one fluctuation pattern group defined in the selection table.
Then, in step S885, if it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step S885; YES), the process shifts to step S887, and the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result. (Step S887) The 2-byte distribution process is completed.

In this way, for example, the variation pattern random number is used for determining whether or not to generate a reach state in the special figure variation display game, and for determining the reach variation mode in the special figure variation display game when the reach state occurs. The above-mentioned selection table corresponds to a variation group selection table such as the special figure 1 variation pattern selection table and the special figure 2 variation pattern selection table.
Then, the selection tables such as the special figure 1 variation pattern selection table and the special figure 2 variation pattern selection table are used in the special figure variation display game in which the reach state is generated in the special figure variation display game and the reach state is generated. A plurality of types of latter half fluctuation pattern groups are defined according to the type of reach (reach fluctuation mode), and the ROM 171B that stores the fluctuation group selection table is the first special figure and the second special figure in the special figure fluctuation display game. As the variation mode of the figure (identification information), a plurality of variation distribution information (variation pattern group) related to each setting of a reach-less variation mode in which a reach state does not occur and a plurality of types of reach variation modes and their respective distribution values are predetermined. It is stored in association with each other in the order of.
Therefore, by executing this distribution process, if the data at the beginning of the selection table is not a code without distribution, a new distribution value is stored based on the distribution value stored in the selection table and the random number value related to the determination. By repeating the process of calculating the random number value and determining whether or not the new random number value is less than the predetermined value "0", one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern groups is quickly set. I am trying to be able to.

[Accessory solenoid control process]
Next, the details of the accessory solenoid control process (step S394) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 84.
As shown in FIG. 84, in the accessory solenoid control process, first, it is determined whether or not the accessory solenoid control pointer is a non-update code (step S891). If the accessory solenoid control pointer is a non-update code (step S891; YES), the accessory solenoid control process ends.
On the other hand, if the accessory solenoid control pointer is not a code without update (step S891; NO), the accessory solenoid control timer is updated by "-1" (step S892), and whether the accessory solenoid control timer is "0". Whether or not it is determined (step S893). If the accessory solenoid control timer is not "0" (step S893; NO), the accessory solenoid control process is terminated and the routine is repeated.
If the accessory solenoid control timer is "0" (step S893; YES), the accessory solenoid control table is set (step S894), and the table address corresponding to the accessory solenoid control pointer is calculated (step S895).

Subsequently, the control pointer of the next operation is acquired and saved in the accessory solenoid control pointer area (step S896). Next, the control timer for the next operation is acquired and saved in the accessory solenoid control timer area (step S897). Next, the output data of the next operation is acquired and saved in the accessory solenoid output data area (step S898).
Then, when step S898 is passed, the accessory solenoid control process is terminated.
In this way, in the accessory solenoid control process, the floor accessory solenoid 61b1 for rotationally driving the floor accessory (floor portion 61) in the accessory device 51 is controlled, and the game is played by lamp notification or the like. The process of producing information that is advantageous to the person (information that teaches the timing when the gap between the floor portion 61 and the drum accessory 62 becomes smaller than the diameter of the game ball) is performed.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, the segment LED editing process (step S73) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 85.
In the following description of the flowchart, "step A" will be used as the step number.
The segment LED editing process is for processing the segment LEDs provided in the batch display device 50 (see FIGS. 2 and 35), and the batch display device 50 is a so-called special figure (this special figure) as described above. It displays, and also displays the start memory of the special figure (this special figure) on hold (in some cases, called the special figure hold display) and the game status. For example, a plurality of indicators using LEDs as a light emitting source. (For example, a display consisting of one small lamp, or, for example, a 7-segment display capable of displaying numbers and the like as the special figure). For example, among the LED segments in the batch display device 50, the one displaying the special figure 1 is arranged as the special figure 1 display, and the one displaying the special figure 2 is arranged as the special figure 2 display.
These displays are configured to be performed by, for example, a plurality of indicators (for example, one lamp or a 7-segment display) using LEDs as a light emitting source, and settings related to driving of those composed of such segment LEDs, etc. Is the segment LED editing process.

As shown in FIG. 85, in the segment LED editing process, first, the game status display table 1 is set (step A1). The game status display table 1 is for displaying the current game status, and here, data necessary for displaying the first game status display units D7 and D8 for notifying the game status such as whether or not a big hit is being made is set. Will be done. Next, the display data corresponding to the game status display number 1 is acquired and saved in the segment area (the segment area of the first game status display units D7 and D8 in the batch display device 50) (step A2).
Next, the game status display table 2 is set (step A3). The game status display table 2 is for displaying the current game status, and here, the display of the second game status display units D9, D10, and D13 to D18 for notifying the game status such as whether or not a continuous big hit is in progress. The required data is set. The continuous jackpot is a case where another special game state occurs by executing the special figure variation display game within a specified number of times (here, 10 times) from the end of the previous special game state.
Next, the display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area (the segment areas of the second game state display units D9, D10 and D13 to D18 in the batch display device 50) (step A4).

Next, the round display table is set (step A5). The round display table is for displaying the lottery result of the round lottery. For example, the data necessary for displaying the round display units D3 to D5 for notifying the number of rounds determined by the round lottery accessory (decision device 80) is displayed. Set.
Next, the display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is acquired and saved in the segment area (the segment area of the round display units D3 to D5 in the batch display device 50) (step A6).
Next, the special figure 2 hold number display table is set (step A7). The special figure 2 hold number display table is for displaying the current hold state of the special figure 2, for example, the special figure 2 hold indicator D11, which notifies the game state such as whether or not there is a hold of the special figure 2. The data required for displaying D12 is set.
Next, the display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired and saved in the segment area (the segment area of the special figure 2 hold indicators D11 and D12 in the batch display device 50) (step A8). After the step A8, the segment LED editing process is completed.

[Motor control processing]
Next, the motor control process (step S74) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 86.
In this embodiment, three accessory motors are a drum accessory motor 66 (first motor), a V movable accessory motor 71 (second motor), and a round lottery accessory motor 88 (third motor). Is placed. The drum accessory motor 66 (first motor) drives the rotation of the drum accessory 62 in the drum accessory unit 60. Further, the V movable accessory motor 71 (second motor) drives the sliding movement of the V movable member 77 in the V movable accessory unit 70. Further, the round lottery accessory motor 88 (third motor) drives the rotation of the rotating body (horizontally movable member 82 and vertically movable member 85) in the determination device 80.

As shown in FIG. 86, in the motor control process, first, the address of the head region of the motor 1 control area is prepared (step A11), the motor 1 operation table is prepared (step A12), and the motor operation editing process is performed (step A12). Step A13). The motor operation editing process in step A13 is to perform ball biting processing of the accessory motor (first motor) using the motor 1 control table.
In this way, the address of the head region of the motor 1 control region is prepared, the drive of the accessory motor (first motor) is controlled by using the motor 1 operation table, and the drum accessory 62 in the drum accessory unit 60 is controlled. The rotation will be driven.
Next, the address of the head region of the motor 2 control region is prepared (step A14), the motor 2 operation table is prepared (step A16), and the motor operation editing process is performed (step A17). The motor operation editing process in step A17 is to perform ball biting processing of the accessory motor (second motor) using the motor 2 control table.
In this way, the address of the head region of the motor 2 control region is prepared, the drive of the accessory motor (second motor) is controlled by using the motor 2 operation table, and the V movable member 77 in the V movable accessory unit 70. The slide movement of is driven.

Next, the address of the head region of the motor 3 control region is prepared (step A17), the motor 3 operation table is prepared (step A18), and the motor operation editing process is performed (step A19). The motor operation editing process in step A19 is to perform ball biting processing of the accessory motor (third motor) using the motor 3 control table.
In this way, the address of the head region of the motor 3 control region is prepared, the drive of the accessory motor (third motor) is controlled by using the motor 3 operation table, and the rotating body (horizontally movable member 82) in the determination device 80 is controlled. And the rotation of the vertically movable member 85) will be driven. After step A19, the motor control process is terminated.

[Motor operation editing process]
Next, the motor operation editing process (steps A13, A16, A19) in the above-mentioned motor control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88.
As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, in the motor operation editing process, first, it is determined whether or not the target control pointer is a non-update code (step A31). If the target control pointer is a non-update code (step A31; YES), the motor operation editing process ends.
The “target” in this process refers to the drum accessory motor 66 that is the target of control in the motor operation editing process if the motor operation editing process is the motor operation editing process in step A13, and the motor operation. If the editing process is the motor operation editing process of step A16, it refers to the V movable accessory motor 71 that is the target of control in the motor operation editing process, and if the motor operation editing process is the motor operation editing process of step A19. , Refers to the round lottery accessory motor 88 that is the target of control in the motor operation editing process.

On the other hand, if the target control pointer is not a non-update code (step A31; NO), the process proceeds to step A32, and it is determined whether or not the target control timer is "0". If the target control timer is "0" (step A32; YES), the process jumps to step A57.
If the target control pointer is not a non-update code (step A31; NO) and the target control timer is not "0" (step A32; NO), the process proceeds to step A33 and the target control timer is set to "-1". Update (step A33). Next, it is determined whether or not the target control timer is "0" (step A34), and if the target control timer is not "0" (step A34; NO), the process jumps to step A46.
On the other hand, if the target control timer is "0" (step A34; YES), the process proceeds to step A35.

Proceeding to step A35, it is determined whether or not the target control information is time value control. This is to determine that the target control information controls the time value when the motor is controlled. If the target control information is time value control (step A35; YES), the process jumps to step A57.
On the other hand, if the control information of the target is not time value control (step A35; NO), the process proceeds to step A36, and the number of ball biting processes of the target is updated by "+1". This is because the control information of the target does not control the time value (that is, the control for monitoring the state of the motor switch), but the target is set to be longer than the time value required to detect the motor switch. Since the control timer is in the updated state until it becomes "0", there is a possibility that the game ball is causing some kind of ball biting, so the number of times of the target ball biting process is updated by "+1".
This is to count the number of times when a ball bite occurs inside the accessory device 51 or the determination device 80.
When a ball bite occurs, the ball bite is often eliminated by performing a process such as rotating the accessory motor in the reverse direction.
Next, the number of times of the target ball biting process is compared with the error occurrence determination value (for example, 3 times), and it is determined whether or not the number of times of the target ball biting process is equal to or greater than the error occurrence determination value (step A37).
In the drawings (Fig. 87, etc.), it may be referred to as "ball biting", but this has the same meaning as "ball biting", and both expressions may be used in the field of gaming machines. Because there is, I do it that way.
If the number of times the target ball biting process is not equal to or greater than the error occurrence determination value (step A37; NO), the process jumps to step A43.

On the other hand, if the number of target ball biting processes is equal to or greater than the error occurrence determination value (step A37; YES), the number of target ball biting processes is set to an upper limit value (for example, upper limit value = error occurrence determination value (for example, as described above). It is limited to "3") (step A38), and it is determined whether or not the ball biting error has already occurred (step A39). If the ball biting error has not already occurred (step A39; NO), the target combination. The accessory error occurrence flag is saved in the object error status flag area (step A40), the target accessory error occurrence command is prepared (step A41), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A42). If the number of times of the target ball biting process is equal to or greater than the error occurrence determination value and the ball biting has not yet occurred, the accessory error occurrence command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 By the control of, the information display 45 is displayed with an effect corresponding to the accessory error occurrence command (for example, a display for notifying the occurrence of a ball biting error of the accessory). After step A42, the process proceeds to step A43. ..
When the process proceeds to step A43, it is determined whether or not the jackpot operation is in progress (step A43), and when the jackpot operation is not in progress (step A43; NO), the process proceeds to step A57. If it is not during the big hit, the process proceeds to step A57 in order to continue the normal operation according to the game state without performing the ball biting processing operation (see FIG. 34).
On the other hand, when the jackpot operation is in progress (step A43; YES), the target ball biting processing flag is set (step A44), and the target ball biting time pointer is loaded as the control pointer (step A45). , Step A621 (FIG. 88).
On the other hand, if the ball biting error has already occurred (step A39; YES), the process jumps to step A43 and the processes after step A43 are executed without performing the processes of steps A40 to A42.

Proceeding to step A46, it is determined whether or not the target control information is time value control. This is to determine whether the target control information controls the time value when the motor is controlled. If the target control information is time value control (step A46; YES), the process jumps to step A71.
On the other hand, if the target control information is not time value control (step A46; NO), the process proceeds to step A47, the motor control information table is set (step A47), and the table address corresponding to the control information is calculated (step A47). A48). Next, the address, monitoring bit data, and determination data of the switch control area of the motor switch to be monitored are acquired (step A49).
Here, the motor switch to be monitored is the position of the drum accessory motor switch 66a and the V movable member 77 that detect the position of the drum accessory 62 (may be the initial position of the drum accessory motor 66, etc.). (It may be the initial position of the V movable accessory motor 73, etc.) The position of the V movable accessory motor switch 73a and the horizontally movable member 82 (the position of the horizontally movable accessory 85 and the round lottery accessory motor 88). It may be the initial position or the like.) Of the motor switches such as the round lottery accessory motor switch 88a that detects the motor switch, it refers to the switch currently being monitored.

After passing through step A49, the process proceeds to step A50, and the state of the motor switch to be monitored is checked using the acquired data (step A49). As a result, the state of the switch currently being monitored is checked among the motor switches such as the accessory motor switches 66a, 73a, 88a.
Next, it is determined whether or not the next operation transition condition is satisfied (step A51). This is because the target control information is not time value control, but the motor control information table is set, the table address corresponding to the control information is calculated, the address of the switch control area of the motor switch to be monitored, the monitoring bit data, Since the determination data is acquired and the state of the motor switch to be monitored is checked using the acquired data, it is determined whether or not the transition to the next operation is possible.

If the next operation transition condition is not satisfied (step A51; NO), the process jumps to step A71 (FIG. 88). On the other hand, if the next operation transition condition is satisfied (step A51; YES), the target number of ball biting processes is cleared to "0" (step A52). Next, it is determined whether or not the ball biting error has already been cleared (step A53), and if the ball biting error has already been cleared (step A53; YES), the process jumps to step A57.
On the other hand, if the ball biting error has not already been cleared (step A53; NO), the process proceeds to step A54, the bonus error release flag is saved in the target accessory error status flag area (step A54), and the target combination The object error release command is prepared (step A55), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A56). As a result, the state of the motor switch to be monitored is checked using the acquired data, and if the transition condition to the next operation is satisfied, the number of ball biting processes of the target is cleared to "0". The target character error release command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display corresponding to the character error release command is displayed on the information display 45 by the control of the effect control device 300 (for example, the ball biting error of the character). (Display notifying the release of) will be performed. After passing through step A56, the process proceeds to step A57.

When the process proceeds to step A57, the target control pointer is loaded (step A57), and it is determined whether or not the loaded control pointer performs the ball biting return operation (step A58). If the control pointer performs the ball bite return operation (step A58; YES), the target ball bite return processing flag is cleared (step A59), and the target ball bite return pointer is loaded as the control pointer (step). A60). After passing through step A60, the process proceeds to step A61.
On the other hand, if the control pointer does not perform the ball biting return operation (step A58; NO), the process jumps to step A61.
Proceeding to step A61, the address of the motor operation table corresponding to the control pointer is calculated (step A61), the control pointer is acquired, saved in the target control pointer area (step A62), and the control timer is acquired. , Save in the target control timer area (step A63).

Next, the control information is acquired and saved in the target control information area (step A64), and the excitation information is acquired and saved in the target excitation information area (step A65) to clear the target excitation timer area. (Step A66).
Here, the excitation information is information that excites the target motor (motor switches such as accessory motor switches 66a, 73a, 88a), that is, turns on (rotationally drives).
Next, it is determined whether or not the control information is time value control (step A67). This is to determine that the target control information controls the time value when the motor is controlled. If the target control information is time value control (step A67; YES), the process jumps to step A70. Then, in step A70, the non-updated code is saved in the target ball biting time pointer area (step A70), and then the process proceeds to step A71.
On the other hand, if the control information is not time value control (step A67; NO), the process proceeds to step A68, the ball biting time pointer is acquired, and the ball biting time pointer area is saved (step A68). Next, the control pointer before the update is saved in the target ball biting return pointer area (step A69), and then the process proceeds to step A71.
Here, the processes from step A61 to step A69 set the value of the return point when returning from the ball biting process.

When the process proceeds from step A69 or step A70 to step A71, it is determined whether or not the target excitation timer is "0" (step A71). If the target excitation timer is not "0" (step A71; NO), the target excitation timer is updated by "-1" (step A72), and it is determined whether or not the target excitation timer has become "0". (Step A73). If the target excitation timer is not "0" (step A73; N0), the motor operation editing process ends.
On the other hand, when the target excitation timer is "0" (step A71; YES) or when the target excitation timer is "0" (step A73; YES), the process jumps to step A74.
When the target excitation timer is determined to be "0" in step A71 or the target excitation timer is determined to be "0" in step A73, the target excitation timer is "0" in both cases, so step A74. Proceed to, and it is determined whether or not the target excitation information is stop information (step A74). If the target excitation information is stop information (step A74; YES), the output off data is saved in the target excitation data area (step A75), and then the motor operation editing process ends.

On the other hand, if the target excitation information is not stop information (step A74; NO), the process proceeds to step A76, the motor excitation information table is set (step A76), and the address of the table corresponding to the target excitation information is calculated. (Step A77), the excitation timer is acquired and saved in the target excitation timer area (step A78).
Next, the excitation counter addition value is acquired and added to the target excitation counter (step A79). Next, the value after addition is corrected to the range of "0" to "3" (step A80).
Here, when the target motor (motor switches such as accessory motor switches 66a, 73a, 88a) is rotated clockwise (CW rotation), "+1" and "+2" are added values, and the motor is counterclockwise. In the case of rotation (CCW rotation), "-1" and "-2" are added values.
This is to eliminate the ball biting by rotating the accessory motor in the reverse direction or the forward rotation when the ball biting occurs.
After passing through step A80, the process proceeds to step A81, the corrected value is saved in the target excitation counter area (step A81), and the motor excitation data table is set (step A82). Next, the address of the table corresponding to the target excitation counter is calculated (step A83), and then the output data is acquired and saved in the target excitation data area (step A84). After step A84, the motor operation editing process is completed.

[Abnormal discharge monitoring process]
Next, the abnormal discharge monitoring process (step S75) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 89.
As shown in FIG. 89, in the abnormal discharge monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the left large winning opening switch 103 (step A111). This means that the game control device 100 has an input signal from the left grand prize opening switch 103 that has detected the winning of the variable winning device 35 (that is, the left grand winning slot switch 103 has won the variable winning device 35). Was detected).
Here, in order to detect the game ball flowing into the winning space 41 of the variable winning device 35, the left large winning opening switch 103 and the right large winning opening switch 104 are provided, and the variable winning device 35 is provided to the outside. Remaining ball discharge port switches 112 and 113 are provided to detect the game balls to be discharged.
In this case, the function of monitoring the remaining balls is to monitor whether or not the game balls that have won the variable winning device 35 have escaped to the outside and remain inside the variable winning device 35.
In this embodiment, the above mechanism is utilized as a monitoring function for abnormal discharge, in addition to the monitoring function for remaining spheres. That is, apart from monitoring whether or not the variable winning device 35 remains inside, the remaining ball discharge port switches 112 and 113 even though the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are not open. When it detects the discharge of the game ball, it is an abnormal discharge, for example, an illegal prize to the variable winning device 35 (that is, the left grand prize opening switch 103 or the right grand prize opening switch 104 has detected the winning of the game ball. (A state in which the discharge of residual spheres is detected).
The abnormal discharge monitoring process shown in FIG. 89 monitors the abnormal discharge of the game ball as described above (for example, illegal winning of the variable winning device 35).

Returning to the flow, if there is an input to the left large winning opening switch 103 (step A111; YES), the abnormal discharge counter is updated by "+1" (step A112), and then the process proceeds to step A113. On the other hand, if there is no input to the left large winning opening switch 103 (step A111; NO), the process jumps to step A113.
Proceeding to step A113, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the right large winning opening switch 104 (step A113). This means that the game control device 100 has an input signal from the right grand prize opening switch 104 that detects the winning of the variable winning device 35 (that is, the right grand winning slot switch 104 wins the variable winning device 35). Was detected).
If there is an input to the right large winning opening switch 104 (step A113; YES), the abnormal discharge counter is updated by "+1" (step A114), and then the process proceeds to step A115. On the other hand, if there is no input to the right grand prize opening switch 104 (step A113; NO), the process jumps to step A115.

Proceeding to step A115, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the discharge port switch 1 (first remaining ball discharge port switch 112) (step A115). This means that the game control device 100 has an input signal from the first remaining ball discharge port switch 112 that detects the state in which the game ball is discharged from the variable winning device 35 (that is, the first remaining ball discharge). Did the exit switch 112 detect the game ball discharged from the variable winning device 35?).
If there is an input to the discharge port switch 1 (first remaining ball discharge port switch 112) (step A115; YES), it is determined whether or not the abnormal discharge counter is “0” (step A116).
Here, if the abnormal discharge counter is "0", the first remaining ball discharge port switch 112 is a game even though there is no prize in the variable winning device 35 through the processes of steps A111 to A114 described above. Since the discharge of the ball is detected, there is a possibility that, for example, the variable winning device 35 is illegally won. Therefore, if the abnormal discharge counter is "0" (step A116; YES), the process branches to step A121.
On the other hand, if the abnormal discharge counter is not "0" (step A116; NO), the abnormal discharge counter is updated to "-1" (step A117), and then the process proceeds to step A118.
If there is no input to the discharge port switch 1 (first remaining ball discharge port switch 112) (step A115; NO), the process jumps to step A118.

Proceeding to step A118, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the discharge port switch 2 (second residual ball discharge port switch 113) (step A118). This means that the game control device 100 has an input signal from the second remaining ball discharge port switch 113 that detects the state in which the game ball is discharged from the variable winning device 35 (that is, the second remaining ball discharge). Did the exit switch 113 detect the game ball discharged from the variable winning device 35?).
If there is an input to the discharge port switch 2 (second residual ball discharge port switch 113) (step A118; YES), it is determined whether or not the abnormal discharge counter is “0” (step A119).
Here, if the abnormal discharge counter is "0", there is no winning in the variable winning device 35 through the processes of steps A111 to A114 described above, or there is a winning in the variable winning device 35. 1 Remaining ball discharge port switch 112 detects the discharge of the game ball and the abnormal discharge counter returns to "0". Even though the winning process has been normally completed, the second remaining ball discharge counter. Since the ball discharge port switch 113 has detected the discharge of the game ball, there is a possibility that, for example, the variable winning device 35 may be illegally won. Therefore, if the abnormal discharge counter is "0" (step A119; YES), the process branches to step A121.
On the other hand, if the abnormal discharge counter is not "0" (step A119; NO), the abnormal discharge counter is updated to "-1" (step A120), and then the abnormal discharge monitoring process is terminated.
Further, even when there is no input to the discharge port switch 2 (second residual ball discharge port switch 113) (step A118; NO), the abnormal discharge monitoring process is terminated.

If it is determined that there is a possibility of abnormal discharge and the process proceeds to step A121, an abnormal discharge error flag area is prepared (step A121) and an abnormal discharge occurrence command is prepared (step A122). Next, the game stop error status update process is performed (step A123). As a result, the abnormal discharge error flag is set, the game state in which the abnormal discharge occurs is set based on the abnormal discharge occurrence command, the game stop error status is updated, and the error is notified. After passing through step A123, the abnormal discharge monitoring process is terminated.
As described above, when the remaining ball discharge port switches 112 and 113 detect the discharge of the game ball even though the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are not open, it is an abnormal discharge, for example, the variable winning device 35. (That is, the left grand prize opening switch 103 and the right grand prize opening switch 104 do not detect the winning of the game ball, but the discharge of the remaining ball is detected), so the game is stopped. The process of updating the error status is performed.

[Game stop error status update process]
Next, the game stop error status update process (step A123) in the abnormal discharge monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. 90.
As shown in FIG. 90, in the game stop error status update process, first, the error occurrence flag is saved in the target error flag area (step A131), and it is determined whether or not the game stop error has occurred. (Step A132). If an error to stop the game has occurred (step A132; NO), the game stop error status update process is terminated. Therefore, in this case, a serious error such as stopping the game has occurred, and the game is stopped.
On the other hand, if the error of stopping the game has not occurred (step A132; YES), the error operation flag is saved in the game stop error state area (step A133). Next, the timer initial value (for example, 10s) is saved in the game stop error control timer area (step A134). Next, the effect command setting process is performed (step A135). As a result, the prepared error command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the error effect display corresponding to the error command prepared by the information display 45 is performed under the control of the effect control device 300. After step A135, the game stop error status update process is terminated.

[Fraud monitoring process]
Next, the fraud monitoring process (step S76) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 91.
As shown in FIG. 91, in the fraud monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the magnetic sensor 115 is on (step A141). This is to determine whether the magnetic sensor 115 is on, that is, has detected abnormal magnetism from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 115 and taken into the third input port 163 (input port 3).
When the magnetic sensor 115 is on (step A141; YES), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that measures the detection period of abnormal magnetism is updated by "+1" (step A142). It is determined whether the value of the timer is less than the specified time (for example, 32 ms) (step A143).

When the value of the magnet fraud monitoring timer is less than the specified time (step A143; YES), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period (for example, 32 ms), the magnet fraud flag area is prepared (step A144). ), A magnet fraud occurrence command is prepared (step A145), and subsequently, a game stop error status update process is performed (step A146). As a result, the occurrence of magnet fraud is confirmed, and the prepared magnet fraud generation command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the information display 45 controls the error corresponding to the magnet fraud generation command under the control of the effect control device 300. The production display will be performed. After step A146, 1 is saved in the magnet fraud monitoring timer area (step A147), and the process proceeds to step A148.
On the other hand, if the magnetic sensor 115 is not turned on in step A141 (step A141; NO), it is determined that magnet fraud has not occurred, and the magnet fraud monitoring timer area is cleared to 0 (step A149). Then, the process proceeds to step A148.
Further, if the magnet fraud monitoring timer is not less than the specified time in step A143 (step A143; NO), the process jumps to step A148 and repeats the routine.

Proceeding to step A148, the panel radio wave sensor 114 determines whether or not it is on (step A148). This is because the panel radio wave sensor 114 is on, that is, an abnormal radio wave to the game board 30 is detected from the state of the detection signal output from the panel radio wave sensor 114 and taken into the third input port 163 (input port 3) ( That is, whether or not the board radio wave fraud has occurred) is determined.
When the board radio wave sensor 114 is on (step A148; YES), that is, when an abnormal board radio wave is detected, a board radio wave fraud flag area is prepared (step A150) and a board radio wave fraud generation command is prepared (step A150). Step A151), and subsequently, the game stop error status update correction is performed (step A152). As a result, the prepared board radio wave fraud occurrence command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the information display 45 performs an error effect display corresponding to the board radio wave fraud generation command under the control of the effect control device 300. become. After passing through step A152, the process proceeds to step A153.
On the other hand, if the panel radio wave sensor 114 is not on (step A148; NO), that is, if no abnormal panel radio wave is detected, the process jumps to step A153.

Proceeding to step A153, it is determined whether or not the glass frame or the main body frame is being opened (step A153). This determines whether the glass frame opening error is in progress based on whether or not the opening of the glass frame 5 is detected by the glass frame opening detection switch 117 and, for example, an error flag (error occurrence flag) is set. Similarly, the opening of the main body frame (front frame 4) is detected by the main body frame opening detection switch 118, and for example, it is determined whether the main body frame opening error is in progress based on whether or not an error flag (error occurrence flag) is set.
If the glass frame or the main body frame is being opened (step A153; YES), the timer initial value is saved in the vibration fraud monitoring invalid timer area (step A154). For example, 3s is set as the initial value of this timer. Therefore, vibration for 3 seconds after closing the glass frame 5 or the main body frame (front frame 4) is not treated as illegal vibration. After step A154, the vibration fraud monitoring timer area is cleared to 0 (step A155), and the process proceeds to step A156. On the other hand, if the glass frame or the main body frame is not open (step A153; NO), the process jumps to step A156.

Proceeding to step A156, if the vibration fraud monitoring invalid timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A156). Next, it is determined whether or not the vibration fraud monitoring invalid timer is "0" (step A157), and if the vibration fraud monitoring invalid timer is not "0" (step A157; NO), the fraud monitoring process is terminated. Repeat the routine.
On the other hand, if the vibration fraud monitoring invalid timer is "0" (step A157; YES), the vibration sensor 116 determines whether or not it is on (step A158). This is because the vibration sensor 116 is on, that is, has detected an illegal vibration to the game board 30 from the state of the detection signal output from the vibration sensor 116 and taken into the third input port 163 (input port 3) (that is,). Whether or not vibration fraud has occurred) is determined.
If the vibration sensor 116 is not on (step A158; NO), that is, if no illegal vibration is detected, the vibration fraud monitoring timer area is cleared to 0 (step A166), and the fraud monitoring process ends.

On the other hand, when the vibration sensor 116 is on (step A158; YES), that is, when an illegal vibration is detected, it is determined whether or not the special figure small hit is in progress (step A159). If the special figure small hit is not in progress (step A159; NO), the vibration fraud monitoring timer area is cleared to 0 (step A166), and the fraud monitoring process ends.
If the special figure small hit is in progress (step A159; YES), it is determined that the vibration is illegal, the process proceeds to step A160, the vibration fraud monitoring timer is updated by +1 and the vibration fraud monitoring timer is less than the specified time (for example, 20 ms). If it is determined whether or not there is (step A161) and the vibration fraud monitoring timer is not less than the specified time (step A161; NO), the fraud monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the vibration fraud monitoring timer is less than the specified time (step A161; YES), 1 is saved in the vibration fraud monitoring timer area (step S162), and the vibration fraud flag area is prepared (step A163). This is because the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened during the special figure small hit, so that the game board 30 is hit and vibrated with the intention of aiming for the big hit (V winning) at that time. This is because the vibration sensor 116 is determined to be an illegal vibration, especially when the vibration sensor 116 is turned on during a small hit of the special figure, because the vibration is often illegal.
Next, a vibration fraud occurrence command is prepared (step A164), and subsequently, a game stop error status update process is performed (step A165). As a result, the prepared vibration fraud generation command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the information display 45 is controlled by the effect control device 300 to display an error effect corresponding to the vibration fraud generation command. .. After step A165, the fraud monitoring process ends.

[Launch control process]
Next, the firing control process (step S77) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 92.
As shown in FIG. 92, in the launch control process, first, it is determined whether or not an error of stopping the game has occurred (step A171). If an error to stop the game has occurred (step A171; YES), it is determined whether or not the special figure game is in the process of turning on the special figure power (step A172). If the special figure game is in the process of turning on the special figure power (step A172; YES), the game branches to step A175 and saves the output data of the firing stop in the firing permission signal area (step A175). As a result, the launch of the game ball is stopped. After step A175, the launch control process ends.
This means that in the power-on operation process, the accessory motor in the accessory device 51 and the accessory motor in the determination device 80 are returned to their initial positions as the power is turned on, so that the game can be started. Therefore, when the special figure game is in the process of turning on the special figure power, the firing of the game ball is stopped.

If the special figure game is not in the special figure power-on operation process (step A172; NO), the process proceeds to step A173, and it is determined whether or not any of the motors is in the ball biting process.
Here, the ball biting processing operation of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77) (see FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b)), the ball biting processing operation of the drum accessory 62 (see FIG. 34 (c)), and When any of the ball biting processing operations (see FIG. 34 (d)) of the round lottery accessory (determining device 80) is performed, it is determined that the ball biting processing is in progress. If any of the motors is in the ball biting process (step A173; YES), the motor branches to step A175 and saves the output data of the firing stop in the firing permission signal region (step A175). As a result, the launch of the game ball is stopped. After step A175, the launch control process ends.
This means that when a ball bite occurs inside the accessory device 51 or the determination device 80, for example, the accessory motor of the accessory device 51 is rotated in the reverse direction to eliminate the ball bite, or the role of the determination device 80, for example. This is because the object motor is rotated in the reverse direction to eliminate the ball biting, so that the launch of the game ball is stopped during such a ball biting processing operation. As described above, in the present embodiment, the firing of the game ball is stopped during the ball biting processing operation, but it is also possible to configure the game ball so as not to be stopped during the ball biting processing operation.

If any of the motors is not in the ball biting process (step A173; NO), the process proceeds to step A174, and the launch permission output data is saved in the launch permission signal region (step A174). As a result, the launch of the game ball is permitted. After step A174, the launch control process ends. Therefore, the error of stopping the game has not occurred (step A171; YES), the special figure game is not in the special figure power-on operation process (step A173; NO), and the ball biting of any of the accessory motors. If the process is not in progress (step A173; NO), the launch of the game ball is permitted.
On the other hand, if an error to stop the game occurs in step A171 (step A171; NO), the game branches to step A175 and the output data of the firing stop is saved in the firing permission signal area (step A175). As a result, the launch of the game ball is stopped. After step A175, the launch control process ends.

[External information editing process]
Next, the external information editing process (step S78) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 and 94.
The external information editing process is based on the monitoring results of the payout command transmission process (step S65), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S67), the remaining ball monitoring process (step A68), the fraud monitoring process (step S76), and the like. Then, information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device is created and set in an output buffer.
As shown in FIGS. 93 and 94, in the external information editing process, first, it is determined whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring (step A181). This determines whether the glass frame opening error is occurring based on whether or not the opening of the glass frame 5 is detected by the glass frame opening detection switch 117 and, for example, an error flag (error occurrence flag) is set.
If the glass frame opening error is not occurring (step A181; NO), it is subsequently determined whether or not the main body frame opening error is occurring (step A182). This determines whether the main body frame opening error is occurring based on whether or not the opening of the main body frame (front frame 4) is detected by the main body frame opening detection switch 118 and, for example, an error flag (error occurrence flag) is set. ..
If the main body frame opening error is not occurring (step A182; NO), the process proceeds to step A183, and the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step A183). The door / frame opening signal is an opening signal of the glass frame 5 (door) and the front frame 4 (frame). As a result, the off-data of the door / frame opening signal is output to the outside via the external information terminal plate 152.
Next, the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step A184). As a result, the off-data of the security signal is output to the outside via the external information terminal plate 152. After passing through step A184, the process proceeds to step A185.

On the other hand, when the glass frame opening error is occurring (Tep A181; YES) and the main body frame opening error is occurring (step A182; YES), in any case, the door branches to step A186. The on-data of the frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step A186). As a result, the on-data of the door / frame opening signal is output to the outside via the external information terminal plate 152.
Next, the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step A187). This is to output the game machine error state signal to the outside when the game machine error state of opening the door or the frame occurs. As a result, the on-data of the game machine error status signal is output to the outside via the external information terminal plate 152. After passing through step A187, the process proceeds to step A185.

Proceeding to step A185, if the security signal control timer is not "0", "-1" is updated. The security signal control timer is for outputting a security signal on for a predetermined time when the power is turned on by clearing the RAM, and the timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is set in step S27. The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0".
Next, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step A188). The security signal control timer is for outputting a security signal on for a predetermined time when the power is turned on by clearing the RAM, and the timer initial value, for example, 256 ms, is set as the timer initial value in the RAM initial value setting process (for example, step S27). Set.
If the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step A188; YES), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, it is determined whether or not the frame radio wave is being illegally generated (step A188; YES). Step A189).
Unless the frame radio wave is illegally generated (step A189; NO), the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step A190). As a result, the off-data of the security signal is output to the outside via the external information terminal plate 152. After passing through step A190, the process proceeds to step A191.
On the other hand, if the frame radio wave is illegally generated (step A189; YES), the process branches to step A192 and the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step A192). As a result, the on-data of the security signal is output to the outside via the external information terminal plate 152. After passing through step A192, the process proceeds to step A191.

Proceeding to step A191, it is determined whether or not a switch abnormality is occurring (step A191). The switch abnormality occurrence here is an error such as a connector disconnection based on the switch abnormality detection signal 1 or the switch abnormality detection signal 2 described above. That is, as shown in FIG. 35, the switch abnormality detection signal 1 is output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a. Further, as shown in FIG. 35, the switch abnormality detection signal 2 is output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121b.
An error such as a connector disconnection based on the switch abnormality detection signal 1 is called "abnormality 1". Further, an error such as a connector disconnection based on the switch abnormality detection signal 2 is referred to as "abnormality 2".
In the process of step A191, it is determined that a switch abnormality is occurring regardless of whether "abnormality 1" or "abnormality 2" occurs.
If the switch error is not occurring (step A191; NO), it is subsequently determined whether or not an accessory error is occurring (step A193).
In this embodiment, the accessory device 51 and the determination device 80 are provided as the target accessory devices, and among them, the drum accessory motor 66 and the V movable accessory motor 73 are arranged in the accessory device 51. However, a round lottery accessory motor 88 is arranged in the determination device 80. Therefore, the occurrence of the accessory error here means that the accessory error is occurring regardless of the error of the drum accessory motor 66, the V movable accessory motor 73, or the round lottery accessory motor 88. judge.

If no accessory error is occurring (step A193; NO), it is subsequently determined whether or not a residual ball error is occurring (step A194).
In this embodiment, the monitoring function of the remaining balls is to monitor whether or not the game balls that have won the variable winning device 35 have escaped to the outside and remain inside the variable winning device 35. Therefore, Remaining ball discharge port switches 112 and 113 are provided in order to detect the game balls discharged to the outside from the variable winning device 35 (details as described above). Then, if there are remaining balls inside the variable winning device 35 even after a predetermined period of time or longer, it is determined that a remaining ball error is occurring.
If the remaining ball error is not occurring (step A194; NO), the process proceeds to step A195.
On the other hand, if a switch abnormality is occurring (step A191; YES), a accessory error is occurring (step A193; YES), or a remaining ball error is occurring (step A194; YES), either If even one determination is YES, the process proceeds to step A196, and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step A196). This is because the game machine error status signal is output to the outside when a game machine error state such as a switch error occurrence, a bonus error occurrence, or a remaining ball error occurrence occurs. As a result, the on-data of the game machine error status signal is output to the outside via the external information terminal plate 152. After passing through step A196, the process proceeds to step A195.

Proceeding to step A195, the following determination processes are performed in each step of step A197, step A198, step A199, step A200, step A201, and step A202, including step A195.
(B) Step A195: Determine whether or not abnormal discharge is occurring.
(B) Step A197: It is determined whether or not the magnet is illegally generated.
(C) Step A198: It is determined whether or not the board radio wave is being illegally generated.
(D) Step A199: It is determined whether or not vibration fraud is occurring.
(E) Step A200: It is determined whether or not a large winning opening fraud is occurring.
(F) Step A201: It is determined whether or not an abnormal start opening winning prize is occurring.
(G) Step A202: It is determined whether or not the starting port ball is clogged.
The abnormal discharge in step A195 is an abnormality in which the remaining ball discharge port switches 112 and 113 detect the discharge of the game ball even though the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize device 35 are not open, and the variable prize is won. This is due to an illegal winning act on the device 35.
The magnet fraud in step A197 is a case where the magnetic sensor 115 is turned on and abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period (for example, 32 ms).
The board radio wave fraud in step A198 is a case where the board radio wave sensor 114 is turned on and an abnormal radio wave is detected for the game board 30.
The vibration fraud in step A199 is a case where the vibration sensor 116 is turned on and an illegal vibration to the game board 30 is detected.
The large winning opening fraud in step A200 is a case where the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 as the large winning opening are illegally opened to win the game ball.
The start port abnormal winning in step A201 is a case where an abnormally large number of winnings are detected in at least one of the first starting winning openings 33a and 33b and the second starting winning opening 34 within a predetermined time.
The starting port ball clogging in step A202 is a case where an abnormality such as a detection state (on state) continuing for a predetermined time or longer is detected at at least one of the first starting winning openings 33a and 33b and the second starting winning opening 34. That is.
It should be noted that the determination that these abnormalities are occurring is determined based on, for example, whether or not an error flag (error occurrence flag) is set.

Next, the determination result of step A195 is NO, the determination result of step A197 is NO, the determination result of step A198 is NO, the determination result of step A199 is NO, the determination result of step A200 is NO, and the determination result of step A201 is NO. If the determination result in step A202 is NO, the process proceeds to step A203, and the off-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step A203). Here, the game machine error status signal indicating that the game machine error state such as abnormal discharge, magnet fraud, board radio wave fraud, vibration fraud, large winning opening fraud, starting port abnormal winning, and starting port ball clogging has not occurred is externally output. This is to output to. As a result, the off-data of the game machine error status signal is output to the outside via the external information terminal plate 152. After passing through step A203, the process proceeds to step A206.
On the other hand, if any one of step A195, step A197, step A198, step A199, step A200, step A201, and step A202 gives a YES determination, the process branches to step A204. This is to notify the fraud to the outside if there is a determination result that any one of step A195, step A197, step A198, step A199, step A200, step A201, and step A202 is fraudulent. ..
Proceeding to step A204, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step A204). As a result, the on-data of the security signal is output to the outside via the external information terminal plate 152. Next, the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step A205). This is a game when a game machine error state occurs in which any one of abnormal discharge, magnet fraud, board radio wave fraud, vibration fraud, big winning opening fraud, starting opening abnormal winning, and starting mouth ball clogging occurs. This is to output the machine error status signal to the outside. As a result, the on-data of the game machine error status signal is output to the outside via the external information terminal plate 152. After passing through step A205, the process proceeds to step A206.

Proceeding to step A206, the address of the main prize ball signal control area is prepared (step A206), the on-data of the main prize ball signal is prepared (step A207), and then the pulse signal editing process is performed (step A208). ). This means that the game control device 100 outputs one pulse of the main prize ball signal every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). In addition, the signal is edited.
Next, the address of the prize winning number signal control area is prepared (step A209), the on-data of the prize winning number signal is prepared (step A210), and then the pulse signal editing process is performed (step A211). In this method, the game control device 100 edits the signal such that one pulse of the bonus winning number signal is output every time the winning prize is counted. In addition, the accessory prize is a prize in the variable prize device 35 as a large prize opening.

Next, the address of the start port 1 signal control area is prepared (step A212), the on-data of the start port 1 signal is prepared (step A213), and then the pulse signal editing process is performed (step A214). In this method, the game control device 100 edits the signal such that one pulse of the start port 1 signal is output every time the winning of the start port 1 is counted. The start port 1 signal is a signal corresponding to winning a prize in the first start winning openings 33a and 33b.
Next, the address of the start port 2 signal control area is prepared (step A215), the on-data of the start port 2 signal is prepared (step A216), and then the pulse signal editing process is performed (step A217). In this method, the game control device 100 edits the signal such that one pulse of the start port 2 signal is output each time the winning of the start port 2 is counted. The start port 2 signal is a signal corresponding to winning a prize in the second start winning port 34.

Next, if the bonus count control timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A218). The bonus number control timer is a timer for controlling to output a signal for a predetermined time (for example, 128 ms) each time the large winning opening is opened by the special figure small hit (that is, the opening of the large winning opening in the starting game). Therefore, the accessory release number signal is output as 1 pulse when the accessory is released once and 2 pulses when the accessory is released twice. Next, it is determined whether or not the bonus number control timer is "0" (step A219), and if the bonus count control timer is "0" (step A219; YES), the off data of the bonus number signal is Is saved in the external information output data area (step A220). As a result, the off-data of the accessory number signal is output to the outside via the external information terminal plate 152. After passing through step A220, the external information editing process ends.
On the other hand, if the bonus count control timer is not "0" (step A219; NO), the on-data of the bonus count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step A221). As a result, the on-data of the accessory number signal is output to the outside via the external information terminal plate 152. When step A221 is passed, the external information editing process is terminated.

[Pulse signal editing process]
Next, the pulse signal editing process (step A208, step A211, step A214, step A217) in the external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG. 95 (a).
As shown in FIG. 95 (a), in the pulse signal editing process, first, if the output control timer of the target signal is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A231). The minimum value of the output control timer of the target signal is set to "0".
The target signal is which of the main prize ball signal, the accessory winning number signal, the start port 1 signal, and the start port 2 signal described with reference to FIG. 94 is the edit target of the pulse signal editing process this time. It is a signal that points to.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the output control timer of the target signal is "0" (step A232). Then, if the value of the output control timer of the target signal is "0" (step A232; YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not the number of outputs of the target signal is "0" (step A233). .. If the number of outputs of the target signal is not "0" (step A233; NO), the number of outputs of the target signal is updated by "-1" (step A234).
Next, the initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is saved in the output control timer area of the target signal (step A235). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is the sum of the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the main prize ball signal. The time (eg, 192 ms) is set. After that, the on-data that turns on the target signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A236), and the pulse signal editing process is completed.

On the other hand, when the number of output times of the target signal is "0" (step A233; YES), the off data for turning off the target signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A233; YES). Step A238), the pulse signal editing process is completed.
When the value of the output control timer of the target signal is not "0" (step A232; NO), it is determined whether or not the output control timer of the target signal is in the output on section (step A237). The fact that the output control timer of the target signal is in the output on section means that the value of the output control timer of the target signal is a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms) or more.
When the output control timer of the target signal is in the output on section (step A237; YES), the process shifts to step A236. When the output control timer of the target signal is not in the output on section (step A237; NO), the off data for turning off the target signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step A238), the pulse signal editing process is completed.

Here, a specific example of the pulse signal editing process when the target signal is, for example, the main prize ball signal will be described. Even if the target signal is a winning number signal for a prize other than the main prize ball signal, a start port 1 signal, or a start port 2 signal, the same pulse signal editing process is performed.
That is, when the target signal is the main prize ball signal, the main prize ball signal is an external device (for example, an external device) in which the main prize ball signal is one pulse for every 10 scheduled payouts of the prize balls from the game control device 100. It is output to the management device). The payout control device 200 outputs a 1-pulse prize ball signal generated for every 10 payouts to an external device (for example, an external management device).
That is, the game control device 100 (main board) updates the number of main prize balls signal output by "+1" every time 10 payout schedules (every time a payout command is transmitted) (subroutine in the payout command transmission process), and then The main prize ball number signal is output as many times as the updated (set) number of outputs. Then, with respect to the main prize ball signal output for each 10 payout schedule as described above, the prize ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 (payout board) when 10 pieces are actually paid out. By matching the schedule with the result, it is possible to deal with fraudulent payouts.

In addition, from the main prize ball signal, it becomes possible to determine when a prize has occurred with a management device as an external device, which also helps the policy in hall sales.
Specifically, it can be determined whether the prize is a prize generated during a big hit or a prize generated during a normal game. For example, if you have a lot of prizes during a big hit, it is okay to have a lot of prizes, but if you have a lot of prizes during a normal game, you can judge that the nail adjustment is too sweet, which helps the policy in hall sales. become.
On the other hand, if the main prize ball signal is not output to the external device and only the prize ball signal from the payout control device 200 that is output when the payout is completed, the ball runs out during the big hit and the payout is performed. If the supply is delayed and the prize is paid out after the big hit, it will not be possible to determine when the prize has occurred.
Therefore, if the supply is delayed and the payment is made after the big hit, it means that there was a large amount of prizes (payout) during the normal game, and there is a possibility that the sales data will be incomplete. There is sex.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, both the main prize ball signal and the prize ball signal from the payout control device 200 are used in combination, and the main prize ball signal is output immediately after winning a prize, as described above. There are no problems.

[Main prize ball signal transmission timing chart]
Next, a specific example of transmitting the main prize ball signal will be described with reference to the timing chart shown in FIG. 95 (b).
In FIG. 95 (b), when the target signal is the main prize ball signal, the main prize ball signal is an external main prize ball signal of 1 pulse for every 10 scheduled payouts of the prize balls from the game control device 100. It is output to a device (for example, an external management device).
Here, the 1-pulse main prize ball signal has a main prize ball signal on state (for example, high level) of 128 ms as shown in FIG. 95 (b) with the main prize ball signal as an output signal. The one-pulse signal is formed in such a manner that the off state (for example, low level) time of the main prize ball signal is 64 ms. Therefore, 128 ms + 64 ms = 192 ms for the entire pulse.
The value of the output control timer of the target main prize ball signal is "48" when the main prize ball signal is turned on, "16" when the main prize ball signal is turned off, and further, the main prize ball signal is turned off. Is set to "0" at the final timing of continuation.

In this way, one pulse of the main prize ball signal is formed in the manner shown in FIG. 95 (b), and in the game control device 100, one pulse of the main prize ball signal is generated for every ten scheduled payouts of the prize balls. It will be output to an external device. It should be noted that the payout control device 200 also outputs a 1-pulse prize ball signal generated for every 10 payouts to the external device.
Therefore, the game control device 100 (main board) outputs a 1-pulse main prize ball signal for each scheduled payout (every time a payout command is transmitted), and the payout control device 200 (payout board) actually outputs 10 pieces. When the payout is made, a prize ball signal is transmitted, so that the schedule and the result can be matched, and an illegal payout can be dealt with.
In addition, even if a prize is won during the big hit period, if the payout is delayed due to the ball running out, etc., and the payout is made after the big hit ends, it is not possible to judge whether or not the ball is paid out by the big hit only by the conventional prize ball signal. However, in this embodiment, the addition of the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning enables the hall management device to collect (determine) accurate information.

E. Outline of the game Next, the outline of the game performed by the pachinko machine 1 of this example and the flow of the game will be described.
At the beginning of the game (or before the start of the game), the customer waiting state (during demonstration) is in progress, and a command for commanding the display of the customer waiting screen is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. The information display 45 displays the effect of waiting for customers.
Then, in order for the player to start the game, when the launch operation handle 11 is operated, the game ball at the launch position is driven into the game area 32 via the guide rail 31, and the driven game ball is first started. When any of the winning openings 33a and 33b is won, the batch display device 50 displays the variation of the special figure 1, and the information display 45 displays the variation of the decorative special figure. Further, the game balls that have come off without winning the first starting winning openings 33a and 33b flow into the out hole 37.
When a game ball wins in any of the first start winning openings 33a and 33b, the special figure 1 of the batch display device 50 fluctuates for a predetermined time, and the variable winning device 35 (in the result mode of all the stop symbols) The movable members 43a and 43b of the large winning opening) perform the opening operation once.

Further, when the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 34, the special figure 2 of the batch display device 50 fluctuates for a predetermined time, and the movable member 43a of the variable winning device 35 changes in the result mode of all the stop symbols. , 43b perform the opening operation twice.
The small hit is the opening of the large winning opening (variation of the variable winning device 35) when the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening 33a, 33b, all the starting winning openings of the second starting winning opening 34) is won. This is the operation from the opening of the movable members 43a and 43b of the winning device 35) until the game ball passes through the specific area and wins the V prize. If the V prize is not won, all the opening operations are completed and the game is small. It will be until the winning ending time elapses.
As described above, in the case of a small hit of opening once, the movable members 43a and 43b open (convert to the second state) and close again after a predetermined time (here, after 400 ms). The opening operation of a predetermined mode such as is performed once. When the movable members 43a and 43b are opened twice, the movable members 43a and 43b sandwich the opening operation in a predetermined mode (here, the opening operation with an opening time of 400 msec) and the closing operation for a predetermined time (here, 1000 msec). It is done once.
Further, when the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 34 (second starting opening), only one special drawing is held (holding of special drawing 2). On the other hand, when the game ball wins in the first starting winning openings 33a and 33b (first starting opening), the special drawing is not held (the special drawing 1 is not held).

Further, in this embodiment, when a prize is entered in the start winning opening (first starting winning opening 33a, 33b or second starting winning opening 34), all the results of the variable display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 in the batch display device 50 are all. It will be a small hit and there will be no loss. That is, when the start prize is won, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize device 35 are always opened, and the number of times the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize device 35 are opened due to the difference in the stop symbol of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. Is different.
In the small hit operation, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 may open once or open twice, and these are shown in FIG. 73 (b). The upper part of FIG. 73B is the case where the movable members 43a and 43b are opened once as a small hit, and the lower part of FIG. 73B is the case where the movable members 43a and 43b are opened twice as a small hit. is there.
As shown in the upper part of FIG. 73 (b), when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened once, the movable members 43a and 43b are opened (converted to the second state) and predetermined. After a lapse of time (here, after 400 ms has elapsed), a predetermined opening operation such as a closing operation is performed once. Therefore, in the case of opening once, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened only for 400 ms, and the game ball can be won in the variable winning device 35 within this period. A hit operation is performed.

On the other hand, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 73B, when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened twice, the movable members 43a and 43b are opened (converted to the second state). , The opening operation of a predetermined mode, such as the closing operation again after the lapse of a predetermined time (here, after 400 ms has elapsed), is repeated twice. In this case, the first opening period of the movable members 43a and 43b is, for example, 400 ms, and then the movable members 43a and 43b are closed after 400 ms has elapsed, and then a predetermined weight time (1000 ms) is provided, and this period. Then, the movable members 43a and 43b continue to be closed, and at the same time when the predetermined weight time ends, the movable members 43a and 43b are opened for the second time. The opening period of the second movable members 43a and 43b is also, for example, 400 m. Therefore, in the case of opening twice, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened only for 400 ms, and the operation is performed twice with a predetermined weight time in between. Then, a small hit operation is performed in such a manner that the game ball can be won in the variable winning device 35 within the period in which the opening operation is performed twice.

When the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 perform the opening operation once or twice by the small hit operation, the game ball fluctuates at the timing when the movable members 43a and 43b open the winning space 41 of the variable winning device 35. The game ball that has flowed into the floor portion 61 is guided to the floor portion 61 by the ball flow path formed by the flow path forming member 47. Then, if the game ball comes into contact with the magnet arrangement portion of the drum accessory 62 before the gap between the floor portion 61 and the drum accessory 62 becomes larger than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball will be at a constant speed. It is lifted by the rotating drum accessory 62 and guided to the guide surface portion 62d1 of the guide member 63d. On the other hand, if the gap between the floor portion 61 and the drum accessory 62 becomes larger than the diameter of the game ball before the game ball comes into contact with the magnet arrangement portion of the drum accessory 62, the game ball is released from the gap. It falls and is discharged to the outside through the discharge flow path in the variable winning device.

The game ball guided to the guide surface portion 63d1 of the guide member 63d is accommodated in the game ball accommodating portion 77a of the V movable member 77, or falls from the gap between the guide surface portion 63d1 and the back surface member 63b. When the game ball falls from the gap between the guide surface portion 63d1 and the back surface member 63b, the game ball falls from the gap and is discharged to the outside through the discharge flow path in the variable winning device. On the other hand, when the game ball is housed in the game ball accommodating portion 77a of the V movable member 77, the game ball is released from the V movable member 77 when the V movable member 77 arrives at the determination device guidance position. It falls and flows into the determination device 80.
The game ball that has flowed into the determination device 80 is placed on any one of the first V winning guidance unit 82b1, the second V winning guidance unit 82b2, and the third V winning guidance unit 82b3 formed on the horizontally movable member 82 rotating at a constant speed. Inflow. When the game ball flows into the third V winning guidance unit 82b3, the game ball flows into the third specific region (V winning), so that a "16R jackpot" occurs. Further, when the game ball flows into the second V winning guidance unit 82b2, the game ball flows into the second specific region (V winning), so that "8R hit" or "16R big hit" occurs. Further, when the game ball flows into the first V winning guidance unit 82b1, the game ball flows into the first specific region (V winning), so that "per 5R" or "16R big hit" occurs.

However, even when the game ball flows into the first V winning guide portion 82b1, the timing at which the first V winning guiding portion 82b1 arrives at the 12 o'clock position on the horizontal movable member 82 and the magnet of the vertically movable member 85 When any of the arrangement locations substantially coincides with the timing of arriving at the 6 o'clock position on the vertically movable member 85, the game ball corresponds to the jackpot state (special game state) which is the most disadvantageous to the player. There is a possibility that the ball flows into the fourth specific area, which is the specific area corresponding to the jackpot state, which is the most advantageous for the player, instead of the first specific area, which is the area. Specifically, the timing at which the first V winning guide portion 82b1 arrives at the 12 o'clock position on the horizontally movable member 82 and the magnet arrangement position of the vertically movable member 85 are at the 6 o'clock position on the vertically movable member 85. When the arrival timing is substantially the same, the game ball comes into contact with the magnet arrangement location and is lifted by the vertically movable member 85 rotating at a constant speed. Then, when the game ball flows into the fourth specific area 86a as a result of being lifted by the vertically movable member 85, the game ball flows into the fourth specific area (V winning), so that a "16R jackpot" occurs.

FIG. 96 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the distribution of the opening pattern and the jackpot round in the special figure 1, and FIG. 96 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the distribution of the opening pattern and the jackpot round in the special figure 2. is there.
In this embodiment, when the game ball wins a prize in the start winning opening (first starting winning opening 33a, 33b or second starting winning opening 34), the result of the variable display of special figure 1 or special figure 2 in the batch display device 50 is All are small hits, and the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35 are opened.
At that time, when the special figure 1 fluctuates, as shown in FIG. 96 (a), the "special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 1" is selected with a distribution rate of 80%, and the "special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 1" is selected with a distribution rate of 10%. "Fig. 1 Stop symbol pattern 2" is selected, and "Special figure 1 Stop symbol pattern 3" is selected with a distribution rate of 10%. Further, in the case of special figure 2, as shown in FIG. 96 (b), "special figure 2 stop symbol pattern 1" is selected with a distribution rate of 70%, and "special figure 2 stop" is selected with a distribution rate of 10%. "Symbol pattern 2" is selected, and "Special figure 2 stop symbol pattern 3" is selected with a distribution rate of 20%.

When the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 perform the opening operation, the game ball can flow into the winning space 41 of the variable winning device 35. The game ball that has flowed into the winning space 41 is first guided to the floor portion 61, lifted by the drum accessory 62 and guided to the guide surface portion 63d1, or falls from the gap between the floor portion 61 and the drum accessory 62. (That is, miss the V prize).
The game ball guided to the guide surface portion 63d1 is accommodated in the game ball accommodating portion 77a of the V movable member 77, or falls from the gap between the guide surface portion 63d1 and the back surface member 63b (that is, the V prize is missed). It will be either.
The game ball that missed the V prize, that is, the game ball that fell from the gap between the floor portion 61 and the drum accessory 62, and the game ball that fell from the gap between the guide surface portion 63d1 and the back member 63b are discharged by the variable winning device 35. It passes through the flow path and is discharged to the outside of the variable winning device 35. When the game ball passes through the discharge flow path, it is not a big hit, but only a prize to the variable prize device 35, and there are only a predetermined number of prize balls.
On the other hand, the game ball accommodated in the game ball accommodating portion 77a of the V movable member 77 is guided to the determination device 80, and the first specific region, the second specific region, the third specific region, and the third specific region of the determination device 80 are guided. 4 Inflow to any of the specific areas (V prize). When the game ball wins a V prize, a big hit occurs.

As shown in FIGS. 96A and 96B, when the game ball flows into the specific area 1 (first specific area), a preselected stop (selected at the start of the special figure variation display game, etc.) The symbol pattern is "Stop symbol pattern 1" (specifically, "Special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 1", "Special figure 2 stop symbol pattern 1") or "Stop symbol pattern 2" (specifically, "Special figure 1". In the case of "stop symbol pattern 2" and "special figure 2 stop symbol pattern 2"), "5R hit" is generated as a big hit, and the preselected stop symbol pattern is "stop symbol pattern 3" (specifically). Is "special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 3", "special figure 2 stop symbol pattern 3"), "16R hit" is generated as a big hit.
Further, when the game ball flows into the specific area 2 (second specific area), if the pre-selected stop symbol putter is the "stop symbol pattern 1" or the "stop symbol pattern 2", the jackpot is "per 8R". ", And when the preselected stop symbol pattern is" stop symbol pattern 3 "," 16R jackpot "is generated as a jackpot.

As shown in FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b), in the case of special figure 1, one opening is selected as the large winning opening opening pattern in the small hit, and in the case of special drawing 2, the large winning opening opening pattern in the small hit is selected. Is selected to open twice. That is, the case of the special figure 2 is a more advantageous opening pattern for the player.
In addition, "special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 1" has a distribution rate of 80%, "special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 2" has a distribution rate of 10%, and "special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 3" has a distribution rate of 10%. Since it is selected by the rate, in the case of Special Figure 1, when the game ball flows into the first specific area, the occurrence rate of "per 5R" is 90% (= 80% + 10%), and "16R". The occurrence rate of "big hit" is 10%.
On the other hand, "Special figure 2 stop symbol pattern 1" has a distribution rate of 70%, "Special figure 2 stop symbol pattern 2" has a distribution rate of 10%, and "Special figure 2 stop symbol pattern 3" has a distribution rate of 20%. Since it is selected by the rate, in the case of Special Figure 2, when the game ball flows into the first specific area, the occurrence rate of "per 5R" is 80% (= 70% + 10%), and "16R". The incidence of "big hits" is 20%.
Therefore, in the case of Special Figure 2 (that is, when the large winning opening opening pattern in the small hit is advantageous to the player), in the case of Special Figure 1 (that is, the large winning opening opening pattern in the small hit is advantageous for the player). The rate of occurrence of "16R jackpot" (that is, the rate of occurrence of jackpot that is more advantageous for the player) is higher than that of (unfavorable case).

Similarly, in the case of Special Figure 1, when the game ball flows into the second specific area, the occurrence rate of "per 8R" is 90%, and the occurrence rate of "16R jackpot" is 10%. In the case of Special Figure 2, when the game ball flows into the second specific area, the occurrence rate of "per 8R" is 80%, and the occurrence rate of "16R big hit" is 20%. The case of FIG. 2 (that is, the case where the large winning opening opening pattern in the small hit is advantageous to the player) is the case of the special figure 1 (that is, the case where the large winning opening opening pattern in the small hit is disadvantageous to the player). ), The occurrence rate of "16R jackpot" (that is, the occurrence rate of jackpot which is more advantageous for the player) is higher.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 96A and 96B, when the game ball passes through the specific area 3 (third specific area), the occurrence rate of "16R jackpot" is 100%. That is, "16R jackpot" occurs regardless of the type of special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) or the stop symbol pattern.
Similarly, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4 (fourth specific area), the occurrence rate of "16R jackpot" is 100%.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the case of the special figure 2 (that is, the case where the large winning opening opening pattern in the small hit is opened twice which is advantageous for the player) is the case of the special figure 1 (that is, the case of the special figure 1). The occurrence rate of "16R big hit" (that is, the occurrence rate of big hit which is more advantageous for the player) is higher than the case where the big winning opening opening pattern in the small hit is a one-time opening which is disadvantageous to the player.
In the pachinko machine of the type belonging to the so-called wing mono (including the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment), since the winning of the specific area in the starting game is counted as one round, it is during the actual big hit (special game state). The number of rounds is reduced by one round. Therefore, in this embodiment, for example, when a "16R jackpot" occurs, the result is that only one round is subtracted from the 16 rounds in relation to the ball output, and the round game for 15 rounds is performed.

When the game ball passes through the specific area 3 (third specific area) or the fourth specific area (specific area 4), the effect is not performed (or a short effect) is performed during the fanfare period regardless of the stop symbol pattern. Therefore, "10 seconds" is set as the length of the fanfare period (that is, the jackpot fanfare time).
Similarly, when the game ball has passed through the specific area 1 (first specific area) or the specific area 2 (second specific area), and the preselected stop symbol pattern is the "stop symbol pattern 1". In addition, since no production is performed (or a short production is performed) during the fanfare period, "10 seconds" is set as the length of the fanfare period.
On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the specific area 1 (first specific area) or the specific area 2 (second specific area), the preselected stop symbol pattern is the "stop symbol pattern 2" or the "stop symbol". In the case of "Pattern 3", the length of the fanfare period is "20 seconds" because the round lottery effect of apparently drawing the number of rounds is executed as an effect of notifying the player of the number of rounds during the fanfare period. Is set.

FIG. 97 (a) is a diagram showing a modified example of the distribution of the open pattern and the jackpot round in the special figure 1, and FIG. 97 (b) shows a modified example of the distribution of the open pattern and the jackpot round in the special figure 2. It is a figure.
In this modification, when the special figure 1 fluctuates, as shown in FIG. 97 (a), "special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 1" is selected with a distribution rate of 80%, and a distribution rate of 10%. "Special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 2" is selected, "Special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 3" is selected with a distribution rate of 5%, and "Special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 4" is selected with a distribution rate of 5%. Will be done. Further, in the case of special figure 2, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), "special figure 2 stop symbol pattern 1" is selected with a distribution rate of 80%, and "special figure 2 stop" is selected with a distribution rate of 10%. "Symbol pattern 2" is selected, and "Special figure 2 stop symbol pattern 3" is selected with a distribution rate of 10%.

As shown in FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b), when the game ball flows into the specific area 1 (first specific area), the preselected stop symbol pattern becomes the "stop symbol pattern 1" or the "stop symbol pattern 2". In the case of "", "5R hit" is generated as a big hit, and when the preselected stop symbol pattern is "stop symbol pattern 3", "16R hit" is generated as a big hit. Further, even when the pre-selected stop symbol pattern is "stop symbol pattern 4" (specifically, "special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 4"), "per 16R" is generated as a big hit.
Further, when the game ball flows into the specific area 2 (second specific area), if the pre-selected stop symbol putter is the "stop symbol pattern 1" or the "stop symbol pattern 2", the jackpot is "per 8R". ", And when the preselected stop symbol pattern is" stop symbol pattern 3 "," 16R jackpot "is generated as a jackpot. Further, even when the pre-selected stop symbol pattern is "stop symbol pattern 4" (specifically, "special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 4"), "per 16R" is generated as a big hit.

As shown in FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b), when the pre-selected stop symbol pattern is "special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 4"), the large winning opening opening pattern in the small hit is opened twice. Therefore, in the case of special figure 1, opening once or twice is selected as the large winning opening opening pattern in the small hit, and in the case of special figure 2, opening is performed twice as the large winning opening opening pattern in the small hit. Be selected.
In addition, "special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 1" has a distribution rate of 80%, "special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 2" has a distribution rate of 10%, and "special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 3" has a distribution rate of 5%. In terms of rate, "special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 4" is selected with a distribution rate of 5%. Therefore, in the case of special figure 1, when the game ball flows into the first specific area, "per 5R". The incidence of "16R jackpot" is 90% (= 80% + 10%), and the incidence of "16R jackpot" is 10% (= 5% + 5%).
On the other hand, "Special figure 2 stop symbol pattern 1" has a distribution rate of 80%, "Special figure 2 stop symbol pattern 2" has a distribution rate of 10%, and "Special figure 2 stop symbol pattern 3" has a distribution rate of 10%. Since it is selected by the rate, the occurrence rate of "per 5R" is 90% (= 70% + 10%) even when the game ball flows into the first specific area in the case of Special Figure 2, and "16R". The occurrence rate of "big hit" is 10%.
Therefore, when the large winning opening opening pattern in the small hit is advantageous to the player (that is, when "Special Figure 1 stop symbol pattern 4" in Special Figure 1 is selected, in the case of Special Figure 2) , The occurrence of "16R big hit" than when the big winning opening opening pattern in the small hit is disadvantageous to the player (that is, when other than "special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 4" in special figure 1 is selected) The rate (ie, the rate of jackpots that is more favorable to the player) is high.

Similarly, in the case of Special Figure 1, when the game ball flows into the second specific area, the occurrence rate of "per 8R" is 90%, and the occurrence rate of "16R jackpot" is 10%. Even in the case of Special Figure 2, when the game ball flows into the second specific area, the occurrence rate of "per 8R" is 90%, and the occurrence rate of "16R big hit" is 10%, so it is small. The occurrence rate of "16R jackpot" (that is, more for the player) is when the big winning opening opening pattern in the hit is advantageous to the player than when the big winning opening opening pattern in the small hit is disadvantageous to the player. The rate of favorable jackpots) is high.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), when the game ball passes through the specific region 3 (third specific region), the occurrence rate of "16R jackpot" is 100%.
Similarly, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4 (fourth specific area), the occurrence rate of "16R jackpot" is 100%.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the case where the large winning opening opening pattern in the small hit is advantageous to the player (in the case of opening twice) is more disadvantageous to the player when the large winning opening opening pattern in the small hit is advantageous. The rate of occurrence of "16R jackpot" (that is, the rate of occurrence of jackpot that is more advantageous for the player) is higher than that of the case (in the case of opening once).
Further, in the present modification, in the case of the special figure 2, only the opening twice is selected, and in the case of the special figure 1, the selection rate is low, but the opening twice may be selected. Therefore, as in the embodiment (see FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b)), in the case of special figure 1, only one opening is selected, and in the case of special drawing 2, only two opening is selected. In comparison, since the ratio of opening twice (that is, the ratio of the opening pattern advantageous to the player) increases, the game ball wins the variable winning device 35 (specifically, the game ball flows into the winning space 41). As a result, the occurrence rate of "16R jackpot" (that is, the occurrence rate of jackpot which is more advantageous for the player) can be increased.

FIG. 98 shows an example of the return operation of the V movable accessory at the end of the small hit when the V movable accessory (V movable member 77) is on the right side of the initial position, and FIG. 99 shows the V movable accessory. An example of the return operation of the V movable accessory at the end of the small hit when the (V movable member 77) is on the left side of the initial position is shown.
In step S724 of the small hit remaining ball processing (see FIG. 74), a process of setting the value of the control pointer for returning from the current position of the V movable member 77 to the center position (initial position) in the shortest time is performed. Specifically, when the current position of the V movable member 77 is on the right side of the initial position, a value for moving the V movable member 77 to the left is set as the value of the control pointer, and the current V movable member 77 is set. When the position of 77 is on the left side of the initial position, a process of setting a value for moving the V movable member 77 to the right is performed as the value of the control pointer.
Next, in step S725, a process of determining whether or not the value of the control pointer set in step S724 is the same as the value currently being controlled is performed, and if not, the process proceeds to step S726. A process of saving the value of the control pointer set in step S724 is performed.
By these processes, the V movable accessory motor 73 is controlled as shown in FIG. 98 when the current position of the V movable member 77 is on the right side of the initial position, and the current position of the V movable member 77 is changed. When it is on the left side of the initial position, it is controlled as shown in FIG. 99.

Specifically, for example, when the V movable member 77 is on the right side of the initial position and the current traveling direction of the V movable member 77 is the left direction, the value of the control pointer in step S724. As a value, the value for moving the V movable member 77 to the left is set, and it is determined in step S725 that the values are the same. Therefore, the rotation direction of the V movable accessory motor 73 does not switch before and after the small hit end determination time. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 98 (a), the V movable accessory motor 73 rotates in the same direction as immediately before the small hit end determination time (that is, counterclockwise rotation) without pausing or the like at the small hit end determination time. ) Continue.
Further, for example, when the V movable member 77 is on the right side of the initial position and the current traveling direction of the V movable member 77 is the right direction, V movable as the value of the control pointer in step S724. Since the value for moving the member 77 to the left is set and it is determined in step S725 that they are not the same, the rotation direction of the V movable accessory motor 73 is switched before and after the time when the small hit end is determined. At that time, in order to suppress damage or deterioration of the drive mechanism (including the V movable accessory motor 73), the rotation direction is switched with a temporary stop. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), the V movable accessory motor 73 stops at the time when the small hit end is determined, and after a predetermined time (for example, 20 ms) elapses, the direction is opposite to that immediately before the small hit end determination time. Rotate (ie, counterclockwise).

Further, for example, when the V movable member 77 is on the left side of the initial position and the current traveling direction of the V movable member 77 is the left direction, V movable as the value of the control pointer in step S724. Since the value for moving the member 77 to the right is set and it is determined in step S725 that they are not the same, the rotation direction of the V movable accessory motor 73 is switched before and after the time when the small hit end is determined. At that time, in order to suppress damage or deterioration of the drive mechanism (including the V movable accessory motor 73), the rotation direction is switched with a temporary stop. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 99A, the V movable accessory motor 73 stops at the time when the small hit end is determined, and after a predetermined time (for example, 20 msec) elapses, the direction is opposite to that immediately before the small hit end determination time. Rotate (ie, clockwise).
Further, for example, when the V movable member 77 is on the left side of the initial position and the current traveling direction of the V movable member 77 is the right direction, V movable as the value of the control pointer in step S724. Since the value for moving the member 77 to the right is set and it is determined in step S725 that they are the same, the rotation direction of the V movable accessory motor 73 does not switch before and after the small hit end determination time. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 99B, the V movable accessory motor 73 rotates in the same direction as immediately before the small hit end determination time (that is, clockwise rotation) without pausing or the like at the small hit end determination time. To continue.

The determination device 80 can also be mounted on a so-called type 1 pachinko machine. An example is shown in FIG.
FIG. 100 is a front view of the game board 30 of the first-class pachinko machine equipped with the determination device 80.
On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 20 having a display device 21 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 21 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 20 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 20. That is, the center case 20 is formed so as to surround the periphery of the display area of the display device 21 and project forward from the display surface of the display device 21 so that the game ball is less likely to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 21 (variable display device) is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). In the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), characters for directing the special figure variation display game, and background images for enhancing the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 21, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variablely displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

On the lower right side of the center case 20 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (normal figure start gate) 24 that gives a start condition of the normal figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the normal drawing start gate 24 is detected by the gate switch.
In addition, three general winning openings 25 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 20 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening 25 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 20 and below the normal drawing start gate 24. The mouth 25 is arranged. The game balls that have won the general winning opening 25 are detected by the winning opening switch.

Further, below the center case 20 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 26 (first starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition of the special figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 26 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch.
Further, below the start winning opening 26, a normal variable winning device 27 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition of the special figure variation display game is provided.
The ordinary variable winning device 27 includes a movable member 27a that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. The movable member 27a always holds a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the normal fluctuation winning device 27 is in an open state (advantageous for the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the normal fluctuation winning device 27 by the normal electric solenoid as a driving device. It is designed to be changed to a state). The game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 27 is detected by the start port 2 switch.
Further, below the normal variable winning device 27, an out opening 37 for collecting game balls that did not win in the winning opening or the like is provided.

Further, on the right side of the starting winning opening 26, a special variable winning device (large winning opening) 28 that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game is arranged. There is.
The special variable winning device 28 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 28a that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side, depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. The big winning opening is changed from a closed state (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a state that is advantageous to the player). That is, the special variable winning device 28 includes, for example, a large winning opening opened and closed by an opening / closing door 28a driven by a large winning opening solenoid as a driving device, and during a special gaming state or a small hit gaming state, a large winning prize is awarded. By converting from the closed state to the open state, the inflow of the game ball into the large prize opening is facilitated, and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. Inside the large winning opening (winning area), a large winning opening switch (count switch) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening.

In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game areas 32 in which the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 20 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 20 is the right game area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), so that the player can aim for a prize in the start winning opening 26 or the normal variable winning device 27, and goes to the right game area. By launching a game ball (so-called right-handed), it is possible to aim for a prize in the normal figure starting gate 24 or the special variable winning device 28.
Here, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the warp device 22 is provided on the left side of the center case 20. The warp device 22 has an inflow port 22a opened to the left for receiving a game ball flowing down the game area 32 outside the center case 20, and a tubular shape for guiding the game ball flowing into the inflow port 22a to the stage 22b. A game ball having a warp flow path and flowing down the warp flow path is guided to the left end of the stage 22b.

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), a batch display device 50 for displaying various information is provided.

In the game machine 1 of the present modification, the game is performed by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) toward the game area 32 from a launching device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 24 and the general winning opening 25 , The starting winning opening 26, the normal variable winning device 27 or the special variable winning device 28 is won, or the game flows into the out port 37 provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball wins in the general winning opening 25, the starting winning opening 26, the normal variable winning device 27, or the special variable winning device 28, the payout control device 200 produces a number of winning balls according to the type of winning opening. From the controlled payout unit, the glass frame 5 is discharged to the upper plate 7 or the lower plate 10.

On the other hand, a gate switch including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 24 is provided in the normal drawing start gate 24, and is driven into the game area 32. When the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 24, it is detected by the gate switch and the normal map variation display game is played. In addition, a state in which the normal figure fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, a state in which the normal figure change display game has already been played and the normal figure change display game has not ended, or a state in which the normal figure change display game is hit and a normal change winning device is used. When the game ball passes through the normal figure start gate 24 when 37 is converted to the open state, if it is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4) of the normal figure start memory number, the normal figure start memory number is added (for example). +1) and one normal figure start memory will be stored. The number of stored numbers of the winnings for starting the normal drawing is displayed on the general drawing holding display of the batch display device 50. In addition, the hit judgment random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is stored in the normal map start memory, and this hit judgment random value is used as the judgment value. The result of the normal map variation display game is determined with reference to. When the hit determination random value matches the determination value, the normal map variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

The normal map fluctuation display game is provided in the batch display device 50 and is displayed by a variable display unit (normal figure display) composed of LEDs, and the lighting mode and lighting color of the LEDs are usually identified. Make information (normal design, normal design). In addition, the general figure display is configured by a display device, and for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information, and after displaying the fluctuations for a predetermined time, the display is stopped and the result is displayed. You may. When the stop display of the normal fluctuation display game results in the normal map identification result, the movable member 27a of the normal fluctuation winning device 27 is opened for a predetermined time as a hit of the normal map. As a result, it becomes easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening inside the normal variable winning device 27, and the number of times the second special figure variable display game is executed increases.

The winning ball to the starting winning opening 26 and the winning ball to the normal variable winning device 27 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch and the starting opening 2 switch, respectively, which are provided inside. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 26 is detected as the starting winning ball of the first special figure variation display game, is stored as the first starting memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4), and is normally changed. The game ball that has won the prize device 27 is detected as the start prize ball of the second special figure variation display game, and is stored as the second start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). Further, when the start winning ball is detected, a jackpot random value, a jackpot symbol random value, and each fluctuation pattern random value are extracted as start storage information, and the extracted random value is a special figure storage area in the game control device 100. Each is stored in (a part of the RAM) as a special figure start memory up to a predetermined number of times (for example, up to 4 times). Then, the stored number of the special figure start memory is displayed on the memory display unit (special figure 1 hold display, special figure 2 hold display) for notifying the start winning number of the batch display device 50, and the center case 20. It is also displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display on the display device 21 of.

The game control device 100 is a special figure 1 display (variable display device) or a special figure 2 display of the batch display device 50 based on winning a prize in the start winning opening 26 or the normal variable winning device 27, or starting memory thereof. The first or second special figure variation display game is played on (variation display device). The first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are performed by displaying a plurality of special symbols (special figures, identification information) in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode. In addition, a decorative special figure variable display game for variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) is executed on the display device (image display device) 21. Then, as a result of the special figure variation display game, when the display mode of the special figure 1 display or the special figure 2 display of the batch display device 50 becomes a special result mode (special result), it becomes a big hit and special. It becomes a game state (so-called big hit state). In addition, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 21 corresponding to this is also a special result mode. Further, as a result of the special figure variation display game, when the display mode of the special figure 1 display or the special figure 2 display of the batch display device 50 becomes the small hit result mode, it becomes a small hit and the small hit game. It becomes a state (so-called small hit state). In addition, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 21 corresponding to this is also a small hit result mode.

In the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 21, for example, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above on the display device 21 is displayed in the left variable display area (first special symbol) and the right variable display area (1st special symbol). In each of the second special symbol) and the medium fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variablely displayed (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed at which it is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that are changing after a predetermined time are stopped in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and stopped in each of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode composed of the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 21 plays a variable display game with a special decorative symbol corresponding to the number of special figure start memories, and various effects such as the appearance of characters are performed to improve the interest.

The special figure 1 display and the special figure 2 display of the batch display device 50 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure should not be executed independently or at the same time. Figure The variable display game is displayed. Further, the display device 21 may also use different display devices and different display areas in the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed so that they are not executed independently or at the same time. Further, the game machine 1 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display and the special figure 2 display, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 21. Further, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, if there is a memory of starting the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, and the special figure variation display game can be executed, the second special figure variation display game is played. It is designed to be executed (priority is executed).

Further, in a state where the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) can be started and the start memory number is 0, the start winning opening 26 (or the normal variation winning device 27) is opened. When the game ball wins a prize, the start memory is memorized with the generation of the start right, the number of start memories is added by 1, and immediately based on the start memory, the first special figure variation display game (second special figure). The variable display game) is started, and at this time, the starting memory number is subtracted by 1. On the other hand, a state in which the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) cannot be started immediately, for example, the first or second special figure variation display game has already been played, and the special figure variation display game ends. If the game ball wins in the start winning opening 26 (or the normal variable winning device 27) in a state where the game is not played, a special game state, or a small hit game state, if the starting memory number is less than the upper limit, The number of start memories is added by 1, and one start memory is stored. Then, in a state where the starting memory number is 1 or more, the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) can be started (the end of the previous special figure variation display game or the special game state). At the end of the small hit game state), the starting memory number is decremented by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) is started based on the stored start memory. In the following description, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variation display game.

Next, the game control performed by the game control device 100 will be described.
The CPU 171A of the game microcomputer 171 of the game control device 100 extracts a random value for hit determination of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch provided in the normal figure start gate 24 and outputs the ROM 171B. It is compared with the stored judgment value, and the process of judging the hit / miss of the normal figure fluctuation display game is performed. Then, after displaying the identification symbol (identification information) on the normal map display of the batch display device 50 for a predetermined time, a process of displaying the normal map variation display game that is stopped and displayed is performed. When the result of this solenoid variable display game is a hit, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol is displayed on the solenoid display of the batch display device 50, and the solenoid is displayed. The electric solenoid is operated to control the movable member 27a of the normally variable winning device 27 to be opened for a predetermined time as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control executing means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 27a). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of sync, the general display device of the batch display device 50 is controlled to display the result mode of the outlier.

In addition, the start winning prize (starting memory) is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch provided in the starting winning opening 26, and based on this starting memory, the jackpot of the first special figure variation display game The determination random value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 171B, and a process of determining the hit / miss of the first special figure variation display game is performed. In addition, the start memory is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch provided in the normal variation winning device 27, and based on this start memory, the jackpot determination disturbance of the second special figure variation display game The numerical value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 171B, and the process of determining the hit / miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

Then, the CPU 171A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after displaying the identification symbol (identification information) on the special figure 1 display and the special figure 2 display of the batch display device 50 for a predetermined time, a process of displaying the special figure variation display game for stopping and displaying is performed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 26, normal variable winning device 27) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32. Make.

Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 21 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 13a, 13b, and 13c, and controlling the light emission of various LEDs, based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 171A of the game control device 100 displays a special result mode or a small hit result on the special figure 1 display or the special figure 2 display of the batch display device 50. In addition to displaying the mode, processing is performed to generate a special game state or a small hit game state. In the process of generating the special gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the CPU 171A opens the opening / closing door 28a of the special variable winning device 28 by, for example, the large winning opening solenoid so that the game ball can flow into the large winning opening. Control the door. Then, until either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening, the large winning opening is satisfied. Is set as one round, and control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeat) this a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display and the special figure 2 display of the batch display device 50 are controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state (probability change state) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the lottery result by the determination device 80. In this high probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. In addition, regardless of the high probability state based on the result mode of either the first special figure fluctuation display game or the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both variable display games are in a high probability state.

For example, in the game board 30 shown in FIG. 100, the flow path device 23 is arranged above the warp device 22, and the determination device 80 is arranged behind the stage 22b.
The flow path device 23 has an inflow port 23a opened to the left for receiving a game ball flowing down the game area 32 outside the center case 20, and a cylinder for guiding the game ball flowing into the inflow port 23a to the determination device 80. The game ball having a shape-like flow path and flowing down the flow path is guided to the inflow port formed by the inflow port forming member 83.
The inflow port 23 is provided with an entry restricting member 23b for opening and closing the inflow port 23. The entry restricting member 23b is opened when a special gaming state occurs.
When a special game state occurs, the entry restricting member 23b is opened, and the game ball flows into the inflow port 23a, the game ball is guided to the determination device 80 by the flow path device 23. Then, it flows into a specific area (for example, a second specific area, a third specific area, a fourth specific area), or flows into a non-specific area (for example, a first specific area). When a game ball flows into a specific area (for example, a second specific area, a third specific area, a fourth specific area), a high probability state is generated as a game state after the end of the special game state. There is.

In this case, in a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a gaming value is given to the player when the result of a predetermined game (special figure variation display game) becomes a special result, in the special gaming state, a specific area ( A determining means (determining device) for determining a probability state in which the result of the game after the special gaming state becomes a special result based on whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second specific area, the third specific area, and the fourth specific area). 80), the determining means can guide the game ball to either a specific region (second specific region, third specific region) or a non-specific region (first specific region) different from the specific region. It has a first movable member (horizontal movable member 82) and a second movable member (vertically movable member 85) capable of guiding a game ball to a specific region (fourth specific region). Then, in the middle of guiding the game ball to the non-specific area by the first movable member (horizontal movable member 82), the movable member for guiding the game ball is moved from the first movable member to the second movable member (fourth specific area). When the game ball flows into the guide portion 82b1 of the horizontally movable member 82, the player is asked whether or not the game ball is lifted by the vertically movable member 85 and is in a probabilistic state. That is, you can enjoy whether it flows into the first specific area or the fourth specific area.
That is, in this case, the determination device 80 functions not as a round lottery bonus for determining the number of rounds of the jackpot, but as a probability state lottery bonus for determining the probability state after the jackpot.
Therefore, the player either flows the game ball into the specific area (first specific area) corresponding to the first special gaming state in the specific area corresponding to the first movable member, or corresponds to the second movable member. You can enjoy whether it flows into a specific area (fourth specific area).

In the example shown in FIG. 100, the flow path device 23 is provided with a flow path device having an inflow port 23a opened on the left side (left side game area), but is open on the right side (right side game area). A flow path device having an inflow port 23a may be provided, or a flow path device having an inflow port 23a opened to the left (left game area) and an inflow port 23a opening to the right (right game area). It may be provided with both a flow path device having the above.

According to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a game is provided when a variable winning device 35 is provided and a game ball flows into a specific area (first specific area to fourth specific area) in the variable winning device 35. In a game machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a player a game value, the variable winning device 35 introduces a movable member (V movable member 77) capable of guiding the game ball to a specific area and an inflow into the specific area. The movable member includes a discharge area (a back discharge flow path formed by the back discharge flow path forming member 63c and a discharge flow path in the variable winning device 35) through which the missed game ball flows down, and the movable member moves the game ball to a specific area. Before the start of the operation in the specific area guidance operation mode (reciprocating movement between the left normal operation position and the determination device guidance position. See FIG. 32 (b)), the game ball is guided to the discharge area. The operation in the region guidance operation mode (movement to the discharge flow path guidance position. See FIG. 32 (a)) is performed.
In the conventional game machine, the game ball may remain in the variable winning device due to fraud or trouble, and the game ball may win a prize in a specific area in an unintended state. However, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment. , Since the movable member performs the operation in the discharge area guidance operation mode before the start of the operation in the specific area guidance operation mode, it remains in the movable member before the movable member guides the game ball to the specific area. The game ball that has been playing can be made to flow down to the discharge area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the winning of the game ball in a specific area due to fraud or trouble, and thus fairness and fairness can be maintained.

Further, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game ball guided by the movable member during the operation of the movable member (V movable member 77) in the discharge region guiding operation mode is also a movable member. The game ball that missed the inflow of the specific region (first specific region to the fourth specific region) during the operation in the specific region guidance operation mode is also a rear discharge flow formed by the discharge region (back discharge flow path forming member 63c). It can be configured to flow down the road).
With this configuration, it is possible to standardize the emission area.

Further, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a predetermined member (drum accessory 62) arranged in front of the movable member (V movable member 77) and a predetermined member (drum accessory 62) arranged behind the predetermined member are arranged. A discharge region forming member (rear discharge flow path forming member 63c) for forming a discharge region is provided, and the discharge region forming member has a protruding portion (protruding piece 63c1) protruding toward a predetermined member, and discharges a movable member. The game ball guided by the movable member can be configured to move along the predetermined member and the protrusion and flow down to the discharge region during the operation in the region guidance operation mode.
With such a configuration, the game ball remaining in the movable member can be reliably flowed down to the discharge flow path.

Further, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, when the variable winning device 35 is provided and the game ball flows into the specific area (first specific area to the fourth specific area) in the variable winning device 35. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that imparts game value to a player, the variable winning device 25 includes a ball flow path forming member 47 that forms a ball flow path through which a game ball can flow down. Has a bent portion, and a regulating portion (first gap portion 47a3, second gap portion 47b3) for restricting the entry of an unauthorized member is provided in a portion corresponding to the bent portion of the ball flow path forming member 47. (See Fig. 8).
In the conventional game machine, there is a possibility that the game ball wins a prize in a specific area in an unintended state due to fraud or trouble, but in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the bent portion of the ball flow path forming member 47 Since a regulation unit that regulates the entry of fraudulent members is provided in the portion corresponding to the above, fraudulent acts using fraudulent members such as threads can be effectively suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the winning of the game ball in a specific area due to fraud or trouble, and thus fairness and fairness can be maintained.

Further, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the ball flow path forming member 47 includes a first member (front surface portion 47a1, left surface portion 47b1) and a second member (rear surface portion 47a2, right surface portion 47b2). The regulating portion (first gap portion 47a3, second gap portion 47b3) can be configured to include a gap provided between the first member and the second member.
With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably and reliably suppress fraudulent acts using fraudulent members such as threads with a simple configuration.

Further, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the variable winning device 35 includes a discharge port from which the game ball is discharged, and the variable winning device 35 using an illegal member is used as the discharge port. It is possible to configure a re-entry control unit (protective member 65a; specifically, a plurality of protrusions 65a1) for restricting re-entry into the space (see FIG. 26).
With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as regurgitating the game ball by using an illegal member such as a thread and re-entering the variable winning device 35.

Further, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, when the variable winning device 35 is provided and the game ball flows into the specific area (first specific area to the fourth specific area) in the variable winning device 35. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a player a game value, any one of a plurality of types of special gaming states is based on a specific area in which a game ball of a plurality of specific areas has flowed. A determination means (decision device 80) for determining one is provided, and the determination means include a first movable member (horizontal movable member 82) and a second movable member (vertical movable member 85) capable of guiding the game ball to specific regions different from each other. ), And the movable member for guiding the game ball may be changed from the first movable member to the second movable member in the middle of guiding the game ball to the specific area by the first movable member (FIG. 28). reference). Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the game ball flows into the first V winning guide portion 82b1 of the horizontally movable member 82, the game ball flows into the first specific region (V winning). "5R hit" or "16R big hit" occurs. However, even when the game ball flows into the first V winning guide portion 82b1, the timing at which the first V winning guiding portion 82b1 arrives at the 12 o'clock position on the horizontally movable member 82 and the magnet arrangement of the vertically movable member 85. When any of the locations substantially coincides with the timing of arriving at the 6 o'clock position on the vertically movable member 85, the game ball comes into contact with the magnet arrangement portion and is therefore lifted by the vertically movable member 85. Then, when the game ball flows into the fourth specific area 86a as a result of being lifted by the vertically movable member 85, the game ball flows into the fourth specific area (V winning), so that a "16R jackpot" occurs.
In the conventional gaming machine, when the special gaming state that occurs is the special gaming state that is most disadvantageous to the player among the plurality of special gaming states, the interest of the game may be lowered, but this embodiment In the game machine 1, the movable member for guiding the game ball may be changed from the first movable member to the second movable member during the guidance of the game ball to the specific area by the first movable member. , The player can enjoy whether or not the movable member for guiding the game ball is changed during the guidance of the game ball by the first movable member. That is, since it is possible to entertain whether the game ball flows into the specific area corresponding to the first movable member or the specific area corresponding to the second movable member, there are a plurality of special game states that occur. Even in the special gaming state, which is the most disadvantageous to the player among the special gaming states, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the plurality of types of special gaming states are more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state (“per 5R”) and the first special gaming state. The first movable member (horizontal movable member 82) includes a second special gaming state (“16R jackpot”), and the first movable member (horizontal movable member 82) is a specific area (first specific area) corresponding to the first special gaming state among a plurality of specific areas. ), And the game ball can be guided to a specific area (third specific area) corresponding to the second special gaming state, and the second movable member (vertically movable member 85) is The game ball can be guided to a specific area (fourth specific area) corresponding to the second special gaming state among a plurality of specific areas, and the first movable member can guide the game ball to the specific area corresponding to the first special gaming state. It is possible to configure the movable member for guiding the game ball to be changed from the first movable member to the second movable member in the middle of guiding the game ball.
With this configuration, the movable member that guides the game ball is second movable from the first movable member during the guidance of the game ball to the specific area corresponding to the first special gaming state by the first movable member. Since the ball may be changed to a member, the game ball flows into a specific area (first specific area) corresponding to the first special gaming state in the specific area corresponding to the first movable member, or is second movable. It is possible to entertain whether or not the ball flows into a specific area (fourth specific area) corresponding to the member, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first movable member (horizontal movable member 82) uses the game ball in the middle of guiding the game ball to a specific area, and the first movable member. It is possible to guide the player to a predetermined position (in the case of the present embodiment, the 12 o'clock position on the horizontal movable member 82) where both the second movable member (vertical movable member 85) can be contacted, and the game is played at the predetermined position. The movable member that guides the sphere is changed from the first movable member to the second movable member, and the operating direction of the first movable member and the operating direction of the second movable member at the predetermined position are the same (in the case of this embodiment, the right). It can be configured to be (direction).
With this configuration, the operating direction of the first movable member and the operating direction of the second movable member at the position (predetermined position) where the movable member for guiding the game ball is changed from the first movable member to the second movable member. Therefore, when the movable member for guiding the game ball is changed from the first movable member to the second movable member, the change can be smoothly performed.

Further, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, when the result of a predetermined game (special figure variation display game) becomes a special result, it is possible to generate a special game state in which a game value is given to the player. In a special game machine, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize in a specific area (second specific area, third specific area, fourth specific area) in the special game state, and based on the determination result, after the special game state. A determination means (determining device 80) for determining a probability state in which the result of the game is a special result is provided, and the determination means includes a specific area (second specific area, third specific area) and a non-specific area different from the specific area. A first movable member (horizontal movable member 82) capable of guiding the game ball to either one of (first specific area) and a second movable member capable of guiding the game ball to a specific area (fourth specific area). (Vertical movable member 85), and while the first movable member (horizontal movable member 82) guides the game ball to a non-specific area, the movable member that guides the game ball is released from the first movable member. It is also possible to configure it so that it may be changed to a second movable member (see FIG. 100).
In the conventional game machine, if the game ball does not win in the specific area, the interest of the game may be lowered, but in the game machine 1 of the modified example shown in FIG. 100, the first movable member is not specified. In the middle of guiding the game ball to the area, the movable member for guiding the game ball may be changed from the first movable member to the second movable member, so that the player can use the non-specific area by the first movable member. It is possible to enjoy whether or not the movable member for guiding the game ball is changed during the guidance of the game ball to. That is, since it is possible to entertain whether the game ball flows into the non-specific area or the specific area, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game even if the game ball does not win a prize in the specific area.

Further, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, when the result of a predetermined game is a special result (as a result of the game ball flow-down game in which the game ball flows down the game area 32, the game ball is in a specific area. In a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives a game value to a player (when the game ball flows into the game), a specific area (first specific area to the fourth specific area) into which the game ball can flow and the game ball are stored. A movable member (V movable member 77) capable of guiding the stored game ball to a specific area and a discharge area (rear discharge flow path formation) through which the game ball that has missed the inflow to the specific area flows down. A back discharge flow path formed by the member 63c and a discharge flow path in the variable winning device 35) are provided, and a state advantageous to the player (special game state) can be generated when the game ball flows into a specific area. Yes, the movable member is stored before the start of the operation (movement between the left normal operation position and the determination device guidance position) in the specific area guidance operation mode for guiding the stored game ball to the specific area. The operation in the discharge area guidance operation mode (movement to the discharge flow path guidance position) for guiding the game ball to the discharge area is performed, and the operation in the specific area guidance operation mode and the operation in the discharge area guidance operation mode are performed. The operating range is different between.
In a conventional game machine, a big hit state (special game state) may be illegally generated due to a fraudulent act such as storing a game ball in a movable member by hand in advance, but the game of the present embodiment In the machine, since the movable member performs the operation in the discharge area guidance operation mode before the start of the operation in the specific area guidance operation mode, the movable member moves the game ball before guiding the game ball to the specific area. The game ball remaining in the member can flow down to the discharge flow path. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a special gaming state due to fraudulent acts such as manually storing the gaming ball in the movable member in advance.

The gaming machine 1 is not limited to the type 2 pachinko machine, and may be a type 1 pachinko machine. When the game machine 1 is a type 1 pachinko machine, the case where the stop result of the special figure variation display game is a special result corresponds to "the case where the result of a predetermined game is a special result", and a high probability state ( The probabilistic state) corresponds to the "state advantageous to the player".

Further, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the operation in the discharge area guidance operation mode can be configured to have a wider operation range than the operation in the specific area guidance operation mode.
With this configuration, the game ball remaining in the movable member can be reliably flowed down into the discharge flow path.

Further, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the movable member (V movable member 77) has reached a position (discharge flow path guidance position) that can be reached only during the operation in the discharge region guidance operation mode. In this case, it is possible to configure the game ball stored in the movable member to flow down to the discharge region.
With this configuration, the game ball remaining in the movable member can be reliably flowed down into the discharge flow path.

Further, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, when the result of a predetermined game is a special result (as a result of the game ball flow-down game in which the game ball flows down the game area 32, the game ball is in a specific area. In a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives a game value to a player (when the game ball flows into), the specific area (first specific area to the fourth specific area) into which the game ball can flow and the game ball are specified. A movable member (V movable member 77) that can be guided to the region is provided, and when a game ball flows into a specific region, a state advantageous to the player (special game state) can be generated. At the end of the operation (movement between the left normal operation position and the determination device guidance position) in the specific area guidance operation mode for guiding the game ball to the specific area, the return operation for returning to the initial position is performed, and the return operation is performed. In, regardless of the operation direction immediately before the start of the return operation, the operation is performed in the direction in which the time required for returning to the initial position is the shortest (see FIGS. 98 and 99).
Therefore, in the return operation, the movable member operates in the direction in which the time required for returning to the initial position is the shortest regardless of the operation direction immediately before the start of the return operation. Therefore, the return time of the movable member to the initial position Can be shortened.

The gaming machine 1 is not limited to the type 2 pachinko machine, and may be a type 1 pachinko machine. When the game machine 1 is a type 1 pachinko machine, the case where the stop result of the special figure variation display game is a special result corresponds to "the case where the result of a predetermined game is a special result", and a high probability state ( The probabilistic state) corresponds to the "state advantageous to the player".

Further, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the movable member (V movable member 77) has an operation direction immediately before the start of the return operation and a direction in which the time required for the return to the initial position is the shortest. However, in the opposite direction, it can be configured to start the return operation after stopping for a predetermined time (see FIGS. 98 (b) and 99 (a)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress damage or deterioration of the drive mechanism (including the V movable accessory motor 73) of the movable member.

Further, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, when the result of a predetermined game is a special result (as a result of the game ball flow-down game in which the game ball flows down the game area 32, the game ball is in a specific area. In a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives a game value to a player (when flowing into), after displaying a plurality of identification symbols in a variable manner, the game is selected from a plurality of stop symbols (stop symbol patterns). The number of rounds that determines the number of round games (number of rounds) in the special game state based on the display device (special figure 1 display D1 and special figure 2 display D2) that displays the stop symbol and the selected stop symbol. Based on the determining means (game control device 100), the round lottery effect executing means (effect control device 300) that executes the round lottery effect that apparently draws the number of round games in the special game state, and the selected stop symbol. The game control device 100 is provided with an effect execution determining means (game control device 100) for determining whether or not to execute a round lottery effect (see FIG. 96).
The number of round games is decided in advance, and the round lottery production is just a production, but basically the probability of getting a good result (big hit with many round games) is set low. If the round lottery effect is executed every time the game ball vaguely flows into a specific area as in a conventional game machine, the player may be given the impression that no matter how much the lottery is performed, the result will not be good. That is, in the conventional game machine, there is a possibility that the reliability of the round lottery effect may be lowered, but in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the round lottery effect is executed based on the selected stop symbol. Since it is decided whether or not to play, it is possible to suppress a decrease in confidence in the round lottery production, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

The gaming machine 1 is not limited to the type 2 pachinko machine, and may be a type 1 pachinko machine. When the game machine 1 is a type 1 pachinko machine, the case where the stop result of the special figure variation display game is a special result corresponds to "the case where the result of a predetermined game is a special result", and a high probability state ( The probabilistic state) corresponds to the "state advantageous to the player".

Further, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the plurality of stop symbols (stop symbol patterns) are the first stop symbol (stop symbol patterns 2 and 3) and the second stop symbol (stop symbol pattern 1). The round number determining means (game control device 100) includes the same as the number of round games (number of rounds) depending on whether the selected stop symbol is the first stop symbol or the second stop symbol. The effect execution determination means (game control device 100) determines that the round lottery effect is executed when the selected stop symbol is the first stop symbol, and the selected stop symbol is the second stop. If it is a symbol, it can be configured to decide not to execute the round lottery effect (see FIG. 96).
With this configuration, even if the number of round games is the same, the round lottery effect may or may not be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in confidence in the round lottery effect, and the interest of the game. Can be increased.

Further, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, when the result of a predetermined game is a special result (as a result of the game ball flow-down game in which the game ball flows down the game area 32, the game ball is in a specific area. In a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives a game value to a player (when flowing into), after displaying a plurality of identification symbols in a variable manner, a stop symbol selected from a plurality of stop symbols is displayed. A display device (special figure 1 display D1 and special figure 2 display D2) and an opening pattern determining means (game control device 100) for determining an opening pattern of a large winning opening based on a selected stop symbol, and selection A round number determining means (game control device 100) for determining the number of round games (number of rounds) in the special gaming state based on the stopped symbol is provided, and the plurality of stop symbols are the first of the open patterns. A plurality of first stop symbols corresponding to one open pattern (special figures 1 stop symbols patterns 1 to 3) and a plurality of open patterns corresponding to a second open pattern that is more advantageous to the player than the first open pattern. The second stop symbol (special figure 2 stop symbol patterns 1 to 3) and the plurality of first stop symbols correspond to the first stop (5R, 8R) of the number of round games. The first stop symbol (special figure 1 stop) corresponding to the symbol (special figure 1 stop symbol patterns 1 and 2) and the second number (16R) which is more advantageous for the player than the first number of round games. The plurality of second stop symbols including the symbol pattern 3) are the second stop symbol (special figure 2 stop symbol patterns 1 and 2) corresponding to the first number of times and the second stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times. (Special figure 2 stop symbol pattern 3), and the ratio of selecting the first stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times from the plurality of first stop symbols (10% in the example shown in FIG. 96). The rate at which the second stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times is selected from the plurality of second stop symbols (20% in the example shown in FIG. 96) is different.
Therefore, the ratio at which the first stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times is selected from the plurality of first stop symbols and the second stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times are selected from the plurality of second stop symbols. The number of rounds that is advantageous to the player occurs depending on whether the opening pattern of the large winning opening is disadvantageous to the player or the opening pattern of the large winning opening is advantageous to the player. Since the rates are different, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

The gaming machine 1 is not limited to the type 2 pachinko machine, and may be a type 1 pachinko machine. When the game machine 1 is a type 1 pachinko machine, the case where the stop result of the special figure variation display game is a special result corresponds to "the case where the result of a predetermined game is a special result", and a high probability state ( The probabilistic state) corresponds to the "state advantageous to the player".

Further, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first stop symbol (16R) corresponding to the second number of times (16R) from the plurality of first stop symbols (special figure 1 stop symbol patterns 1 to 3) The second stop symbol from a plurality of second stop symbols (special figure 2 stop symbol patterns 1 to 3) is set to the second number of times, rather than the ratio at which the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 3) is selected (10% in the example shown in FIG. 96). It is possible to configure so that the ratio (20% in the example shown in FIG. 96) in which the corresponding second stop symbol (special figure 2 stop symbol pattern 3) is selected is higher.
With this configuration, the number of rounds that is advantageous to the player when the opening pattern of the large winning opening is advantageous to the player is higher than that when the opening pattern of the large winning opening is disadvantageous to the player. Since the rate is high, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, when the result of a predetermined game is a special result (as a result of the game ball flow-down game in which the game ball flows down the game area 32, the game ball is in a specific area. In a game machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a game value to a player (when the game flows into), after displaying a plurality of identification symbols in a variable manner, the game is selected from a plurality of stop symbols (stop symbol patterns). A display device (special figure 1 display D1 and special figure 2 display D2) for displaying a stop symbol, and an opening pattern determining means (game control device) for determining an opening pattern of a large winning opening based on the selected stop symbol. 100) and a round number determining means (game control device 100) for determining the number of round games (number of rounds) in the special game state based on the selected stop symbol, and the plurality of stop symbols are plural. The first stop symbol (special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 1 to 3) and a plurality of second stop symbols (special figure 2 stop symbol patterns 1 to 3) are included, and the plurality of first stop symbols are round games. The first number of times (5R, 8R) corresponding to the first stop symbol (special figure 1 stop symbol patterns 1 and 2) and the first number of round games are more advantageous to the player. The first stop symbol (special figure 1 stop symbol patterns 3 and 4) corresponding to the second number of times (16R) and the plurality of second stop symbols include the second stop symbol (special figure) corresponding to the first number of times. The first stop symbol (special figure 1 stop symbol) including the 2 stop symbols 1 and 2) and the second stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times (special figure 2 stop symbol pattern 3) and corresponding to the first number of times. Patterns 1 and 2) correspond to the first open pattern (open once) of the open patterns, and the first stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the first open pattern (special figure 1 stop). It includes a symbol pattern 3) and a symbol (special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 4) corresponding to the second open pattern (opened twice) which is more advantageous for the player than the first open pattern among the open patterns. The second stop symbol corresponding to the first number of times (special figure 2 stop symbol patterns 1 and 2) and the second stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times (special figure 2 stop symbol pattern 3) are the second open pattern (twice). The ratio of selecting the first stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times from the plurality of first stop symbols and the second stop corresponding to the second number of times from the plurality of second stop symbols. The rate at which the symbol is selected is the same (10% in the example shown in FIG. 97).
Therefore, the first stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times includes the symbol corresponding to the first open pattern and the symbol corresponding to the second open pattern which is more advantageous to the player than the first open pattern, and the first number of times. The second stop symbol corresponding to the second stop symbol and the second stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times correspond to the second open pattern, and the first stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times is selected from the plurality of first stop symbols. Since the ratio is the same as the ratio at which the second stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times is selected from the plurality of second stop symbols, the second open pattern (that is, the game ball becomes the big winning opening). The incidence of open patterns that are easy to win) increases. Therefore, the rate of occurrence of the number of rounds, which is advantageous for the player, can be increased, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The gaming machine 1 is not limited to the type 2 pachinko machine, and may be a type 1 pachinko machine. When the game machine 1 is a type 1 pachinko machine, the case where the stop result of the special figure variation display game is a special result corresponds to "the case where the result of a predetermined game is a special result", and a high probability state ( The probabilistic state) corresponds to the "state advantageous to the player".

FIG. 101 is a rear view showing the back surface of the game board according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 102 is a rear view showing the back surface of the game board according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 103 is a perspective view showing the back surface of the game board according to the embodiment of the present invention.
As shown in FIGS. 101-103, the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a game control device (not shown), an accessory device 51, an effect control device 300, an accommodation body 1400, and a first relay board. It includes 1500, a second relay board 1600, a first mounting portion 1700, a second mounting portion 1800, a third mounting portion 1900, and a third relay board 1000.
The configuration described here can also be applied to other control devices and devices provided on the pachinko machine 1 and the game board 30. Further, it can be applied to peripheral devices of the pachinko machine 1 such as a ball rental machine.

The game control device includes a game control board and a connector.
The connector is a plurality of members provided on the game control board, and a harness is connected to the connector to be connected to another device or the like.

The accessory device 51 includes a back surface component 1201, a first engaging hole 1202, and a second engaging hole 1203 on the back surface side thereof, and is provided on both the front surface side and the back surface side of the game board 30. It is an exposed device, and is attached to the game board 30 so that a rotating body resembling a drum as a surface component is exposed on the front surface side and a back surface component 1201 is exposed on the back surface side.
The back surface component 1201 is a member that constitutes the back surface of the accessory device 51, and the first mounting portion 1700 is provided on the exposed surface at the rear.
A first engaging hole 1202 and a second engaging hole 1203 are formed in the first mounting portion 1700.
The first engaging hole 1202 is a rectangular hole provided on the lower left side of the back surface component 1201, and the first engaging piece 1401 described later is engaged with this hole.
The second engaging hole 1203 is a rectangular hole provided on the lower right side of the back surface component 1201, and the second engaging piece 1402 described later is engaged with this hole.

The effect control device 300 is a rectangular parallelepiped device having a plurality of connectors (not shown) and has a rectangular parallelepiped shape in front view, and is attached adjacent to the right side of the accessory device 51. Further, the effect control device 300 is attached so as to be obliquely oriented not parallel to the back surface due to the size of the game board 30, that is, the limitation of the front view space on the back surface.

FIG. 105 is a rear view showing the back surface of the game board according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 106 is a perspective view showing the back surface of the game board according to the embodiment of the present invention.
As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the first relay board 1500 is provided on the lower right side of the back surface of the game board 30, and includes a rectangular flat plate-shaped board 1501 and a plurality of connectors 1502 provided on the board 1501. I have.
Further, the first relay board 1500 is provided so that the board 1501 is adjacent to the right side of the second mounting portion described later, and the connector 1502 is connected to the connector 1001 via a harness.
After the wiring connection work is performed on the first relay board 1500, the exposed portion on the back surface side is covered with a covering member (not shown).

The second relay board 1600 is provided above the center of the back surface of the game board 30, and includes a rectangular flat plate-shaped board 1601 and a plurality of connectors 1602 provided on the board 1601.
Further, in the second relay board 1600, the board 1601 is provided adjacent to the left side of the effect control device 300.
The exposed portion of the second relay board 1600 is covered with the covering member 1603 after the wiring connection work is performed.

FIG. 104 is a perspective view showing a third relay board and an accommodating body according to an embodiment of the present invention.
As shown in FIG. 104, the housing body 1400 includes a flat surface portion 1403, a surrounding wall 1404, a first engaging piece 1401 and a second engaging piece 1402.
The flat surface portion 1403 is a member that is separated from and faces the third relay board 1000 when the third relay board 1000 is accommodated, and the plane shape is formed to be substantially the same as that of the third relay board 1000. There is.
Further, in the flat surface portion 1403, screw holes 1403a for attaching and fixing the third relay board 1000 are formed in the vicinity of the four corners of the rectangular plane, and a long hole 1403b extending in parallel with the long side is formed in the center.
The surrounding wall 1404 is a member that rises perpendicularly to the flat surface portion 1403 from the peripheral edge of the flat surface portion 1403, and the surrounding wall 1404 and the flat surface portion 1403 form a space for accommodating the third relay substrate 1000. Further, the surrounding wall 1404 is provided with a notch 1404a on the upper side of the flat surface portion 1403, and the separation space between the flat surface portion 1403 and the third relay board 1000 is communicated with the outside.

The first engaging piece 1401 and the second engaging piece 1402 are provided on both sides of the short side of the rectangular plane and serve as fixing points when they are attached to the first mounting portion 1700 and the second mounting portion 1800, which will be described later. Is. Specifically, one engaging piece is a claw-shaped first engaging piece 1401 having an L-shaped cross section that protrudes outward from the short side, and the other engaging piece protrudes outward from the short side. The second engaging piece 1402 has elasticity along the long side of the U-shaped cross section. Further, the first engaging piece 1401 and the second engaging piece 1402 protrude toward the side opposite to the surrounding wall 1404 with respect to the flat surface portion 1403.

The first engaging piece 1401 is accommodated in the space of the first engaging hole 1202 and is adapted to engage with the back surface component 1201 on the left side of the first engaging hole 1202.
Further, the second engaging piece 1402 is provided with an engaging projection 1402a projecting outward on the short side of the flat surface portion 1403. The engaging projection 1402a is adapted to engage with the right side of the second engaging hole 1203.
Specifically, first, the first engaging piece 1401 is engaged with the first engaging hole 1202, then the second engaging piece 1402 is engaged with the second engaging hole 1203, and the accommodating body 1400 serves as an accessory. It will be attached to the back surface of the device 51.

Further, when the second engaging piece 1402 is engaged with the second engaging hole 1203, the second engaging piece 1402 having a U-shaped cross section is elastically deformed and fitted into the second engaging hole 1203. The engaging projection 1402a is engaged with the right side of the second engaging hole 1203 by returning to the original shape by the restoring force. At this time, the second engaging piece 1402 is not completely restored by the restoring force, and the restoring force remains, and the remaining restoring force is the engagement protrusion 1402a and the second engaging hole 1203. The engaged state is stabilized.
Further, in the housing body 1400, the second engaging piece 1402 is elastically deformed to disengage the engaging projection 1402a, and the second engaging piece 1402 is detached from the second engaging hole 1203. When the engaging piece 1401 is disengaged from the first engaging hole 1202, it can be removed from the first mounting portion 1700, which will be described later.

FIG. 107 is a side view showing a game board according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 108 is a side view showing a game board according to an embodiment of the present invention.
As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, in the first mounting portion 1700, the first engaging hole 1202 and the second engaging hole 1203 are engaged with the first engaging piece 1401 and the second engaging piece 1402, respectively. This is a place where the accommodation body 1400 is attached to the accessory device 51. Further, the first mounting portion 1700 is a portion of the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 that protrudes most rearward.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the second mounting portion 1800 is provided adjacent to the left side of the first relay board 1500, and has a flat surface portion 1801, a third engaging hole 1802, and a fourth engaging hole. It is equipped with 1803.
The flat surface portion 1801 has a flat surface having substantially the same shape as the flat surface portion 1403 of the housing body 1400, and is a portion that comes into contact with the flat surface portion 1403 when the housing body 1400 is attached.
Further, the flat surface portion 1801 is provided with an elongated hole extending in the long side direction at substantially the center of the flat surface, and includes a protruding portion 1801a that projects vertically rearward with respect to the flat surface portion 1801 along the peripheral edge of the elongated hole. ing. The protruding portion 1801a is provided at a position corresponding to the elongated hole 1403b, and is fitted into the elongated hole 1403b when the accommodating body 1400 is attached to the second mounting portion 1800. That is, the protruding portion 1801a is adapted to perform a positioning function between the housing body 1400 and the second mounting portion 1800.

Further, the second mounting portion 1800 is located at a relatively deep position on the back surface of the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, the second mounting portion 1800 is recessed so that the first mounting portion 1700 protrudes rearward from the rearmost portion of the third relay board 1000 in a state where the third relay board 1000 is mounted. There is.
The wiring of the third relay board 1000 is connected, and after the third relay board 1000 is attached to the second attachment portion 1800, the exposed portion on the back surface side is covered with the covering member 1804.

Further, the elongated hole 1801b surrounded by the protruding portion 1801a is an opening that communicates the space inside the pachinko machine 1 with the outside space from the flat surface portion 1801, and the heated inside air inside the pachinko machine 1 is taken from this opening to the outside air. It is designed to function as an exhaust port (heat exhaust port) that exhausts heat. Specifically, in a state where the housing body 1400 is attached to the second attachment portion 1800, the elongated hole 1403b is fitted with the protrusion 1801a, and the tip of the protrusion 1801a is separated from the third relay board 1000. It has become. Therefore, the exhaust is exhausted from the notch 1404a provided in the upper part of the surrounding wall 1404 from the protruding portion 1801a through the space between the flat surface portion 1403 and the third relay board 1000.

The third engaging hole 1802 is provided on the left short side of the flat surface portion 1801, and a space for accommodating the first engaging piece 1401 is provided at the position of the third engaging hole 1802. Further, the housed first engaging piece 1401 is engaged with the left side portion of the third engaging hole 1802.
The fourth engaging hole 1803 is provided on the short side on the right side of the flat surface portion 1801, and a space for accommodating the second engaging piece 1402 is provided at the position of the fourth engaging hole 1803.

Further, when the second engaging piece 1402 is engaged with the fourth engaging hole 1803, the second engaging piece 1402 having a U-shaped cross section is elastically deformed and fitted into the fourth engaging hole 1803. , The engaging protrusion 1402a is engaged by the restoring force on the right side of the fourth engaging hole 1803.
Further, in the housing body 1400, the second engaging piece 1402 is elastically deformed to disengage the engaging projection 1402a, and the second engaging piece 1402 is detached from the fourth engaging hole 1803. The engaging piece 1401 is removed from the second mounting portion 1800 by eliminating the engagement state with the third engaging hole 1802.

That is, the housing body 1400 can be attached to each of the first mounting portion 1700 and the second mounting portion 1800, which is convenient for the manufacturing work of the pachinko machine 1 and the operation of the pachinko machine 1. It can be attached to a place.
Specifically, in the housing body 1400, when the third relay board 1000 is attached, the connector 1001 of the third relay board 1000 and the connector 1502 of the first relay board 1500 are connected by a harness. It is attached to the 1 attachment portion 1700, and is attached to the second attachment portion 1800 when the connection work is completed and the pachinko machine 1 is used.

In other words, during the connection work, the third relay board 1000 is not attached adjacent to the first relay board 1500, is located substantially in the center of the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, and is the most prominent. 1 It is designed to be mounted on the mounting part 1700.
Therefore, when the connector 1001 of the third relay board 1000 and the connector 1502 of the first relay board 1500 are connected by a harness, the connectors 1001 and 1502 do not come close to each other and the connection work is not complicated. 2 Since it is not necessary to perform the connection work in a deep place like the mounting portion 1800, the work becomes easy.
Further, since the first mounting portion 1700 is the most protruding portion on the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, it is easier to mount the harness on the connector 1001 of the third relay board 1000.

FIG. 109 is a rear view showing the back surface of the game board according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 110 is a perspective view showing the back surface of the game board according to the embodiment of the present invention.
As shown in FIGS. 109-110, the third mounting portion 1900 is a place where the effect control device 300 is mounted, and the flat surface portion 1901, the insertion hole 1902, and the engaging groove 1903 are collectively referred to as the third mounting portion. Let it be part 1900.
The flat surface portion 1901 is a member having a flat surface to which the effect control device 300 is abutted when the effect control device 300 is attached, and is fixed on the back surface side of the game board 30 as shown in FIG. 112.
The insertion hole 1902 is provided in the upper part of the flat surface portion 1901, and is a member for fixing the upper part of the effect control device 300. It is an elongated hole extending in the horizontal direction, specifically, a hole formed in a bale shape. is there.
The engagement groove 1903 is provided below the flat surface portion 1901, and is a member for fixing the lower portion of the effect control device 300. The groove is extended in the horizontal direction like the elongated hole of the insertion hole 1902. , The left side of the end of the groove is not provided with a wall surface and a gap is formed. Further, a locking portion 1903a is provided at a position separated from this gap. Further, as shown in FIG. 112, it is fixed on the back surface side of the game board 30.
Although the protection column 1904 is a part of the base member of the control base unit 39, it may be provided as a single member instead of a part of the base member.

FIG. 111 is a rear view showing an effect control board according to an embodiment of the present invention.
As shown in FIG. 111, the effect control device 300 includes an insertion hole 301, a fastening unit 302, a volume adjusting unit 303, and an identification display unit 304.
The insertion hole 301 is a semi-elliptical member projecting upward from a rectangular plane in front view at the upper part of the effect control device 300, and a circular hole is formed at the upper part.
The fastening portion 302 is a member projecting downward from the lower part of the effect control device 300, and is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front.

The volume adjusting unit 303 is provided on the lower left side of the effect control device 300, and is a member that adjusts the volume of the effect sound when playing the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, the volume can be adjusted in all 10 steps from the minimum (0 step) to the maximum (9 step), and the minimum step is the mute setting.
The identification display unit 304 is an identification display provided on the back surface side of the effect control device 300 (the same side as the back surface of the pachinko machine 1) for identifying an individual. As the identification display, for example, a sheet-shaped sticker may be attached, an engraving may be made, or characters may be displayed in a convex shape by press working.

FIG. 112 is a perspective view showing the back surface of the game board according to the embodiment of the present invention.
As shown in FIGS. 110 and 112, in a specific mode in which the effect control device 300 is attached to the third mounting portion 1900, first, the effect control device 300 comes into contact with the flat surface portion 1901 in a state of being slightly shifted to the left. The insertion hole 301 provided in the upper part of the effect control device 300 corresponds to the insertion hole 1902 of the long hole provided in the upper part of the flat surface portion 1901, and the space of the hole corresponds to these two holes. Insert pin A to the middle and temporarily fix it.
The insertion pin A is provided with a large diameter portion having elasticity (not shown) formed at a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion hole 301 and the distance between the upper side and the lower side of the insertion hole 1902 at the tip and the middle abdomen. .. Here, the above-mentioned "insertion to the middle part" means a state in which the insertion holes 301 and 1902 are both arranged in the portion sandwiched between these two large diameter portions.
Further, the separation distance between the large diameter portions is larger than the thickness dimension of the two insertion holes 301 and 1902. That is, in the state of being inserted to the middle part, the position of the insertion hole 301 can freely slide in the extending direction of the insertion hole 1902 of the elongated hole.

Then, by sliding the effect control device 300 diagonally forward to the right along the flat surface portion 1901, the fastening portion 302 provided at the lower portion engages with the engagement groove 1903 from the left gap to the right along the groove. It is accommodated in the engaging groove 1903 while being fitted. At this time, the temporarily fixed insertion pin A slides the insertion hole 1902 of the elongated hole to the right along the extending direction.
Finally, with the effect control device 300 temporarily fixed at a predetermined position, the upper insertion pin A is completely inserted into the two insertion holes 301 and 1902 to be attached and fixed. Here, "completely inserted all the way" means that the insertion hole 301 and the insertion hole 1902 are arranged between the large diameter portion provided on the middle abdomen and the pin head of the insertion pin A. Further, the distance between the large diameter portion of the middle belly and the pin head is substantially the same as the thickness of the insertion hole 301 and the insertion hole 1902 combined. That is, by inserting the insertion hole completely to the back, the position of the insertion hole 301 cannot freely slide in the horizontal direction of the insertion hole 1902 of the elongated hole, and the position is fixed.
Regarding the engagement state between the engagement groove 1903 and the fastening portion 302, even if the insertion pin A is loosened and the insertion hole 301 is misaligned along the insertion hole 1902, the gap in the engagement groove 1903 is reached. Since the locking portion 1903a is provided at a separated position, even if the fastening portion 302 is about to be disengaged from the locking groove 1903, the fastening portion 302 is locked in advance by the locking portion 1903a, so that the engaging portion 302 is engaged. It is designed so that it does not separate from the groove 1903.

FIG. 113 is a rear view showing the back surface of the game board according to the embodiment of the present invention.
As shown in FIG. 113, the protective pillar 1904 is a columnar member provided apart from the flat surface portion 1901 outward, and the effect control device 300 is attached between the protective pillar 1904 and the flat surface portion 1901. It has become.
Therefore, for example, when an object collides with the effect control device 300 from the outside, the protective pillar 1904 is provided outside the effect control device 300, so that the object collides with the protection column 1904 and the effect control is performed. It is designed so that it does not collide directly with the device 300.

Further, the protective pillar 1904 is provided with an opening 1904a at a position corresponding to the identification display unit 304 when the effect control device 300 is attached.
Therefore, the identification content of the identification display unit 304 can be peeked out from the opening 1904a.
Further, the width dimension of the protection pillar 1904 is smaller than the width dimension of the identification display unit 304, and a space can be secured around the protection pillar 1904, from not only the opening 1904a but also the circumference of the protection pillar 1904. The identification display unit 304 can be visually recognized.

Further, a ball regulating member 1905 is provided above the effect control device 300. The ball regulating member 1905 is a member that regulates the destination of the ball so that the game ball falling from above does not directly hit the effect control device 300. For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island-shaped game hall, the game balls supplied to the pachinko machine 1 are stored in the upper part of the pachinko machine 1. When the stored game ball is supplied (when the game ball flows to the storage place), in rare cases, the stored game ball may spill out from the storage place, and the spilled game ball is the lower effect control device 300. Will fall to. Therefore, by providing the ball regulating member 1905 between the effect control device 300 and the storage location, the direct hit of the game ball to the effect control device 300 is prevented.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.
In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is a pachinko machine 1 that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, and connects a harness. A third relay board 1000 provided with a connector for the purpose, a first mounting portion 1700 which is a mounting portion to which one third relay board 1000 can be mounted, and a second mounting portion 1800 are provided.
By doing so, when the third relay board 1000 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, it can be attached to either the first attachment portion 1700 or the second attachment portion 1800, and the wiring connection work can be easily performed. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the third relay board 1000 includes a connector 1001 for connecting the harness, and the first mounting portion 1700 is a mounting portion to which the third relay board 1000 is mounted when the harness is connected. Therefore, the second mounting portion 1800 is assumed to be a mounting portion to which the third relay board 1000 is mounted when the pachinko machine 1 is used.

By doing so, the third relay board 1000 is attached to the first mounting portion 1700 when connecting the harness, and is attached to the second mounting portion 1800 when using the pachinko machine 1, so that the wiring can be connected. It can make the work easier.
Specifically, when connecting the first relay board 1500 and the third relay board 1000 that are close to (adjacent to) the second mounting portion 1800, the first relay board 1500 and the third relay board 1000 are close to each other. Therefore, when the wiring work is performed by attaching to the second mounting portion 1800, the work space for connecting the connectors 1001 and 1502 provided on the third relay board 1000 and the board 1501 with harnesses is narrow and the connection work becomes difficult. However, at the stage of wiring connection work, by attaching the third relay board 1000 to the first mounting portion 1700 instead of the second mounting portion 1800, the first relay board 1500 and the third relay board 1000 are separated further. Can be made to.
Therefore, unlike the case where the first relay board 1500 and the third relay board 1000 are close to each other, the connectors 1001 and 1502 are not arranged close to each other and it is not difficult for the wiring operator's finger to enter, so that it is easy. Wiring work can be performed.
Further, after the wiring work is completed, the game machine can be used with the third relay board 1000 attached to the second attachment portion 1800.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the third relay board 1000 is attached to the first attachment portion 1700, the connectors 1001 and 1502 to which the harness is to be connected are exposed to the outside.
By doing so, when the third relay board 1000 is attached to the first attachment portion 1700, the connector 1001 is exposed to the outside, so that the harness connection work can be easily performed and the wiring connection work is easy. can do.
In other words, instead of mounting the third relay board 1000 on the second mounting portion 1800 adjacent to the first relay board 1500, the third relay board 1000 is mounted on the first mounting portion 1700 located approximately in the center of the back surface of the pachinko machine 1. A large space for installation and wiring connection work is secured, and since each connector 1001, 1502 is exposed to the outside in this state, the work space and the connection work itself between the connector 1001, 1502 and the harness can be easily performed. It is possible to make the wiring connection work easier.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is a pachinko machine 1 that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result. A third relay board 1000 provided with a connector 1001 for connection, a first mounting portion 1700 which is a mounting portion to which the third relay board 1000 can be mounted, a second mounting portion 1800, and the front side of the pachinko machine 1. The first mounting portion 1700 includes an effect control device 300 that is exposed so that the player can visually recognize the effect of the game, and a back surface component 1201 that constitutes at least a part of the back surface of the effect control device 300. It is assumed that the second mounting portion 1800 is provided on the component member 1201 and is provided at a place other than the back surface component member 1201.
By doing so, when the third relay board 1000 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, it can be attached to either the first attachment portion 1700 or the second attachment portion 1800.

Further, the first mounting portion 1700 is provided on the back surface constituent member 1201, and the second mounting portion 1800 is provided on a portion other than the back surface constituent member 1201.
By doing so, the first mounting portion 1700 and the second mounting portion 1800 are provided on separate members on the back surface.
Therefore, unlike the case where the first relay board 1500 and the third relay board 1000 are close to each other, the connectors 1001 and 1502 are not arranged close to each other and it is not difficult for the wiring operator's finger to enter, so that it is easy. Wiring work can be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, an accommodating body 1400 for accommodating the third relay board 1000 is provided, and the accommodating body 1400 can be attached to both the first mounting portion 1700 and the second mounting portion 1800. I made it.
By doing so, the accommodating body 1400 can be appropriately attached to the first attachment portion 1700 or the second attachment portion 1800 according to the convenience, and the wiring connection work can be facilitated.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first mounting portion 1700 is provided at a position that protrudes most rearward on the back surface of the pachinko machine 1.
By doing so, when performing the wiring work, the third relay board 1000 attached to the first mounting portion 1700 is most projected on the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, and the work of connecting the harness to the connector 1001 is easy. Can be.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the second mounting portion 1800 is provided at a relatively deep position on the back surface of the pachinko machine 1.
By doing so, the third relay board 1000 is attached to the second attachment portion 1800 located at a position relatively deep from the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 after being attached to the first attachment portion for wiring work. Wiring work can be easily performed at the protruding portion, and after the work is completed, the third relay board 1000 can be arranged at a relatively deep portion on the back surface in consideration of space saving.
Here, for example, when a plurality of adjacent rows of pachinko machines 1 are arranged so that the back surfaces of the pachinko machines 1 face each other to form a so-called island-shaped game space, the third relay board 1000 is used as the first. If an attempt is made to play a game while the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the attachment portion 1700, the distance between the third relay boards 1000 of the opposing pachinko machines 1 becomes narrow, and it becomes impossible to secure a sufficient distance.

For this reason, it is not preferable to play the game while the third relay board 1000 is attached to the first attachment portion 1700 that protrudes most from the back surface.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when playing a game, the first mounting portion 1700 protrudes rearward than the rearmost portion of the third relay board 1000 in a state where the third relay board 1000 is mounted. Since the third relay board 1000 is mounted on the second mounting portion 1800 that is recessed as described above, the distance between the third relay board 1000 and the facing pachinko machine 1 can be secured by the distance between the facing first mounting portions 1700. it can.

Further, in the present embodiment, the flat surface portion 1801 of the second mounting portion 1800 is provided with an elongated hole 1801b surrounded by the protruding portion 1801a. The elongated hole 1801b is an opening that allows the space inside and outside the pachinko machine 1 to communicate with each other through the flat surface portion 1801.
By doing so, the elongated hole 1801b can function as an exhaust port (heat exhaust port) for exhausting the heated inside air inside the pachinko machine 1 to the outside air, and the inside of the pachinko machine 1 is heated by heat storage. Can be prevented.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 is assumed to be attached at an angle to the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, that is, obliquely to the game board 30.
By doing so, it is possible to reduce the occupied area of the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 in a plan view as compared with the case where the effect control device 300 is provided parallel to the back surface.
Therefore, when the accessory device 51 is a relatively large device, it is not necessary to increase the size of the game board 30 in order to attach the effect control device 300 (actually, it is not possible to increase the size of the game board 30 due to restrictions such as standards. Difficult), space can be saved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the second engaging piece 1402 is engaged with the second engaging hole 1203, the second engaging piece 1402 having a U-shaped cross section is elastically deformed to form the second engaging hole. The engaging projection 1402a is engaged with the right side of the second engaging hole 1203 by being fitted in the 1203 and returning to the original shape by the restoring force.
At this time, the second engaging piece 1402 was not completely restored by the restoring force, and the restoring force remained.
By doing so, the remaining restoring force can stabilize the engaged state between the engaging projection 1402a and the second engaging hole 1203, and the housing body 1400 and the first mounting portion 1700 to the second mounting portion 1800 can be brought into contact with each other. The mounting state can be stabilized.

Further, in the present embodiment, the protective pillar 1904 is provided so as to be separated from the flat surface portion 1901 outward, and the effect control device 300 is attached between the protective pillar 1904 and the flat surface portion 1901.
By doing so, for example, when an object collides from the outside of the effect control device 300, the protective pillar 1904 is provided on the outside of the effect control device 300, so that the object collides with the protective column 1904. It is designed so that it does not directly collide with the direct effect control device 300.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the protective pillar 1904 is provided with an opening 1904a at a position corresponding to the identification display unit 304 when the effect control device 300 is attached.
By doing so, the identification content of the identification display unit 304 can be visually observed from the opening 1904a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the width dimension of the protective pillar 1904 is smaller than the width dimension of the identification display unit 304.
By doing so, a space can be secured around the protective pillar 1904, and the identification display unit 304 can be visually recognized not only from the opening 1904a but also from the periphery of the protective pillar 1904.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ball regulating member 1905 is provided above the effect control device 300.
By doing so, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island-shaped amusement park, the game balls supplied to the pachinko machine 1 are stored in the upper part of the pachinko machine 1, but the stored game balls are stored. , When the game ball is supplied (when the game ball flows to the storage place), it may spill out from the storage place in rare cases, and the spilled game ball will fall to the lower effect control device 300. .. Therefore, by providing the ball regulating member 1905 between the effect control device 300 and the storage location, it is possible to prevent the game ball from directly hitting the effect control device 300.

Although the present invention has been specifically described above based on the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment and can be modified without departing from the gist thereof.
In the present embodiment, after the wiring connection work is completed, the coating members 1603 and 1804 are provided on the third relay board 1000, the first relay board, and the second relay board 1600, respectively, but the coating is not limited to this. The members 1603 and 1804 may not be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the insertion hole 301 and the insertion hole 1902 are temporarily fixed, and then the fastening portion 302 and the engaging groove 1903 are engaged with each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fastening portion 302 is not limited to this. And the engagement groove 1903 may be engaged with each other, and then the insertion hole 301 and the insertion hole 1902 may be positioned and fixed, and temporary fixing may be omitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first engaging piece 1401 and the second engaging piece 1402 are engaged with the first engaging hole 1202 and the second engaging hole 1203, respectively, and the housing body 1400 is attached to the first mounting portion 1700. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any configuration may be used as long as the housing body 1400 can be attached to the first attachment portion 1700.
Further, the configuration in which the accommodating body 1400 is attached to the second attachment portion 1800 may be any configuration in the same manner.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper portion of the effect control device 300 is fixed by the insertion holes 301 and 1902 and the insertion pin A, and the lower portion is fixed by the fastening portion 302 and the engagement groove 1903. Not limited to this, for example, an accommodating body corresponding to the effect control device 300 may be provided and attached to the third attachment portion 1900 with the same configuration as the third relay board 1000.

Further, the insertion pin A and the insertion holes 301 and 1902 may be substituted for the second engagement piece 1402 and the second engagement hole 1203, which are the portions to which the third relay board 1000 is attached. By substituting it, temporary fixing becomes possible, and it becomes easy to grasp the mounting position of the third relay board 1000 by temporary fixing, so that improvement in work efficiency can be expected.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and is, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the gaming ball of. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses a game ball. Further, the configurations of the above-described modifications can be applied in combination as appropriate.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
35 Variable winning device 47 Ball flow path forming member 47a1 Front surface (first member)
47a2 Rear surface (second member)
47a3 1st gap (regulatory part)
47b1 Left side (first member)
47b2 Right side (second member)
47b3 Second gap (regulatory part)
62 Taiko accessory (predetermined member)
63c Back discharge flow path forming member (discharging area forming member)
63c1 projecting piece (protruding part)
65a Protective member (re-entry regulation part)
77 V movable member (movable member)
80 Decision device (decision means)
82 Horizontal movable member (first movable member)
85 Vertical movable member (second movable member)
100 Game control device (round number determination means, effect execution determination means)
300 production control device (round lottery production execution means)
1000 3rd relay board (board)
1001 Connector 1700 1st mounting part 1800 2nd mounting part D1 Special figure 1 Display (display device)
D2 Special figure 2 display (display device)

Claims (1)

In a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives a game value to a player when the result of a predetermined game becomes a special result.
A determination means for determining whether or not a game ball has flowed into a specific area and making a determination regarding the special gaming state based on the determination result is provided.
The specific area comprises a first specific area and a second specific area and a third specific area that are more advantageous than the first specific area .
The determining means includes a first movable member capable of guiding the game ball to either the first specific region or the third specific region, and a second movable member capable of guiding the game ball to the second specific region. With members,
The feature is that the game ball in the state of being guided to the first specific region by the first movable member can be guided to the second specific region by the action of the second movable member. A game machine to play.

Images